Category Archives: Teachers’ Resources

Mwalimu Sacco Branch Annual General Meetings and elections 2021

Mwalimu National Sacco has issued a notice for the 2021 Branch Annual General Meetings, AGMs. In a circular sent to all Branch Chairmen, the Sacco Chief Executive Officer, Alphonse Kaio, directs that the AGMs be held by 28th February 2021.

During the AGMs, elections to fill the vacant delegate slots should be carried out. Vetting and Nomination Committee as read with By Law 67 (a) the names of members who want to vie as delegates must be forwarded to the Vetting and Nomination Committee via the Chief Executive Officer.

To be able to comply with the Covid-19 health restrictions promulgated by the Ministry of Health on gatherings the Branches are required to observe the following:-

  1. The AGM must take place within two (2) hours.
  2. All AGMs shall be physical meetings, no virtual meetings shall be permissible, neither hybrid of physical and virtual allowable.
  3. The venue must be sufficient to accommodate your branch membership while only occupying 1/3 of the available accommodation within the venue. You are encouraged to pitch up tents in open fields as this will afford you the advantage of good ventilation and appropriate social distancing. The office will share with you the number of members in your branch to assist in deciding the choice of venue.
  4. The venue must be sanitized the day before the AGM and the morning before the AGM.
  5. Sanitizers and social distancing are a requisite on the date of the AGM.
  6. Because the meetings are restricted to two (2) hours there will be no cooking or eating at the venue.
  7. The returning officer should be the DCO as provided for in the Society’s by-laws.
See also;

After the AGMS, the following should be submitted to the CEO:

  • Minutes of the Branch AGM properly signed.
  • List of Members who attended the meeting with their TSC/PNo and Cell phone Number.
  • Election Returns:
    Name of the Winner
    Zone
    Position
    School
    Address, Mobile Number and E-mail.

The above returns should reach the Head quarter offices on or before 8th March 2021. The Sacco warns that those who will not have filed returns by this date will not be invited to attend the ADM.

EXAMS FOR ALL FORM 2 SUBJECTS

Download free Form Two Exams With their marking schemes here.

FREE FORM 2 EXAMS WITH THEIR MARKING SCHEMES.

QUESTION PAPERS

ENGLISH

KISWAHILI

MATHEMATICS

BIOLOGY

CHEMISTRY

PHYSICS

HISTORY

CRE

GEOGRAPHY

AGRICULTURE

BUSINESS STUDIES

MARKING SCHEMES

ENGLISH

KISWAHILI

MATHEMATICS

BIOLOGY

CHEMISTRY

PHYSICS

HISTORY

CRE

GEOGRAPHY

AGRICULTURE

BUSINESS STUDIES

MORE FORM 2 EXAM DOWNLOADS.

Form 2 free complete exams for term 1-3

Free form two exams and marking schemes for all subjects

Form 2 all subjects exams, assignments: free term 1-3 exams

Form 2 exams with marking scheme (Comprehensive papers)

FORM 2 ALL SUBJECTS EXAMS, ASSIGNMENTS: FREE TERM 1-3 EXAMS &…

Form 2 notes for all subjects free download

Topic by Topic Revision Questions Free Downloads (All Form 1, 2,…

End of term 1, 2 and 3 Free Exams; Questions plus…

Best Poetry High School Notes

Best Poetry High School Notes

INTRODUCTION TO POETRY

Definition of Poetry

Ø  poetry has no one set definition because it can mean so many things to different people. The following are some common definitions:

·       it is the art of writing thoughts, ideas, and dreams into imaginative language which may contain verse, pause, meter, repetition, and/or rhyme.

·       writing that formulates a concentrated imaginative awareness of experience in language chosen and arranged to create a specific emotional response through meaning, sound,and rhythm

  • A poet is the one who writes poetry.
  • A poem is a written expression of emotion or ideas in an arrangement of words or verse, most often rhythmically.

 

Different Types of Poetry

  • There are over 50 types of poetry.
  • Poetry is categorized by:
  1. the number of lines in the poem, for example, sonnet
  2. the words in the poem,
  3. whether it rhymes or not, and
  4. what it is about, for example, love poetry, death poetry, etc
  • Below are the common types of poetry:
  • Haikus
  • Sonnets
  • Name poems
  • Free verse poems

Haikus

  • The haiku originated from Japan,.
  • It’s the shortest type of poem and, often, the most difficult to understand.
  • Haiku poems consist of 3 lines.
  • The first and last lines of a Haiku have 5 syllables and the middle line has 7 syllables.
  • The lines rarely rhyme.

Look at the example below:

Easter Chocolate Haiku

by Kaitlyn Guenther

Easter bunny hides
Easter eggs are out of sight
Kids look everywhere

 

Free verse poems

  • A free verse is the loosest type of poem.
  • It can consist of as many lines as the writer wants.
  • It can either rhyme or not, and it does not require any fixed metrical pattern.

Look at the example below:

From Marriage
Marianne Moore

This institution,

perhaps one should say enterprise
out of respect for which
one says one need not change one’s mind
about a thing one has believed in,
requiring public promises
of one’s intention
to fulfill a private obligation:
I wonder what Adam and Eve
think of it by this time,
this fire-gilt steel
alive with goldenness;
how bright it shows—

Sonnets

  • A sonnet is best described as a lyric poem that consists of fourteen lines.
  • Sonnet’s have at least one or two conventional rhyme schemes.

An example of a sonnet is the poem below:

From Visions
Francesco Petrarch

Being one day at my window all alone,

So manie strange things happened me to see,
As much as it grieveth me to thinke thereon.
At my right hand a hynde appear’d to mee,
So faire as mote the greatest god delite;
Two eager dogs did her pursue in chace.
Of which the one was blacke, the other white:
With deadly force so in their cruell race

They pincht the haunches of that gentle beast,

That at the last, and in short time, I spide,
Under a rocke, where she alas, opprest,
Fell to the ground, and there untimely dide.
Cruell death vanquishing so noble beautie
Oft makes me wayle so hard a desire.

Name poems

  • They are popular among children and are often used in schools.
  • The name of the person becomes the poem.
  • Each letter in the name is the first letter in the line of the poem.

Study DUNCAN poem below:

Drew naughty cucumbers frenetically
Umbilical yet chubby
Notified earls generously
Cavorted willfully
Apologized selfishly
Napped frankly but courageously

Note:There is a very wide definition of what constitutes poetry, and although some types of poetry can be grouped together in specific styles, creativity is the key to poetry and a new poet can choose to write in any style he wants, even if it doesn’t fit into one of the recognized types.

PERSONA

PERSONA

  • A persona is a character taken on by a poet to speak in a poem.
  • Dramatic monologues create a persona; however, as a poem using a persona need not tell a reader anything about the situation of the speaker, the narrative, or the person that the poem is spoken to, a persona-poem need not be a dramatic monologue.

A Freedom Song

Atieno washes dishes,
Atieno plucks the chicken,
Atieno gets up early,
Beds her sacks down in the kitchen,
Atieno eight years old,
Atieno yo.

Since she is my sister’s child
Atieno needs no pay.
While she works my wife can sit
Sewing every sunny day:
With her earnings I support
Atieno yo.

Atieno’ sly and jealous,
Bad example to the kids
Since she minds them, like a schoolgirl
Wants their dresses, shoes and beads,
Atieno ten years old,
Atieno yo.

Now my wife has gone to study
Atieno is less free.
Don’t I keep her, school my own ones,
Pay the party, union fee,
All for progress! Aren’t you grateful
Atieno yo?

Visitors need much attention,
All the more when I work night.
That girl spends too long at market.
Who will teach her what is right?
Atieno rising fourteen,
Atieno yo.

Atieno’s had a baby
So we know that she is bad.
Fifty fifty it may live
And repeat the life she had
Ending in post-partum bleeding,
Atieno yo.

Atieno’s soon replaced;
Meat and sugar more than all
She ate in such a narrow life
Were lavished at her funeral.
Atieno’s gone to glory,
Atineo yo.

Marjorie Oludhe-Macgoye

The persona in the poem is Atieno’s uncle. He says; “since she’s my sister’s child/Atieno needs no pay.

 

SUBJECT-MATTER

  • A poem’s subject matter is what the poem is about.
  • To understand subject matter, you need to answer the questions below.
  1. What event, situation, or experience does the poem describe or record?
  2. Who is the speaker? Is the poet speaking in the role of another person, an animal, a thing?
  3. To whom is the speaking talking?
  4. What is the time setting – hour of day, season, era?
  5. What is the place setting?

In the poem “Freedom Song”, can you discuss what the poem is about?

The poem is about a young girl called Atieno who is mistreated by her own uncle. She works without pay and ends in death due to post partum bleeding.

 

Now read the poem below.

 

THE GRACEFUL GIRRAFE CANNOT BECOME A MONKEY

Okot P B’TEK (Uganda)

 

My husband tells me

I have no ideas

Of modern beauty.

He says

I have stuck

To old-fashioned hair styles.

 

He says

I am stupid and very backward,

That my hair style

Makes him sick

Because I am dirty.

 

It is true

I cannot do my hair

As white women do.

 

Listen,

My father comes from Payira,

My mother is a woman of Koc!

I am a true Acoli

I am not a half-caste

I am not a slave girl;

My father was not brought home

By the spear

My mother was not exchanged

For a basket of millet.

 

 

Ask me what beauty is

To the Acoli

And I will tell you;

I will show it to you

If you give me a chance!

 

You once saw me,

You saw my hair style

And you admired it,

And the boys loved it

At the arena

Boys surrounded me

And fought for me.

 

My mother taught me

Acoli hair fashions;

Which fits the kind

Of hair of the Acoli,

And the occasion.

 

Listen,

Ostrich plumes differ

From chicken feathers,

A monkey’s tail

Is different from that of a giraffe,

The crocodile’s skin

Is not like the guinea fowl’s,

And the hippo is naked, and hairless.

 

The hair of the Acoli

Is different from that of the Arabs;

The Indians’ hair

Resembles the tail of a horse;

It is like sisal strings

And needs to be cut

With scissors.

It is black,

And is different from that of a white woman.

 

A white woman’s hair

Is soft like silk;

It is light

And brownish like

That of a brown monkey,

And is very different from mine.

A black woman’s hair

Is thick and curly;

It is true

Ring-worm sometimes eat up

A little girl’s hair

And this is terrible;

But when hot porridge

Is put on the head

And the dance is held

Under the sausage-fruit tree

And the youths have sung

 

You, Ring worm

Who is eating Duka’s hair

Here is your porridge,

 

Then the girl’s hair

Begins to grow again

And the girl is pleased.

What is this poem about?

 

BUILDING THE NATION

“Today I did my share in building the nation.
I drove a Permanent Secretary to an important, urgent function
In fact, to a luncheon at the Vic.

The menu reflected its importance
Cold bell beer with small talk,
Then fried chicken with niceties
Wine to fill the hollowness of the laughs
Ice-cream to cover the stereotype jokes
Coffee to keep the PS awake on the return journey.

I drove the Permanent Secretary back.
He yawned many times in back of the car
Then to keep awake, he suddenly asked,
Did you have any lunch friend?
I replied looking straight ahead
And secretly smiling at his belated concern
That I had not, but was slimming!

Upon which he said with a seriousness
That amused more than annoyed me,
Mwananchi, I too had none!
I attended to matters of state.
Highly delicate diplomatic duties you know,
And friend, it goes against my grain,
Causes me stomach ulcers and wind.

Ah, he continued, yawning again,
The pains we suffer in building the nation! So the PS had ulcers too!
My ulcers I think are equally painful
Only they are caused by hunger,
Not sumptuous lunches!

So two nation builders
Arrived home this evening
With terrible stomach pains
The result of building the nation-in different ways!”

(a) Who is the persona in this poem?

The persona is the senior government officer’s driver who drives him to an expensive hotel.

(b) What is the subject matter of the poem?

The poem is about the government officer who attends an official function at a hotel. The meals he takes here are expensive. The driver looks at him as he eats..

 

 

 

THEMATIC MESSAGE

  • Thematic message is the lesson the poet is attempting to express in the poem.
  • Here we ask ourselves questions like: What seems to be the poet’s purpose in writing this – what message, ideas, issues, themes, (etc.) are communicated?

Thematic Message in “THE GRACEFUL GIRRAFE CANNOT BECOME A MONKEY”

 

Africans should be proud of their identity. No matter what they do Africans will remain Africans.

 

MESSAGE in Building the Nation

  • If we wish to do well in nation building we must as public servants respect everything that belongs to the state; money, property, working hours etc.
  • If the high class is not careful with nation building one day the oppressed may revolt.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

STYLISTIC DEVICES (RHETORICAL DEVICES, FIGURES OF SPEECH)

Stylistic devices

  • In this section, we will learn some of the most important stylistic devices (also called rhetorical devices or figures of speech)
  • Stylistic devices make poem:
  1. more interesting and lively; and
  2. help you to get and keep reader’s / listener’s attention.
  • Some of these stylistic devices include:
  1. Alliteration
  2. Allusion
  3. Anaphora
  4. Antithesis
  5. Hyperbole
  6. Hypophora
  7. Litotes
  8. Metaphor
  9. Metonymy
  10. Onomatopoeia
  11. Parallelism
  12. Parenthesis
  13. Personification
  14. Points of view
  15. Repetition
  16. Rhetorical Question
  17. Simile
  18. Synecdoche
  19. Understatement

Stylistic devices can be grouped as:

  • Figures of speech, such as,
  • Synecdoche
  • Metonymy
  • Similes
  • Metaphors
  • Apostrophe, etc
  • Sound devices/techniques, such as:
  • Alliteration
  • Assonance
  • Consonance
  • Repetition

Figurative language

A figure of speech is any way of saying something other than the ordinary way. Figurative language is language using figures of speech. Irony- a subtle of meaning

Synecdoche

Synecdoche is a literary device that refers to a whole as one of its parts. For example, someone might refer to her car as her “wheels,” or a teacher might ask his class to put their eyes on him as he explains something. Or Workers can be referred to as ‘pairs of hands’, a vehicle as one′s ‘wheels’

Metonymy

Definition of Metonymy

  • Metonymy is a figure of speech in which something is called by a new name that is related in meaning to the original thing or concept. Common Examples of Metonymy

Examples In Regular Language

  • “He writes a fine hand.” – This means that the person writes neatly or has good handwriting.
  • The big house—Refers to prison
  • “The pen is mightier than the sword.” – This only means that words spoken well are mightier than military force.
  • “We have always remained loyal to the crown.” – The crown here stands to symbolize the king of a particular country. This metonymy is used commonly when talking or writing.
  • “The House was called to order.” – This means that the ‘members’ of a House, assuming that it’s a House of Parliament, were called to order.
  • ‘He is a man of cloth’ – This only means to say that the man who the sentence is talking about is a man who belongs to a religious sect; cloth signifies that ‘robes’ worn by religious men.
  • ‘She works with a newspaper’ – Newspaper  stands to represent a group of journalists and editors working together to churn out news items.

Consider the poem below:

 

We passed the School, where Children strove At Recess, in the Ring

We passed the fields of Gazing Grain

We passed the Setting Sun

Or rather, He passed Us

The Dews drew quivering and chill

For only Gossamer, my Gown

My Tippet, only Tulle

We paused before a House that seemed

A Swelling of the Ground

The Roof was scarcely visible

The Cornice in the Ground Since then ’tis

Centuries, and yet Feels shorter than the

Day I first surmised the Horses’ Heads

Were toward Eternity

Because I Could Not Stop For Death –

Emily Dickinson

 

At a quick look, it may be difficult to find out the use of metonymies in the poem above. However, when you take a deeper look at the poem and are better acquainted with a metonymy as a figure of speech, the whole process should be a breeze.

Look at the first line in the first poem: “We passed the School, where Children strove”. The word ‘school’ represents a building, but then school also stands to represent the children studying in that particular school.

 

Difference Between Metonymy and Synecdoche

  • Metonymy and synecdoche are very similar figures of speech, and some consider synecdoche to be a specific type of metonymy.
  • Synecdoche occurs when the name of a part is used to refer to the whole, such as in “There are hungry mouths to feed.” The mouths stand in for the hungry people. The definition of metonymy is more expansive, including concepts that are merely associated in meaning and not necessarily parts of the original thing or concept.

Function of Metonymy

Poets use metonymy:

  1. to address something in a more poetic and unique way.
  2. to make statements more concise.

Apostrophe

Similar to ‘personification’ but indirect. The speaker addresses someone absent or dead, or addresses an inanimate or abstract object as if it were human.

Sample Apostrophe Poem

DEATH BE NOT PROUD

JOHN DONNE (England)

Death be not proud, though some have called thee

Might and dreadful, for thou art not so;

For those whom thou think’st thou dost overthrow

Die not, poor Death, nor yet canst thou kill me.

From rest and sleep, which but thy pictures be,

Much pleasure- then from thee much more must flow;

And soonest our best men with thee do go,

Rest of their bones and soul’s delivery.

Thou art slave to fate, chance, kings and desperate men,

And dost with poison, war, and sickness dwell;

And poppy or charms can make us sleep as well,

And better than thy stroke. Why swell’st thou then?

One short sleep past, we wake eternally,

And death shall be no more; Death, thou shalt die.

Explanation

The poet addresses death but death does not respond. Eg he says ‘poor death’ which is an embarrassing way to talk to someone who considers himself tough.

Anaphora

  • This is where successive clauses or sentences start with the same word(s)
  • The same word or phrase is used to begin successive clauses or sentences.
  • This makes the reader’s / listener’s attention to be drawn directly to the message of the sentence.
  • The most common examples in prose are:
  • Every child must be taught these principles. Every citizen must uphold them. And every immigrant, by embracing these ideals, makes our country more, not less, American.
  • The beginning of wisdom is silence. The second step is listening. (unknown)
  • A man without ambition is dead. A man with ambition but no love is dead. A man with ambition and love for his blessings here on earth is ever so alive. (Pearl Bailey)

Sample Anaphora Poem

I have been one acquainted with the night.
I have walked out in rain – and back in rain.
I have outwalked the furthest city light.

I have looked down the saddest city lane.
I have passed by the watchman on his beat
And dropped my eyes, unwilling to explain.

I have stood still and stopped the sound of feet
When far away an interrupted cry
Came over houses from another street,

But not to call me back or say good-bye;
And further still at an unearthly height,
One luminary clock against the sky

Proclaimed the time was neither wrong nor right.
I have been one acquainted with the night.

Robert Frost

  • You realize there is realize that the phrase “I have” is the same in:

I have been one acquainted with the night.
I have walked out in rain—and back in rain.
I have outwalked the furthest city light.
I have looked down the saddest city lane.
I have passed by the watchman on his beat
And dropped my eyes, unwilling to explain.

 

Antithesis

Examples:

  • That’s one small step for a man, one giant leap for mankind. (Neil Armstrong)
  • To err is human; to forgive, divine. (Pope)
  • It is easier for a father to have children than for children to have a real father. (Pope)
  • Antithesis is a figure of speech which refers to the juxtaposition of contrasting ideas.
  • Antithesis emphasises the opposition between two ideas.
  • The structure of the phrases / clauses is usually similar in order to draw the reader’s / listener’s attention directly to the contrast.
  • It involves the bringing out of a contrast in the ideas by an apparent contrast in the words, phrases, clauses, or sentences, within a parallel grammatical structure.

Examples:

These are the common examples of antithesis:

  • “Man proposes, God disposes.”
  • “To err is human, to forgive, divine”
  • “Love is an ideal thing, marriage a real thing.”
  • “That’s one small step for man, one giant leap for mankind.”
  • It is easier for a father to have children than for children to have a real father.
  • “Many are called, but few are chosen.”

Sample Antithesis Poem

 

Read the part of John Donne’s poem “Community

“Good we must love, and must hate ill,
For ill is ill, and good good still;
But there are things indifferent,
Which we may neither hate, nor love,
But one, and then another prove,
As we shall find our fancy bent.”

  • Two contrasting words “love” and “hate” are combined in the above lines. It emphasizes that we love good because it is always good and we hate bad because it is always bad. It is a matter of choice to love or hate things which are neither good nor bad.

Function of Antithesis

  • When contrasting ideas are brought together, the idea is expressed more emphatically.
  • It helps bring forth a judgment on either the pros or the cons. This is after we examine the contrasting ideas.

 

Hyperbole

Ø It refers to a deliberate exaggeration

  • It draws the attention to a message that the poet wants to emphasise.

Example:I was so hungry, I could eat an elephant.

  • Do not confuse it with

 

Sample Hyperbole Poems

Appetite

In a house the size of a postage stamp
lived a man as big as a barge.
His mouth could drink the entire river
You could say it was rather large
For dinner he would eat a trillion beans
And a silo full of grain,
Washed it down with a tanker of milk
As if he were a drain.

What Am I?

I’m bigger than the entire earth
More powerful than the sea
Though a million, billion have tried
Not one could ever stop me.
I control each person with my hand
and hold up fleets of ships.
I can make them bend to my will
with one word from my lips.
I’m the greatest power in the world
in this entire nation.
No one should ever try to stop
a child’s imagination.

My Dog

His bark breaks the sound barrier
His nose is as cold as an ice box.
A wag of his tail causes hurricanes
His jumping causes falling rocks.
He eats a mountain of dog food
And drinks a water fall dry.
But though he breaks the bank
He’s the apple of my eye.

Poetry by Sharon Hendricks

Understatement

  • A statement is deliberately weakened to sound ironical or softened to sound more polite.

Examples are:

  • I know a little about running a company. (a successful businessman might modestly say.)
  • I think we have slightly different opinions on this topic. (instead of: I don’t agree with you at all.)
  • “It is just a little cool today” – when the temperature outside is 5° below zero.
  • “The food was tolerable” – on the food that was prepared by the best chef in the world.
  • “It was ok” – when a top ranker was asked about his exam results.
  • “I wouldn’t say he was thin” – describing a very obese person.
  • “He is a little on the old side” – describing a very old person.
  • “I wouldn’t say it tasted great” – on terrible food.

Sample Understatement Poem

Fire and Ice

By Robert Frost

Some say the world will end in fire,

Some say in ice.

From what I’ve tasted of desire

I hold with those who favor fire.

But if it had to perish twice,

I think I know enough of hate

To say that for destruction ice

Is also great

And would suffice.

Consider: I think I know enough of hate, to say that for destruction ice, is also great, and would suffice’

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Rhetorical Questions

  • The author speaker raises a question that doesn’t need a direct answer.
  • The answer is seen as obvious.
  • Rhetorical questions are used to provoke, emphasise or argue.
  • The line following the rhetorical question is not answer to it.

Sample Rhetorical Questons Poems

 What happens to a dream deferred?

Does it dry up
like a raisin in the sun?
Or fester like a sore—
And then run?
Does it stink like rotten meat?
Or crust and sugar over—
like a syrupy sweet?

Maybe it just sags
like a heavy load.

Or does it explode?

How will i die

The more i think about it the more I wonderwill i die in a deep slumber?, or will the heavens send a angel for me.will a car come from around the corner and hit me will a robber stick me up at gun point……will he squeeze the trigger and will the bullet land in my skull and then i diewill i die of cancer or some unknown bacteria will i die of an heart attack will i get food poising from my favorite dishes will i die from a lack of sleep will i die at the hands of mercy or at the hand the hands of my greatest enemywill i be pushed from a tall mountain peekoh how frustrating will i die not knowing how i will die should i treat this question as a rhetorical questionoh how will i die urggggggggggg!!!!!!!!!!

Terrica Richards

 Hypophora

  • Hypophora is a figure of speech in which a writer raises a question and then immediately provides an answer to that question.
  • The speaker asks a question and answers it.
  • Hypophora is used to get the audience’s attention and make them curious.
  • The question is often raised at the beginning of a stanza and answered in the course of that stanza.
  • This kind of question can also be used to introduce a new topic of discussion.

Examples are:

  • Why is it better to love than be loved? It is surer.
  • How many countries have actually hit the targets set at Rio, or in Kyoto in 1998, for cutting greenhouse-gas emissions? Precious few.
  • Should not be confused with rhetorical questions.

Difference between Hypophora and Rhetorical Question

The basic difference between hypophora and a rhetorical question is that in a rhetorical question the answer is not provided by the writer since it does not require an answer.

However, in hypophora, the writer first poses a question and then answers that question immediately.

Functions of Hypophora

  • The major purpose of using hypophora is to create curiosity among the readers.
  • It helps to capture the attention of the audience.
  • However, hypophora can also be employed to introduce new discussions or topics of importance about which the readers might not have information.
  • It can also be used as a directional device to change the topic.

Litotes

Litotes is a form of understatement which uses the denied opposite of a word to weaken or soften a message.

Examples:

  • That’s not bad. (instead of: That’s good/great.)
  • Money isn’t easy to find . (instead of: Money is  hard/difficult to find.)
  • They aren’t the happiest couple around.
  • He’s not the ugliest fellow around!
  • She’s not the brightest girl in the class.
  • The food is not bad.
  • It is no ordinary city.
  • That sword was not useless to the warrior now.
  • He was not unfamiliar with the works of Dickens.
  • She is not as young as she was.
  • You are not wrong.
  • Einstein is not a bad mathematician.
  • Heat waves are not rare in the summer.
  • It won’t be easy to find crocodiles in the dark.
  • He is not unlike his dad.
  • That’s no small accomplishment.
  • He is not the kindest person I’ve met.
  • That is no ordinary boy.
  • He is not unaware of what you said behind his back.
  • This is no minor matter.
  • The weather is not unpleasant at all.
  • She’s no doll.
  • That was no small issue.
  • The city is not unclean.
  • Rap videos with dancers in them are not uncommon
  • Running a marathon in under two hours is no small accomplishment.
  • She’s no idiot.
  • That’s not a meager sum.
  • You’re not doing badly.
  • That’s no mean feat.

 

Simile

Two things are compared directly by using ‘like’ , ‘as’, ‘similar to’etc.

Sample Simile Poems

Berkley

Black as midnight,
Bad as the devil
With eyes like pieces of dark chocolate,
He thinks he’s king of the world,
My dog Berkley.
He’s very much like a pig
With his pudgy stomach and all.
Like a leech, he’s always attached
To his next meal.

Even though he’s as bad as the devil,
Berkley is my best fellow.

Stars

They are like flashlights in the night sky;
God’s little helpers guiding us on our journeys.
Stars are as bright as a lighthouse on an icy, ocean night;
they are like guardians committed to bringing you home.

Birds

Chirping non-stop, like a machine in the trees,
Building their nest like little worker bees.
They sing their songs, like chatter-boxes.
As regular as alarm clocks,
Waking people up each day.
They are silent at night,
Like snakes advancing on prey.

My Cat

Eyes like a green-yellow crayon,
Almost as bright as a ripe orange.
My cat rules my heart and my actions.
I am as a puppet on strings
When he purrs against me
Like I am a warm blanket heating him in the cold.

My Friend

She is as crazy as a rooster;
Still I love her like a sister.
Her hair is black and dark
Like the color of the midnight sky.
Her skin is as pale as flour
Placing her among the Twilight vampires.

Metaphor

Metaphor is a figure of speech where two things are compared in a figurative sense. Unlike in a simile (A is like B.), “like” is not used in metaphor (A is B.).

Example:

  • Truths are first clouds, then rain, then harvest and food. (Henry Ward Beecher)
  • Through much of the last century, America’s faith in freedom and democracy was a rock in a raging sea. Now it is a seed upon the wind, taking root in many nations.

Sample Metaphor Poem

A Broken Family Tree

Lori McBride

Published on February 2006

I am one of many
Small branches of a broken tree,
Always looking to the ones above
For guidance, strength and security.
One little branch trying
To keep the others from breaking away.
Who will fall?
And who will stay?
Now I stand alone,
Looking at the earth through the rain,
And I see the broken branches I knew
Scattered about me in pain.
There are those who have taken an ax
To the root of our very foundation
And who have passed this destruction
Down to every new generation.
If I could take that ax,
I would toss it deep into the sea,
Never to return again
To harm the generations that follow me.
I am one of many,
But alone I will go
And plant the new seeds
Where a beautiful tree will grow.

 Onomatopoeia

The pronounciation of the word imitates a sound. Onomatopoeia is used because it’s often difficult to describe sounds. Furthermore, a story becomes more lively and interesting by the use of onomatopoeia.

Examples:

  • The lion roared.
  • The steaks sizzled in the pan.
  • The bomb went off with a bang.
  • My son swooshed the basketball into the net.
  • Please do not whisper in the examination hall.
  • The owl hooted as it sat in the tree.
  • I scared you.
  • Meow, where’s my milk, cried the cat.
  • The jangle of her bracelets caught his attention.
  • Click, click. She made a sound with her tongue to show her displeasure.
  • The birds like to tweet outside my window.
  • Drip, drip, drip, went the faucet all day long.
  • Grandma loves to hear the pitter-patter of little feet around the house.

Sample Poems with Onomatopoeia

When The Lights Go Out

The door went creak
In the still of the night
The floor went bump
Oh what a fright
All of a sudden, we heard a chime
The grandfather clock was keeping good time
We turned down a hallway and heard a loud crash
It seems that someone had dropped all the trash
So many sounds when the lights go out
It’s enough to make you scream and shout!

Keys

I went for a ride with my Uncle Jay
He slammed the door shut and we were on our way
Then he revved the gas pedal, which was on the floor
What a lovely day, could I ask for more?
I wanted a hot dog so he slammed on the brake
It belched out a screech, for goodness sake
We finished our hot dogs in record time
We were out of that place by half past nine
He misplaced his keys
We were in a mess
I must admit, he started to stress
He picked up his soda started to sip
Eager to resume our wonderful trip
From inside the cup he felt something shake
A closer look he surely did take
His keys had fallen into that refreshing soft drink
And we figured it out when we heard the clink

The Precocious Teapot

The teapot whistled at the lovely young pot
She came to a boil at this unfortunate shot
When the pan saw what happened, he began to sizzle
The pot was his cousin and it made him grizzle
The faucet joined in with a whoosh of its water
It seems that the pot was his only daughter
The teapot was humbled and expressed his regret
It was an unfortunate gaffe he’d rather forget

The Construction Site

On my way home from school today
I stopped for sweets along the way
When I heard a thud that made me jump
It seems that a wrecking ball was in a dump
Bu this wasn’t a dump, I am not a fool
It was a construction site and it was so cool
I was startled by the rat-tat-tat of a loud jackhammer
It caused me to stumble and even to stammer
Then all of a sudden, I heard some loud taps
A hammer was banging
A new building perhaps?
One of the men had a brand new drill
It buzzed as it drilled; it was such a big thrill
Then I heard the beep beeping of a truck in reverse
What a great afternoon, I could sure have done worse!

City Street

Beep beep goes the taxi as the light turns green
He is in a hurry so he makes a huge scene
The police car let out a mighty wail
‘Honking your horn sir can land you in jail!’
Well that is not entirely true
But it can surely get you into a mighty big stew
A bus goes by with a mighty roar
With a sleeping passenger who started to snore
A traffic policeman whistled his whistle
The sound of that whistle made everyone bristle
It is true that the city is a busy, busy place
But said another way, It’s just a faster pace

Poetry by Alan Loren

 

Parallelism

  • Successive clauses or sentences are similarly structured.
  • This similarity makes it easier for the reader / listener to concentrate on the message.
  • The normal progression of a sentence is interrupted by extra information or explanations enclosed in commas, brackets or dashes.
  • The extra information can be a single word, a phrase or even a sentence.

 

Examples of Parallelism:

  • The mediocre teacher tells, The good teacher explains. The superior teacher demonstrates. The great teacher inspires.
  • The mistakes of the fool are known to the world, but not to himself. The mistakes of the wise man are known to himself, but not to the world.
  • Tell me and I forget. Teach me and I may remember. Involve me and I will learn.
  • We are bound by ideals that move us beyond our backgrounds, lift us above our interest, and teach us what it means to be citizens.
  • Like father, like son.
  • Parallelism is a useful device for instructions. Due to the parallel structure, the reader can concentrate on the message and will immediately know what to do.

Sample Parallelism Poem

The Tyger

By William Blake

Tyger Tyger, burning bright,

In the forests of the night;

What immortal hand or eye,

Could frame thy fearful symmetry?

 

In what distant deeps or skies.

Burnt the fire of thine eyes?

On what wings dare he aspire?

What the hand, dare seize the fire?

 

And what shoulder, & what art,

Could twist the sinews of thy heart?

And when thy heart began to beat,

What dread hand? & what dread feet?

 

What the hammer? what the chain,

In what furnace was thy brain?

What the anvil? what dread grasp,

Dare its deadly terrors clasp!

 

When the stars threw down their spears

And water’d heaven with their tears:

Did he smile his work to see?

Did he who made the Lamb make thee?

 

Tyger Tyger burning bright,

In the forests of the night:

What immortal hand or eye,

Dare frame thy fearful symmetry?

Personification

  • Animals, inanimate objects or abstractions are given attributes of human beings.
  • Such attributes could be behaviour, feelings, character etc.
  • Personification can make a poem more interesting and lively.

Examples:

  • Why these two countries would remain at each other’s throat for so long. (3)
  • I closed the door, and my stubborn car refused to open it again.
  • The flowers nodded their heads as if to greet us.
  • The frogs began their concert.
  • Every morning my alarm clock springs to life; I hate it when that happens.
  • The peaceful and fun loving town close to the coast was swallowed by an angry tsunami.
  • The picture in that magazine shouted for attention.
  • With a lot of anger, the lighting lashed out from the skies.
  • Art is a jealous mistress. Money is a bad master.
  • All of a sudden, the radio stopped singing and started to stare at me. It was hard to believe.

Sample Personification Poems

Dinnertime Chorus

The teapot sang as the water boiled
The ice cubes cackled in their glass
the teacups chattered to one another.
While the chairs were passing gas
The gravy gurgled merrily
As the oil danced in a pan.
Oh my dinnertime chorus
What a lovely, lovely clan!

My Town

The leaves on the ground danced in the wind
The brook sang merrily as it went on its way.
The fence posts gossiped and watched cars go by
which winked at each other just to say hi.
The traffic lights yelled, ”Stop, slow, go!”
The tires gripped the road as if clinging to life.
Stars in the sky blinked and winked out
While the hail was as sharp as a knife.

Nature’s Chorus

Willows bend to their partners
while the spruces curtsey in response.
Cherry trees form a circle
and the oaks dance just like debutantes
of woodpeckers tapping on their trunks
and squirrels chattering in the boughs.
Listen to the sounds of nature’s chorus
What fun it does arouse!

Games

Chipmunks chatter and scurry,
Blue jays scream and scold.
Robins talk and gossip
demanding their story to be told.
Squirrels skip and box one another
and rabbits play hop scotch.
The games they play, the sounds they make
Really are top notch.

The Gastronomic Gym

Pasta twirling and spinning,
peas do vertical jumps
mashed potatoes swimming.
meat doing bench press and pumps.
Food has begun to exercise
but it’s not in any gym.
My brother said its happening
right inside of him.

Repetition

Words or phrases are repeated throughout the text to emphasise certain facts or ideas.

Oxymoron

An oxymoron is a figure of speech that combines contradictory terms.

Examples:

An oxymoron can be made of an adjective and a noun:

  • Dark light
  • Deafening silence
  • Living dead
  • Open secret
  • Virtual reality

Oxymoron can also be a combination of a noun and a verb.

  • The silence whistles

Sample Oxymora Poem

Read the poem below by Christopher and identify the use of oxymora.

A blind man looks back

Into the future with the

Ear-splitting whispers of

Unconcealed ghosts

Thundering silently.

~~~~

A wealthy peasant marches

Weakly across a blazing glacier

As the stars in the cloudy sky

Glisten grimly.

~~~~ A hateful saint drowns afloat

Into the dismal heaven of peaceful war.

~~~~

Solid water surges down a

Minuscule mountain into

A celestial hell.

~~~~

A colossal dinghy raises

Its feather-light anchor

With vicious doves circling

In the bright winter sky.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

TONE IN POETRY

  • Tone expresses the poet’s or speaker’s attitude toward the subject, the reader, or herself or himself.
  • Tone can shift through a poem.

 

ADJECTIVES USED TO DESCRIBE TONE

  • The following are the common tone/attitude words:
  Word Meaning
1.

2.

3.

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

Accommodating

Accusatory

Humorous

Optimistic

Pessimistic

Sadistic

Bitter

Malicious

Respectful

Resigned

Loving

Understanding

Spiteful

Inferior

Nostalgic

Critical

Cynical

Ironical

Patronizing

condescending

Satirical

Slanderous

Supportive

Contemptuous

Judgmental

obsequious

callous

derisive

.     ribald

Willing to help. Also oblidging.

charging of wrong doing.

Making one laugh.

Having hope.

Having no hope.

Being cruel to others.

exhibiting strong animosity as a result of pain or grief.

Intending to harm.

Showing respect.

Reluctantly accepting something unpleasant.

Feeling or showing love.

Sympathetic to

Wanting to hurt /annoy/offend.

Feeling smaller before.

Have a look at the happy/good past.

Pointing out mistakes in.

Having little faith in.

Meaning the opposite of.

Belittle/consider inferior.

a feeling of superiority

Mocking/ ridiculing.

Making false statement about.

Giving help/encouragement

Despising/ looking down upon.

authoritative and often having critical opinions

polite and obedient in order to gain something

.        unfeeling, insensitive to feelings of others.

ridiculing, mocking

offensive in speech or gesture

 

 

Tone Poems

A FREEDOM SONG

BY Marjorie Oludhe Macgoye (Kenya)

 

Atieno washes dishes,

Atieno plucks the chicken,

Atieno gets up early,

Beds her sucks down in the kitchen,

Atieno eight years old

Atieno yo.

 

Since she’s my sister’s child

Atieno needs no pay

While she works my wife can sit

Sewing each sunny day,

With her earning I support

Atieno yo.

 

Atieno’s sly and jealous

Bad example to the kids

Since she minds them, like a school girl

Wants their dresses, shoes and beads.

Atieno ten years old,

Atieno yo.

 

Now my wife has gone to study

Atieno’s less free,

Don’t I feed her, school my own ones,

Pay the party, union fee

All for progress? Aren’t you grateful,

Atieno yo?

 

Visitors need much attention,

Specially when I work nights.

That girl stays too long at market

Who will teach her what is right?

Atieno rising fourteen,

Atieno yo.

 

Atieno’s had a baby

So we know that she is bad

Fifty-fifty it may live

To repeat the life she had,

Ending in post partum bleeding

Atieno yo.

 

Atieno’s soon replaced

Meat and sugar more than all

She ate in such a narrow life

Were lavished in her funeral

Atieno’s gone to glory

Atieno yo.

The tone is sympathetic to the child.

Ironic Tone

Read the poem “Building the Nation

The poet uses an ironic tone, and his choice of words clearly reflects his bitterness and anger about the pretence by leaders like the PS, who attempt to hide their greed and selfishness behind empty official meetings.

Nostalgia Poems

 

The two poems below have nostalgic tone.

  1. Nostalgia by Billy Collins

Remember the 1340s? We were doing a dance called the Catapult.

You always wore brown, the color craze of the decade,

and I was draped in one of those capes that were popular,

the ones with unicorns and pomegranates in needlework.

Everyone would pause for beer and onions in the afternoon,

and at night we would play a game called “Find the Cow.”

Everything was hand-lettered then, not like today.

 

Where has the summer of 1572 gone? Brocade and sonnet

marathons were the rage. We used to dress up in the flags

of rival baronies and conquer one another in cold rooms of stone.

Out on the dance floor we were all doing the Struggle

while your sister practiced the Daphne all alone in her room.

We borrowed the jargon of farriers for our slang.

These days language seems transparent, a badly broken code.

 

The 1790s will never come again. Childhood was big.

People would take walks to the very tops of hills

and write down what they saw in their journals without speaking.

Our collars were high and our hats were extremely soft.

We would surprise each other with alphabets made of twigs.

It was a wonderful time to be alive, or even dead.

 

I am very fond of the period between 1815 and 1821.

Europe trembled while we sat still for our portraits.

And I would love to return to 1901 if only for a moment,

time enough to wind up a music box and do a few dance steps,

or shoot me back to 1922 or 1941, or at least let me

recapture the serenity of last month when we picked

berries and glided through afternoons in a canoe.

 

Even this morning would be an improvement over the present.

I was in the garden then, surrounded by the hum of bees

and the Latin names of flowers, watching the early light

flash off the slanted windows of the greenhouse

and silver the limbs on the rows of dark hemlocks.

 

As usual, I was thinking about the moments of the past,

letting my memory rush over them like water

rushing over the stones on the bottom of a stream.

I was even thinking a little about the future, that place

where people are doing a dance we cannot imagine,

a dance whose name we can only guess.

2.     PATRIOT INTO TRAITOR BY ROBERT BROWNING

It was roses, roses, all the way,
With myrtle mixed in my path like mad:
The house-roofs seemed to heave and sway,
The church-spires flames, such flags they had,
A year ago on this very day.

The air broke into a mist with bells,
The old walls rocked with the crowd and cries.
Had I said, “Good fold, mere noise repels–
But give me your sun from yonder skies!”
They had answered, “And afterward, what else?”

Alack, it was I who leaped at the sun
To give it my loving friends to keep!
Nought man could do, have I left undone:
And you see my harvest, what I reap
This very day, now a year is run.

There’s nobody on the house-tops now–
Just a palsied few at the windows set;
For the best of the sight is, all allow,
At the Shambles’ Gate– or, better yet,
By the very scaffold’s foot. I trow.

I go in the rain, and more than needs,
A rope cuts both my writs behind;
And think, by the feel, my forehead bleeds,
For they fling, whoever has a mind,
Stones at me for my year’s misdeeds.

Thus I entered, and thus I go!
In triumphs, people have dropped down dead.
“Paid by the world, what dost thou owe
Me?”– God might question; now instead,
‘Tis God shall repay: I am safer so.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

MOOD IN POETRY

  • Mood is referred to as the atmosphere , as it creates an emotional situation that surrounds the readers. Mood is developed in a literary piece through various methods. It can be developed through setting, theme, tone and diction.

Common Mood Words

Word Meaning
Agreeable

Angry

Nostalgic

Sad

Amusing

Defiant

Diffident

Festive

Indifferent

Sorrowful

Melancholic

Excited

Remorseful

Solemn

Serene

Violent

Pleasing.

Bitter with.

Looking at the happy past.

Not happy.

Making one laugh.

Opposing openly.

Lacking self-confidence.

Joyous

Not having interest in.

Sad because sth bad has happened.

Sad

Happy.

Showing regret/repentance.

Not happy/not smiling.

Calm/peaceful

Use force/fighting.

 

Poem with Sad Mood

Waiting For My Dad

By Amy

I sit alone in the darkness
Waiting…
Waiting for him to come back to me.
Can he hear my cries?
Can he feel my tears?
Can he sense my breaking heart?
God only knows such a fact.
How can this be that he can’t see me?
Is it because I’m sitting alone in the darkness?
I just walk past everyone as if I were invisible.
Can he see me now?
Can he see the pain he’s caused me?
Or does he look past it?
I think I should move on,
But something tells me to wait.
It’s my heart.
I’ll give him one more chance
He needs to prove his love to me.
As I return to sit alone in the darkness…
Waiting.

Melancholic Mood Poem

On longer evenings,
Light, chill and yellow,
Bathes the serene
Foreheads of houses.
A thrush sings,
Laurel-surrounded
In the deep bare garden,
Its fresh-peeled voice
Astonishing the brickwork.
It will be spring soon,
It will be spring soon —
And I, whose childhood
Is a forgotten boredom,
Feel like a child
Who comes on a scene
Of adult reconciling,
And can understand nothing
But the unusual laughter,
And starts to be happy.

“The Trees.”

The trees are coming into leaf
Like something almost being said;
The recent buds relax and spread,
Their greenness is a kind of grief.

Is it that they are born again
And we grow old? No, they die too,
Their yearly trick of looking new
Is written down in rings of grain.

Yet still the unresting castles thresh
In fullgrown thickness every May.
Last year is dead, they seem to say,
Begin afresh, afresh, afresh.

 

Happy Mood Poem

So fine a day it is today
To the world I send out my hope and care
Happy and joyful I am so to all I must say
That I will remember you all in my prayer.

I woke up with a smile upon my face
After knowing again that I was still alive
And I am not ill through GOD and his grace
Another year and night I did survive.

The morning has begun and I am awake
And my wallet is full of money
I owe no bills my finances I will not break
So I will go out while it is nice and sunny.

I will greet all comers with a wave or a hello
As I am walking down the street
I am living for the day and not for long ago
And no strangers today will I meet.

I will feed the birds and I will pet the dogs
If I decide to walk to the park
And I will not be a nuisance to any who jogs
My day is a day of happiness as I do embark.

Today is such a beautiful day
So I decided to start it off with a pleasant attitude
I wished today was a holiday
Since I woke up in a joyful and happy mood.

Randy L. McClave

 

ANALYSIS OF POETRY
to understand the analysis of poetry, study the diagram below.

 

 

Now try to analyse the two poems below following the guidelines.

“It Was Long Ago”
Eleanor Farjeon

I’ll tell you, shall I, something I remember?
Something that still means a great deal to me.
It was long ago.

A dusty road in summer I remember,
A mountain, and an old house, and a tree
That stood, you know.

Behind the house. An old woman I remember
In a red shawl with a grey cat on her knee
Humming under a tree.

She seemed the oldest thing I can remember,
But then perhaps I was not more than three.
It was long ago.

I dragged on the dusty road, and I remember
How the old woman looked over the fence at me
And seemed to know

How it felt to be three, and called out,
I remember ‘Do you like bilberries and cream for tea?’
I went under the tree

And while she hummed, and the cat purred, I remember
How she filled a saucer with berries and cream for me
So long ago,

Such berries and such cream as I remember
I never had seen before, and never see
To day, you know.

And that is almost all I can remember,
The house, the mountain, the grey cat on her knee,
Her red shawl, and the tree,

And the taste of the berries, the feel of the sun I remember,
And the smell of everything that used to be
So long ago,

Till the heat on the road outside again I remember,
And how the long dusty road seemed to have for me
No end, you know.

That is the farthest thing I can remember.
It won’t mean much to you. It does to me.
Then I grew up, you see.

Read “The African Beggar” below and try your hand at analysing the poem.

African Beggar
Raymond Tong

Sprawled in the dust outside the Syrian store,
a target for small children, dogs and flies,
a heap of verminous rags and matted hair,
he watches us with cunning, reptile eyes,
his noseless, smallpoxed face creased in a sneer.

Sometimes he shows his yellow stumps of teeth
and whines for alms, perceiving that we bear
the curse of pity; a grotesque mask of death,
with hands like claws about his begging-bowl.

But often he is lying all alone
within the shadow of a crumbling wall,
lost in the trackless jungle of his pain,
clutching the pitiless red earth in vain
and whimpering like a stricken animal.

 

ENGLISH NOTES FOR HIGH SCHOOLS

ENGLISH NOTES

NOUNS

These are words that name things ,people, ideas, qualities ,state and places.

Examples:

  • People-John, Jack
  • Ideas-stone, desk, laptop
  • Qualities-bravery, kindness, greed, diligence
  • State-sickness, laziness, poverty, wealth, love.
  • Places-Nairobi, Mombasa, Kisumu

Nouns can be divided into different categories.

Types of nouns

  • Proper nouns
  • Common nouns
  • Concrete nouns
  • Abstract nouns
  • Collective nouns
  • Countable nouns
  • Uncountable nouns

 

  1. Common nouns

These are names of ordinary things. They include;

  • Boy
  • Girl
  • Locker
  • Desk
  • Water

Some common nouns have antonyms. They include:

  • shepherd-shepherdess buck-doe(goat,rabbit)
  • Bullock-heifer      wizard-witch                        )
  • Drone-bee     heir-heiress
  • Horse-mare    manager-manageress
  • jack-jennet(donkey)    tomcat-queen
  • Bachelor-spinster       jew – jewess
  • monk-nun              ram-ewe(sheep
  • cock-hen stallion-mare(horse)
  • Nephew-niece      poet-poetess

 

  1. Proper nouns

These are names given to specific people, places or things. They are always used with capital letters as follows;

  • Names of people ; Winston, Jacob, Melvin.
  • Months of the year; January, February, March.
  • Days of the week; Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday.
  • Seasons of the year; Winter, Spring, Autumn, Summer.
  • Names of countries and continents ; America, Kenya, Australia, Europe.
  • Names of regions, states and districts; Mombasa County, Nyanza , Califonia
  • Names of cities towns and villages; Naivasha, Nairobi, Kochia.
  • Geographical areas; The North, The North.

 

  1. Concrete nouns

These are nouns naming things that can be seen and touched. The refer to:

  • People-boy, girl, teacher
  • Animals- cat, elephant, cow
  • Things-table, phone, cup
  • Geographical features-mountain, rivers, valleys

 

  1. Abstract nouns

Abstract nouns are nouns naming things one cannot see or touch.

They refer to:

  • States; pain sickness, pity, poverty, wealth, success
  • Quality; honesty, greed, cruelty,
  • Ideas; education, corruption, love, hatred, justice

 

  1. Count nouns/countable nouns

These are names of things which can be counted.

They have singular and plural forms.

They can be used with articles and numerals.

  • A Pen- pens
  • A Book-books
  • Paper-papers
  • Chair-chairs
  • Flower-flowers

f)Non-count /uncountable nouns

These are nouns of things that cannot be counted.

They cannot be used with articles such as a/an or the.

They can be used with expressions like some, a handful of, a bit of, a lot of, much .

Examples

  • Substances ;salt, food, dust
  • Liquids; milk, water, oil, juice
  • Ideas; music, knowledge, information, education, advice
  • Concrete objects; bedding, luggage, furniture, hair ,grass
  • Qualities; happiness, kindness, courage, obedience

 

Regular and Irregular nouns

  1. Regular nouns

Regular nouns are nouns are nouns that form their plural by adding s or es to their singular forms.

Examples

Desk-desks

Pen pens

Box-boxes

Buffalo-buffaloes

  1. Irregular noun

 

These are nouns that form their plural by changing their forms or certain letters.

Examples

 

 

  1. Nouns that change oo to ee
  • Tooth-teeth
  • Goose-geese
  • Foot-feet
  1. Nouns that omit us and add i
  • Radius-radii
  • Cactus-cacti
  • Stimulus-stimuli
  • Syllabus-syllabi/syllabuses
  • Alumnus-alumni
  1. Nouns that omit um and replace it with a
  • Agendum-agenda
  • Addendum-addenda
  • Curriculum-curricula
  • Stratum-strata
  • Stimulus-stimuli
  1. Nouns that change I to ee
  • Basis-bases
  • Oasis-oases
  • Thesis-theses
  • Crisis-crises
  1. Nouns that change on/n to a
  • Criterion-criteria
  • Phenomenon-phenomena
  1. Nouns that add ee
  • Larva-larvae
  • Formula-formulae
  1. Nouns that change x to -ces
  • Matrix-matrices
  • Index-indices

Collective nouns

These are names of groups of people, animals or things.

They take a singular verb since each individual making up the group is seen as part of a single unit.

Examples

  • A brood of chickens                             a clan of hyenas
  • A dole of doves a  cohort of zebras
  • A mews of hawks a bike of bees
  • A parliament of owls a flight of butterflies
  • A flight of pigeons a cloud of grasshoppers
  • A battery or journalists a colony of wasps
  • A run of poultry a clutter of spiders
  • A congress baboons                               a troupe of performers
  • A leap of leopards                                 a house of senators
  • A pride of lions                                a panel of experts
  • A troop of monkeys  a herd of harlots
  • A gang of buffaloes                               a gaggle of women
  • A coalition of cheetahs a clutch of eggs
  • A flink of cows a bed/bouquet of flowers
  • A pack of dogs a plague of locusts
  • A colony of rabbits                             a scourge of mosquitoes
  • A herd of donkeys                                a den of snakes
  • A herd of elephants                               an army of frogs
  • A stable of horses                               a nest of vipers
  • a school of whales                               a cast of actors
  • a bench of bishops                               an orchestra of musicians
  • a crowd of people                               a band of robbers
  • a crew of sailors                 a board of directors
  • a flock of tourists                                 a fleet of cars
  • a galaxy of stars                                a cache of jewels

 

Compound nouns

These are nouns made up of more than one word.

They may be written as single words, two separate words, that have to be used together to give the right meaning and they may also be hyphenated.

  1. Single words

 

  • Kickback                 Shopkeeper
  • Necklace Toothpaste
  • Sunshine Airport
  • Heartburn Nosebleed
  • Football Breakthrough
  • Classmate                        Takeaway
  • Workshop Teapot
  • Dressmaking Cupboard

 

 

  1. Two/three separate words
  • Leather jacket dining hall
  • Tap water driving license
  • Bank account              cow dung
  • Ice cream frying pan
  • Assistant minister ladies’ shoes
  • Deputy head children’s wear
  • Coat of arms

 

  1. Hyphenated words
  • Mother-in-law
  • Commander-in-chief
  • Table-mat
  • Father-in- law
  • Sergeant-at-arm
  • Attorney-general
  • Passer-by
  • Door-bell

 

Plurals of Compound nouns

Plurals of compound nouns are formed in various ways:

  1. Adding a plural marker to the last part of the compound noun
  • Shopkeepers
  • Necklaces
  • Workshops
  • Teapots
  • Bank accounts
  • Leather jackets
  • Deputy heads
  1. Adding the plural ending after the first part of the compound noun
  • Coats of arms
  • Mothers-in-law
  • Commanders-in-law
  • Passers-by
  • Attorney-generals/attorneys-general
  • Sergeants-at-arm

NOUN PHRASES

A noun phrase is a group of words that functions as as a noun(unit)

It may comprise of  a noun, a pronoun or a noun and other words modifying it.

These modifiers may include:

  • Article; a/an and the
  • Demonstratives; this, that, these, those
  • Possessive adjectives; my, his, their, our
  • Quantifiers; all, some, many, few, a lot, no
  • Numerals; two, three, four
  • Adjectives; good, handsome, beautiful

Examples of noun phrases

Noun

Corruption

Poverty

John

Nouns +articles

The cow

An umbrella

A dog

Noun + demonstrative

This cow

That jug

Noun + possessive adjective

My vehicle

His book

Noun +quantifiers

Some people

Many students

Noun + numerals

Two students

Three ladies

Noun + adjective

Handsome boys

Dirty pigs

Article + adjective + noun

The lonely pig

Article + numeral + adjective

The three dirty pigs

 

Functions of  noun phrases

  1. As a subject

A noun phrase is used as a subject if:

-it appears before the main verb

-it refers to the initiator of the action stated by the verb.

  1. As complement

A subject complement is a word/phrase that describes/defines the subject  of a sentence. They follow copular/ linking verbs. These verbs include ;am, was, are, were, been, become, appear, seen, sound and feel.

  • As an object

 

a)Direct object

A direct object is a word, phrase or clause that follows a transitive verb and answers the question ”who” or  “what?”

A direct object receives the action of the  of the verb.

b)Indirect object

An indirect object is a word/phrase that answers the question “to whom?” or “for whom” or for what is the action of the verb performed. Indirect object is the beneficiary/receives something or benefits from something.

 

CLAUSES

A clause is a group of words contain a subject and  a verb(predicate)

It can form either a sentence on its own, or be part of a longer sentence.

Types of clauses

  1. i) Independent clause

These are also called main clauses, they are clauses that can stand on their as sentences.

Examples

  • Susan likes reading.
  • The guest speaker spoke for only 20 minutes.
  • We saw our local M.P at baraza.
  • Literature courses are offered at the university.
  1. ii) Coordinating clause

 

If two or more independent clauses are joined to make a sentence , each sentence is called a coordinating clause. This clause comprises sentences of equal importance but they work together.

Each coordinating clause is connected to the other using a coordinating conjunction(fanboys)

Examples

John likes to play football but Joseph plays volleyball.

iii)  Dependent/subordinate clause

These are clauses that depend on independent clauses to be meaningful.

They do not express a complete thought and cannot stand on their own.

These clauses are used with subordinate conjunctions such as : if, although, before, while, as, until unless, despite ,since etc

Examples

Unless you read newspapers, you cannot be informed.

Although I revised well, I failed terribly.

 

NOUN CLAUSES

A noun clause is a subordinate clause that does the same work as that of a noun phrase.

It has a subject and a verb and may be used as a subject or an object of a sentence.

Noun clause are introduced by words such as when, that, whoever, how, where, whoever, which, who,  how, why and whatever.

Examples

  • Whoever finishes the race will get the reward.
  • Whoever ordered the books is not in today.
  • She told me to give the guests whatever they needed.
  • He understood what we discussed.
  • When to vote will be decided on by the commission.
  • That they failed irritates them.
  • How you spend the money is up to you.
  • He said that the teacher had arrived.

 

Types of noun clauses

  1. That noun clause
  • That the world is round is known.
  • I know that you can pass.
  • That I love football is known.
  • That we shall die is known.

 

 

  1. Wh-noun clauses

 

What she did was seen.

 

Functions of noun clauses

Subject of a sentence

Object of a sentence

Complement

 

NOUN DERIVATIONS

Noun derivation is the process of forming nouns from other lexical categories(words) by adding affixes(prefixes, suffixes, infixes)

Nouns are formed by adding prefixes to verbs ,adjectives or nouns

Prefixes are elements added at the end of words

Examples

  • -er -ment         -less
  • -ee -ion             -ive
  • -ness -tion            -able
  • -ship -ence         -ation
  • -ism -dom
  • -ity     -ize/ise       -or
  1. Nouns derived from verbs

By adding –er

  • Dance-dancer
  • Write-writer
  • Drive-driver
  • Winner-winner

By adding –ee

  • Retire-retiree
  • Escape-escapee
  • Train-trainee
  • Pay-payee
  • Refer-referee
  • Absent-absentee

Divorce-divorcee

 

By adding –or

  • Guarant-guarantor
  • Act-actor
  • Stress-stressor
  • Donate-donator
  • Educate-educator
  • instruct-instructor

By adding –ation/-ition

  • Educate-education
  • Attend-attention
  • Repeat-repetition
  • Admit-admission
  • Discuss-discussion
  • Receive-reception

By adding –ment/ent

  • Require-requirement
  • Involve-involvement
  • Acknowledge-acknowledgement
  • Employ-employment

By adding –ance/ence

  • Accept-acceptance
  • Admit-admittance
  • Allow-allowance
  • Assure-assurance
  • Comply-compliance
  • Defy-defiance
  • Guide-guidance
  • Maintain-maintenance
  • Clear-clearance
  • Adhere-adherence
  • Patient-patience
  • Exist-existence

By adding –al

  • Survive-survival
  • Deny-denial
  • Bury-burial
  • Dismiss-dismissal
  • Rehearse-rehearsal

By adding –age

  • Marry-marriage
  • Waste-wastage
  • Break-breakage
  • Use-usage

By adding –ery

  • Deliver-delivery
  • Bribe- bribery
  1. Nouns derived from adjectives

By adding –ness

  • Kind-kindness
  • Stubborn-stubbornness
  • Shy-shyness
  • Happy-happiness
  • Keen-keenness
  • Open-openness

By adding –ism

  • Tribe-tribalism
  • Material-materialism
  • Critic-criticism
  • Race-racism
  • Skeptic- skepticism

By adding –ery

  • Brave-bravery

By adding –ity

  • Equal-equality
  • Similar-similarity
  • Sane-sanity
  • Curious-curiosity
  • Brief-brevity

By adding

  • Nouns derived from nouns

By adding-ship

Friend-friendship

 

  • King-kingship
  • Relation-relationship
  • Leader-leadership
  • Friend-friendship
  • Author-authorship
  • Owner-ownership

Censor-censorship

 

By adding –dom

  • King-kingdom
  • Martyr-martyrdom
  • Chief-chiefdom

By adding –ery

  • Slave-slavery

PRONOUNS

Pronouns are words used in place of pronouns.

Person and number

Personal pronouns are divided into three classes:

  1. First person pronouns

These are  pronouns that refer to the person who is speaking/writing

They include:

             singular         plural
                  I              we
                me              us

 

  1. Second person pronouns

These are pronouns that refer to person who is listening or reading.

They include:

            singular              plural
              you              you

 

  1. Third person pronouns

These  pronouns that refer to the person being spoken about.

They include:

               singular                plural
He/him They/them
She/her They/them
it They/them

 

Pronouns that refer to the doer of the action are called subject pronouns. They include:

I, we, you, he, she, it and they.

Pronouns that refer to the recipient/receiver of the action are called object pronouns. They include:

Me, us, you, him, her, it and them.

Indefinite Pronouns

Indefinite pronouns are pronouns which do not refer to definite number of things or people. They refer to things in general without identifying them.

Examples

  • everybody several
  • Everyone     one
  • Nobody    either
  • Anyone      all
  • Nobody     many
  • Somebody    few
  • None   both
  • Someone             some

Indefinite pronouns can be categorized into:

Singular indefinite pronouns

Plural indefinite pronouns

i)singular indefinite pronouns

These are indefinite pronouns that refer to one person/thing.

Examples

  • Nobody             everybody
  • Someone             none
  • Anyone             someone
  • Somebody             another
  • Another                  each
  • Everybody neither

Singular indefinite pronouns take singular verbs such as has, is, and says.

  1. ii) Plural indefinite pronouns

These are indefinite pronouns that refer to more than one person or thing.

Examples

  • All
  • Many
  • Few
  • Both
  • Several

These take plural verbs such as are, were, have

Indefinite pronouns can be made to be gender sensitive by using his/her.

 

Pronouns and Case

A case is different positions that pronouns take in a sentence. They can take the subject or the object position.

  1. i) Subjective Case

A pronoun is said to be in subjective case when it appears before/precedes a verb.

Examples

  • He will always remember this.
  • She teaches Geography.
  • They are in college.

Pronouns used in subjective case include: I, we, you, he, she, it and they.

Person singular plural
1st I we
2nd you you
3rd He/she  
  it  

NB: Pronouns in subjective case are also used in comparison after than.

She is taller than he.

  1. ii) Objective case

A pronoun is said to be in the objective case when it appears/comes after the verb or preposition.

Examples

  • John loves her
  • I am waiting for him.

Pronouns used in objective case are:

Person singular plural
1st person me Us
2nd person You you
3rd person Him  
  Her They
  it  

 

NB: Relative pronouns also take either subjective case.

Who is used in the subjective case; it refers to the doer of the action.

Example

This man who gave me a gift.

Whom is used as an object; it refers to the recipient of the action.

It can also be used with prepositions.

Example

  • The man whom I wanted to see is in Narok.
  • The woman to whom I wished to speak was away.
  • I saw the people for whom you work.

The student whom you sent home has returned.

 

ADJECTIVES

Adjectives are words that give more information about nouns. When two or more adjectives are used in a sentence, there is an order in which they should appear.

Order of Adjectives

  1. Opinion adjectives

These are adjectives that express the speaker’s opinion on something or somebody.

Examples

  • Beautiful
  • Handsome
  • Useful
  • Ugly
  • Exciting
  • boring
  1. Fact /descriptive adjectives

 

These are adjectives that give us factual information about a thing. They give us more information about:

  • Size-large
  • Shape-round, oval, rectangular
  • Age-young, old
  • Colour-red, black
  • Nationality-Kenyan, Chinese
  • Material-plastic, metallic, woolen
  • Use-coffee

When opinion  and descriptive adjectives are used together in a sentence, the opinion adjectives come first. The rest then follow the order below.

  • Opinion-impressive, beautiful, wonderful
  • Size-large, small,
  • Shape- circular, rectangular, oval
  • Age- young, new, old
  • Colour-black, green
  • Origin- Kenyan, Chinese, Uganda
  • Material/make-wooden, fibre
  • Use-dining, shopping, coffee

Adjectival Phrases

An adjectival phrase is a group of words that does the work of an adjective/modifier/modifies/describes a noun or a pronoun.

They are of two types:

  1. Made up of an adjective and an intensifier

Intensifiers are words that show degree(adverbs of degree) eg very, too, so, enough, completely, entirely, really.

Examples

  • His story was quite interesting.
  • The porridge is very hot.
  • Thank you for being so kind.
  • Our classroom floor is very clean.
  • The students are really happy.

 

  1. Made up of a preposition and a noun phrase or pronoun

When a prepositional phrase is used as a modifier of a noun/pronoun, it is also called adjectival phrase.

Examples

  • The girl in red shirt is my sister.
  • The picture at the beginning of the book is very appropriate.
  • The loud music from that house must stop.
  • The applicant with the least chance of success complained the most.

Adjectival Clause

These are clauses that give more information about nouns or pronouns.

They are introduced by relative pronouns- who, which, that, whom, whose, whichever, whatever.

Who, whom- people

That- ————-things

That, which—–things and animals

Whose————possessives

Types of adjectival clauses

  1. Defining adjectival clauses

These clauses tell us exactly which person or thing the speaker is referring to;

The person who built that church has died.

Rukia   works for a firm that repairs mobile phones.

The man whom I was speaking to is my neighbour.

  • NB: That can be used instead of whom/which.
  • Who, that and which can be left out when the relative pronoun stands for an object in the adjectival clause.
  1. No-defining adjectival clauses

Are adjectival clauses that give additional information about the subject.

They are separated from the main clause by commas.

Only who and which are used and cannot be omitted.

 

Examples

Mandela, who is the first black president of South Africa, won the Nobel Peace prize.

NB; A non- defining adjectival clause is only used to give additional information and can be left out without affecting the meaning of the main sentence.

Adjectival clauses reduced to phrases

  • The sheep which had black spots were mine.
  • The sheep with black spots were mine.
  • The voters who had no I.Ds were turned away.
  • The voters with no I.Ds were turned away.

Participles as adjectival clauses

The verb in the relative clause can be replaced

Formation of adjectives

 

  1. i) From nouns

Adjectives are formed by adding suffixes to nouns.

Some of these include:

  • -al; environmental, societal, seasonal, brutal
  • -ial; influential, partial, facial
  • -ual; factual, actual; conceptual
  • -less; hopeful, jobless, dustless
  • -en; woolen
  • -ese; Chinese, Japanese, Portuguese, Beninese, Nepalese
  • -ful; faithful, dutiful, eventful
  • -ly; friendly, cowardly, deadly
  • -some; troublesome
  • -ish; foolish, feverish
  • -ry; hairy
  • -ous; glorious, joyous
  • -ic; historic
  1. ii) From verbs

-able; manageable, desirable,

-less; relentless,

-ful; relentful

-ive; active, preventive

-ious; rebellious, envious, marvelous

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

VERBS

Primary Auxiliary Verbs

Auxiliary verbs are verbs that can be used as main verbs and helping verbs in sentences.

Forms of primary auxiliary verbs

 

 

VERBS

 

 

 

HAVE
DO
BE

 

 

 

   
Has

Have

Having

had

Am

is

are

was

were

be

being

been

Do

does

doing

did

done

 

 

 

Functions of primary auxiliary verbs

  1. Express tense

Simple present tense

  • He is intelligent
  • He does homework.

Past tense

  • He was intelligent
  • He had money.
  1. Express aspect

Perfective aspect

  • She had talked.
  • He has danced.

Progressive aspect

  • She is talking.
  • He is dancing
  1. To show emphasis
  • The girls’ netball team did win all the matches.
  • I do care for you.
  1. Formation of questions
  • Did the girls’ netball team win all the matches?
  • Do I trust her?
  1. Show subject-verb agreement

Primary auxiliary verbs change their forms depending on whether the subject is singular or plural. When the subject is singular, the auxiliary verb used is singular.

  • My sister does her work daily.
  • Our sisters do their work daily.

VERB PHRASES

This is part of a sentence that indicates the action or state.

It may comprise of a verb, two or more helping verbs and one main verb or a helping verb an adverb and the main verb.

  1. A single verb
  • She sang beautifully.
  1. A helping verb and a main verb.
  • He had killed a rat.
  • He was killing a rat.
  • A rat is killed.
  • He has killed a rat.
  • He will kill a rat.
  • Two main verbs
  • He likes killing a rat.
  • He prefers taking tea.
  • He enjoyed reading a novel.
  • He wanted to go home.
  1. Two or more helping verbs and a main verb
  • He will have killed a rat.
  • He will be killing a rat.
  • A rat had been killed.
  • A rat is being killed.
  • A rat will be killed.
  • A rat will be being killed.
  • A rat will have been killed.
  1. A helping verb, an adverb and a main verb
  • He will hardly kill a rat.

 

ASPECT

The continuous aspect/progressive aspect

The progressive aspect is used to show that an action is continuing or is in progress.

It can be used with past tense, present tense and future tense.

Present continuous aspect

The present continuous aspect is used when talking about an action or a feeling which is still going on.

The aspect is formed by using the present tense of the verb ‘be’- am, are, is and adding -ing to the main verb

 

Examples

  1. a) Majority of verbs that and in ‘e’ drop the final e before adding -ing.
  • Write-writing
  • Smoke-smoking
  • Drive-driving
  1. b) Some retain e and add –ing
  • dye-dyeing
  • eye-eyeing
  • see-seeing
  • agree-agreeing

Agree-agreeing

  1. c) Some verbs that end in ‘ie’, replace the ‘ie’ with y before adding -ing
  • tie-tying
  • lie-lying
  • die-dying
  1. d) If the verb ends in a consonant preceded by a single vowel, double the final consonant and add –ing.
  • Stop-stopping.
  • Plan-planning
  • Begin-beginning
  • Clap-clapping
  • Nod-nodding

NB: The present continuous aspect is also used to explain the future arrangement that have already been made

My mother is flying to Garisa next month.

Robert is completing his studies in November.

Future Time

Future time refers to the time that will come after the moment of speech. It can be expressed in various ways.

  1. Using the present simple tense

Simple present tense is used to express future when talking about timetables or programmes.

Examples

Schools close for holidays every three months.

The bus leaves the police station at 9.00 a.m.

The BOG meeting starts at 8.00 am tomorrow.

  1. Using shall/will

Shall is used with the first person pronouns only (I, We)

Will is used with all classes of pronouns.

  • Using the present continuous tense

This takes the auxiliary verbs am/is/are and –ing verbs. This aspect is used to talk about future arrangement or plan.

Examples

Jane is visiting her grandmother tomorrow.

I am having a wedding next Saturday.

They are joining campus in August.

 

Going to is used with a verb in the infinitive to express the future.

The participle

A participle is a form of verb that is used in a sentence to play the role of other words such as nouns, adjectives other than the verb alone.

 

Active and Passive voice

Active voice

An active sentence is used to tell what the subject does; a sentence in which the subject is the performer of the action stated by the verb.

A n active voice has an active verb; a verb that is used with a subject and an object.

Examples

  • Admire write
  • Discuss lend
  • Many buy
  • Kill tell
  • Like want
  • Give value
  • Buy take

Passive voice

A passive  sentence/voice is used to tell  what happens to the subject. Passive verb is used to indicate the passive voice.

To change an active verb into a passive one;

The object of the active sentence takes the position of the subject.

The verb changes into the past participle and is used  with auxiliary verbs(am, are, was, were, is)

ASPECT ACTIVE VOICE PASSIVE VOICE
Simple present He kills a rat. A rat was killed
 Present perfect He has killed a rat. A rat has been killed.
Present contin. He is killing a rat A rat is being killed.
Simple past He killed a rat. A rat was killed.
Past perfect He had killed a rat A rat had been killed.
Past continuous He was killing a rat. A rat was being killed.
Simple future He will kill a rat. A rat will be killed.
Future perfect He will have killed a rat A rat will have been killed.
Future continuous He will be killing a rat. A rat will be being killed.

 

The original subject (doer) is sometimes omitted when the sentence is changed into passive voice.

Active and passive voice can be used with modal auxiliary verbs; can, may, should, ought.

A cat kills a rat.

Passive voice used with ditransitive verbs

A ditransitive verb is one used with two objects;

  • Give
  • buy
  • Write

When an active sentence has two objects, two passive sentences can be derived.

  • John bought Khadija a dress.
  • A dress was bought for Khadija.
  • Khadija was bought a dress.

 

Transitive and Intransitive Verbs

Transitive verbs

These are verbs that are followed direct objects. The object follows the verb immediately; there is no preposition between them.

Examples

  • Used kill
  • Keep marry
  • Close love
  • Admire

Some transitive verbs take more than one object; a direct object and indirect object. They are called ditransitive verbs.

Examples

  • Buy make
  • Tell lend
  • Sell bake

The object that follows the verb immediately is called indirect object and it answers the question ‘for whom’ or ‘to whom’ while the last object is called direct object. The direct object may follow the verb immediately if the indirect object is used with a preposition e.g.

  • Kalulu bought a guitar for Kagame.

Transitive verbs take both passive and active voice.

  • The county education officer gave the students an inspiring speech.(active)
  • The students were given an inspiring speech..(passive)
  • An inspiring speech was given to the students…(passive)

 

Intransitive verbs

These are verbs that do not require direct objects. They may be followed by adverbs or prepositional phrases.

Examples

  • Die weep
  • Sleep yawned
  • Run arrive
  • Bark sit
  • Stay

NB: Some verbs can be used both transitively and intransitively based on how they have been used.

Examples

  • Eat taste
  • Drive cook
  • Leave drink
  • Grow

 The Infinitives

The infinitive is formed by use of ‘to’ followed by the root or bare form of a verb.

Examples

  • To learn
  • To go
  • To give
  • To sell
  • To have
  • To teach
  • To protect
  • To sing
  • To plan
  • To forget

The infinitive can be used as a verb, a noun, an adjective or an adverb.

As a noun

The to infinitive ca act as a subject, a direct object or a subject complement.

Examples

  • T o exercise is healthy.(subject)
  • To err is human.(subject)
  • I want to go now(object)
  • She likes to read.(object)

As an adjective

The infinitive functions as an adjective if it modifies a noun.

  • I bought a book to read.
  • They have got eggs to sell.
  • Students have a right to read in the school library.
  • Ronaldo is the player to watch.

As an adverb

The infinitive functions as an adverb if it modifies a verb, an adjective or another adverb.

  • We must sow to reap.
  • The bird arrived to grab the leftovers.
  • He bought enough food to feed a battalion.

Types of participle

  1. The present participle (-ing participle)

This is formed by adding –ing suffix to the infinitive/base form of a word

Examples

  • Cooking
  • Boring
  • Eating
  • Knitting

Functions of the present participle

As a verb

The –ing participle is used with the past, present and future tense to show a progressive aspect. It is used with auxiliary verbs like is, was, are, were, am, be

Examples

  • He is cooking
  • He was cooking.
  • He will be cooking.

As an adjective

The –ing participle can be used to give more information about a noun or pronoun. Used as an adjective, the participle can be placed in front of the noun it modifies or after a linking/copular verb like is, was are, were.

Examples

  • I read an amazing book.
  • I read a book which was boring.

As a noun

The –ing participle can function as a noun, a subject, indirect object. When used as a noun, it is called a gerund.

Examples

  • Cooking excites me.
  • She likes cooking.
  1. The past participle.

This is formed by adding -ed/d/en/t to the infinitives

Example

  • Written
  • Taken
  • Walked
  • Knocked
  • Spent
  • Learnt

Function of the past participle

As a verb

The past participle is used with auxiliary verbs such as has, have or had to indicate the perfect aspect.

 

Phrasal verb

A phrasal verb is a multi-word verb that consists of a verb with a preposition or an adverb or both. The meaning of the phrasal verb is different from the meaning of its separate parts.

Phrasal verbs may consist of two or three words.

Examples

  • Look up-check
  • Put off-postpone
  • Show off-boast
  • Take after-resemble
  • Eat into-erode/deplete
  • Grow up-mature
  • Make for-try to reach
  • Give in-yield/surrender
  • Make of-understand
  • Pass out-faint
  • Call at-visit
  • Take after-resemble

Phrasal verbs may consist of two or three words.

Examples

Two words

  • Make up-prepare, compensate for something, create a story
  • Bring up-raise a child, introduce an idea
  • Take off-remove something, run away, fly, succeed
  • Put on-wear clothes, switch, organize an event.
  • Bump into-meet
  • Drop by-visit

Three words

  • Catch up with-keep abreast
  • Check up on-examine, investigate
  • Come up with-contribute
  • Get along with- have a good relationship
  • Get away with-escape, blame
  • Get rid of-eliminate
  • Look down on-despise
  • Look up to-respect
  • Put up with-tolerate
  • Run out of-exhaust
  • Get through with-finish
  • Walk out on-leave somebody

In some phrasal verbs, the object may come after or may separate the two parts. These include

  • Call off-cancel
  • Do away-repeat a job
  • Find out-discover
  • Hold up-delay
  • Make up
  • Look up
  • Put off-postpone
  • Put out-extinguish
  • Turn down-reject
  • Turn up-raise the volume
  • Turn up
  • Lay off-sack
  • Pull down –demolish

NB: When the object of the following phrasal verb is a person, the two parts of the phrasal verb must be separated.

They called off this afternoons meeting.

They called this afternoons meeting off.

Some phrasal verbs cannot be separated.

  • Call on-visit
  • Get over-recover from sickness/disappointment
  • Look after
  • Look into
  • Take after
  • Bump into-meet accidentally

Phrasal verbs can be used transitively or intransitively.

  • Break down-stop functioning
  • Drop by-visit without appointment
  • Get by-survive
  • Grow up-get older.

Idiomatic expression

Idioms are expressions whose meaning is difficult or sometimes impossible to guess by looking at the meaning of the individual word it contains.

  • Have butterflies in your stomach-feel nervous
  • An icing on the cake-
  • Bitter pill to swallow-
  • waste not want not-warning against wastage
  • a rocket science-not difficult
  • keep one’s head above water-manage
  • give somebody a run for his money-not allow somebody easily
  • Throw the spanner in the works-prevent something from happening
  • Throw a tantrum-get angry
  • Take a French leave
  • Extend an olive branch
  • Fish in troubled water
  • Water under the bridge
  • Tip of the iceberg- small part of something
  • A storm in a cup of tea-
  • Hit below the belt
  • Bring to book-punish for wrong doing
  • Lend a hand-help
  • Throw in a white towel-surrender
  • Bite more than you can chew-do more than ability
  • Borrow a leaf-copy
  • Steal the show-attract attention
  • Bury the hatchet-stop being unfriendly and become friends
  • Bite the bullet-deal with a difficult situation

Phrasal verb

A phrasal verb is a multi-word verb that consists of a verb with a preposition or an adverb or both. The meaning of the phrasal verb is different from the meaning of its separate parts.

Phrasal verbs may consist of two or three words.

Examples

  • Look up-check
  • Put off-postpone
  • Show off-boast
  • Take after-resemble
  • Eat into-erode/deplete
  • Grow up-mature
  • Make for-try to reach
  • Give in-yield/surrender
  • Make of-understand
  • Pass out-faint
  • Call at-visit
  • Take after-resemble

Phrasal verbs may consist of two or three words.

Examples

Two words

  • Make up-prepare, compensate for something, create a story
  • Bring up-raise a child, introduce an idea
  • Take off-remove something, run away, fly, succeed
  • Put on-wear clothes, switch, organize an event.
  • Bump into-meet
  • Drop by-visit

Three words

  • Catch up with-keep abreast
  • Check up on-examine, investigate
  • Come up with-contribute
  • Get along with- have a good relationship
  • Get away with-escape, blame
  • Get rid of-eliminate
  • Look down on-despise
  • Look up to-respect
  • Put up with-tolerate
  • Run out of-exhaust
  • Get through with-finish
  • Walk out on-leave somebody

In some phrasal verbs, the object may come after or may separate the two parts. These include

  • Call off-cancel
  • Do away-repeat a job
  • Find out-discover
  • Hold up-delay
  • Make up
  • Look up
  • Put off-postpone
  • Put out-extinguish
  • Turn down-reject
  • Turn up-raise the volume
  • Turn up
  • Lay off-sack
  • Pull down –demolish

NB: When the object of the following phrasal verb is a person, the two parts of the phrasal verb must be separated.

They called off this afternoons meeting.

They called this afternoons meeting off.

Some phrasal verbs cannot be separated.

  • Call on-visit
  • Get over-recover from sickness/disappointment
  • Look after
  • Look into
  • Take after
  • Bump into-meet accidentally

Phrasal verbs can be used transitively or intransitively.

  • Break down-stop functioning
  • Drop by-visit without appointment
  • Get by-survive
  • Grow up-get older.

Idiomatic expression

Idioms are expressions whose meaning is difficult or sometimes impossible to guess by looking at the meaning of the individual word it contains.

  • Have butterflies in your stomach-feel nervous
  • An icing on the cake-
  • Bitter pill to swallow-
  • waste not want not-warning against wastage
  • a rocket science-not difficult
  • keep one’s head above water-manage
  • give somebody a run for his money-not allow somebody easily
  • Throw the spanner in the works-prevent something from happening
  • Throw a tantrum-get angry
  • Take a French leave
  • Extend an olive branch
  • Fish in troubled water
  • Water under the bridge
  • Tip of the iceberg- small part of something
  • A storm in a cup of tea-
  • Hit below the belt
  • Bring to book-punish for wrong doing
  • Lend a hand-help
  • Throw in a white towel-surrender
  • Bite more than you can chew-do more than ability
  • Borrow a leaf-copy
  • Steal the show-attract attention
  • Bury the hatchet-stop being unfriendly and become friends
  • Bite the bullet-deal with a difficult situation

Chemistry KCSE Mock Exams and Answers {Latest Best Collections}

 

MOCKS 1 2023

 

NAME ______________________________________ INDEX NO _____________________

DATE ____________________________      SIGN ______________________________

233/1

CHEMISTRY

PAPER 1

TIME 2HRS

  1. Element K has atomic number 20 while element M has atomic number 8.
  2. Write the electron configuration of K and M

K ______________________ (1mk)

M ______________________ (1mk)

  1. Write the symbol of the most stable ion of K and M

K ____________________________ (1/2 mk)

M ___________________________ (1/2mk)

  1. Molten lead (ii) iodide is electrolyzed using inert electrodes. Write the half equation of the reactions that occur at the anode and cathode.
  2. Anode _______________________________________ (1mk)
  3. Cathode ______________________________________ (1mk)
  4. b) Explain why the conductivity of metals decrease with increase in temperature

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

 

  1. Some sodium chloride was found to be contaminated with copper (ii) oxide. Describe how a sample of dry sodium chloride can be obtained from the mixline

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

  1. Hot platinum wire was lowered into a flask containing concentrated ammonia solution as shown below

 

 

 

 

 

State and explain the observations made (3mks)

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

  1. a) What is a dative boud? (1mk)

________________________________________________________________________

  1. b) Draw a dot (.) and cross (x) diagram to show bouding in carbon (ii) oxide (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Air was passed through several reagents as shown in the flow chart diagram

 

 

 

 

 

  1. What is the purpose of concentrated potassium hydroxide solution? (1mk)

________________________________________________________________________

  1. Write an equation for the reaction which takes place in the chamber with magnesium powder (1mk)

________________________________________________________________________

  1. Name one gas which escapes from the chamber containing magnesium powder (1mk)

________________________________________________________________________

  1. Name the following substances
  2. CH­­2­CH CH2CH3 ______________________________________ (1mk)
  3. CH3CHCHCH2CH3 _______________________________________ (1mk)
  4. State the observation made when compound in (a) above was passed through acidified potassium (vii) manganite (1mk)

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

  1. The diagram below shows a wooden splint that was placed horizontally across the middle part of a non-luminous flame.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Explain the observation made (2mks)

_____________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

  1. Explain why non-luminous flame is preferred for heating than luminous flame (1mk)

_____________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

  1. Explain giving reasons why?
  2. Sulphuric(vi) acide is not used with marble in the preparation of carbon(iv) oxide (2mks)

_____________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

  1. Water cannot be used to extinguish oil fire

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

  1. 15cm3of a solution containg 2.88g/dm3 of an alkali XOH completely reacts with 20.0cm3 of 0.045m sulphuric(vi) acid. Calculate the molarity and relative atomic mass of x present in the alkali

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

  1. An hydrocarbon Q was found to decolourise potassium manganate(vii)solution. When two moles of Q were burnt completely six moles of carbon(iv)oxide and six moles of water were formed.
  2. Write the structural formula of Q (2mks)

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

  1. Name the homologous series to which Q belongs

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

  1. The diagram below represents an electrochemical cell

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) On the diagram label the salt bridge (1mk)
  2. ii) State two observations made in cell B (1mk)

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

  1. Write the overall ionic equation of the cell (1mk)

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

  1. During the extraction of copper and zinc from their ores, some of the processes include
  2. Crushing
  3. Mixing of the crushed ore with oil and water and bubbling air through it.
  • (i) Name the process (ii) above (1mk)

________________________________________________________________________

(ii) What is the purpose of  (ii) above

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

  1. Dry chlorine gas was passed through two pieces of coloured cotton cloth as shown

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. State what is observed in each experiment (1mk)

Experiment I

______________________________________________________________________

Experiment II

______________________________________________________________________

  1. Explain your observation using an equation (1mk)

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

  1. a) what is meant by solubility? (1mk)

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

  1. b) In an experiment to determine the solubility of solid Y in water at 30oC the following results were obtained.

Mass of evaporating dish = 26.2g

Mass of evaporating dish + saturated solution = 42.4g

Mass of evaporating dish + dry solid y = 30.4g

Using the information, determine the solubility of solid Y at 30oc in grams per 100g of water (2mks)

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

  1. the molar heat of formation of carbon(ii) oxide is 105kjmol-1, molar heat of combustion of carbon is -393 kjmol-1

by using an energy cycle diagram, determine the molar heat of combustion of carbon(ii)oxide (3mks)

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

  1. The diagram below was used to study the effect of heat on copper(ii)sulphate crystals

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Name liquid M (1mk)

_____________________________________________________________________

  1. State and explain the precaution that should be made before stopping heating (2mks)

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

  1. Deuterium 21D and tritium 31T are two isotopers of hydrogen. They react to form element Y and neutron particles according to the equation below.

21D  +  31T                           abY   +   10n

  1. Find the value of a and b (2mks)

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

  1. What name is given to the type of reaction undergone by the isotope of hydrogen (1mk)

________________________________________________________________________

  1. A gas occupies 4dm3 at -230c and 152mmHg. At what pressure will its volume be halved, if the temperature then is 2270c? (2mks)

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Ammonium nitrate was gently heated and the products collected as shown in the diagram

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Identify
  2. Colourless liquid H (1mk)

____________________________________________________

  1. Gas G (1mk)
  2. Describe one chemical test that can be used to identify gas G

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

  1. The diagram below shows the acidic and basic oxides fit into the general family of oxide

 

 

 

 

  1. State the type of oxide that would be placed in the shaded area (1mk)

_____________________________________________________________________

 

 

  1. Name an oxide that would be placed in the shaded area (1mk)

_____________________________________________________________________

  1. A dynamic equilibrium between dichromate and chromate ions is established as shown in the equation below.

Cr2O72-(aq) + ZOH(aq)                                              2Cro2-4 + H2O (l)

Orange                                                                        Yellow

  1. What is meant by dynamic equilibrium? (1mk)

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

  1. State and explain the observation made if a dilute hydrochloric acid is added to the equilibrium mixture (2mks)

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

  1. An experiment showed that the composition of a compound to be 5838% Barium, 13.72% Sulphur and 27.47% oxygen. Calculate the empirical formula of the compound (Ba = 137; S=32, O=16) (3mks)

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

  1. In an experiment to study diffusion of gases, the following set up was used

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. State and explain observations made in the experiment (2mks)

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

  1. Write an equation for the reaction that occurs in the experiment (1mks)

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

  1. The figure below is an energy level diagram for the reaction 2Z (g) + 2B(g) =  2AB(g)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Explain the effect of yield AB by

  1. Increase in pressure (1 ½ mk)

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

  1. Decrease in temperaline (1 ½ mk)

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

  1. Study the following changes that took place when the following substances are exposed to air.
  2. NaOH(s) I           NaOH(aq)

 

  1. N2CO3.IOH2O(s) II          Na2CO3(s) + IOH2O(l)

 

  1. CuSO4(s) + 5H2O(l) III        CuSO4.5H2O(s)

Name the process (3mks)

I _______________________________

II ______________________________

III _____________________________

  1. A white solid K was heated. It produced a brown gas A and another gas B which relights a glowing splint. The residue left was yellow when hot and white when cold.
  2. Identify gases A and B (2mks)

A ______________________________

B ______________________________

  1. Write an equation for the decomposition of solid K (1mk)

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

 

  1. Bronze is an alloy of copper and another metal. Identify the other metal.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

 

MOCKS 1 2023

 

NAME…………………………..………………DATE ………………………………………

 

 

INDEX NO.……….……….………………………..… SIGNATURE ……………..………

 

 

233/2

CHEMISTRY

(THEORY)

PAPER 2

THEORY

  1. The grid below shows part of the periodic table. Study it and answer the questions that follow. The letters do not represent the true symbols of the elements.
     
            A    
I B   C   D   E  
F G         H  
               

 

  1. Which element forms an ion of charge – 2? Explain your answer 2marks

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

(b) What is the nature of the oxide formed by element C?                                       1mark

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • How does the reactivity of H compare with that of E? Explain. 2marks

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Write the chemical equation for the reaction between B and chlorine?             1mark

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Explain how the atomic radii of the following compare;       2marks
  1. F and G

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. B and G

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • The oxides of B and D are separately dissolved in water. State the effect of each product on litmus paper. 2marks

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • 20cm3 of a solution of a hydroxide of I completely neutralizes 17.5cm3 of 0.5M sulphuric (VI) acid. Calculate the concentration in moles/litre of solution of the hydroxide of I3marks

 

  1. a) Sulphur occurs naturally in two different forms called allotropes;
  • What are allotropes?                   1mark

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • The two allotropes of sulphur are stable at different temperatures, as shown in the equation below.

 

Above 95.50C

Rhombic sulphur                                           Monoclinic sulphur

Below 95.50C

Give a name to the temperature 95.50C                                                                     1mark

…………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  1. b) Below is a flow chart diagram for the contact process for the manufacture of sulphuric (VI) acid.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • Give the name of chambers labeled 1 ½ mark

X

………………………………………………………………

 

Y

………………………………………………………………

 

Z

……………………………………………………………….

  • State the three conditions in the converter.             1 ½ mark

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Explain why gases are passed through ; 2marks

I – The dust precipitator and drying power

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  • II- The chamber labeled YWrite the balanced equations for the reactions in;3marks

Step 2:

………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Step 3:

………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Step 4:

………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  1. Calculate the volume of sulphur (VI) oxide gas in litres that would be required to produce 178kg of Oleum in step 3. (Molar gas volume at s.t.p.=22.4l, H=1, O=16, S=32)3marks

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Below is a scheme of some reactions of propanol. Study it and answer the questions that follow.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • State the reagents and conditions required to effect step I 3marks

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Draw the structural formulae and name product Z.       1mark

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  • Name product Q       1mark

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Explain how product Y can be distinguished from the product formed after step I has taken place.       2marks

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • What name is given to the process in Step II and step III       2marks

Step II

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Step III

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  • (i) Define the term hydrocarbon       1mark

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

(ii)  Draw the structure of 1, 2 – dibromopropane                                                    1mark

 

4.

  1. What is the molar heat of combustion of a substance? (1mark)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. The experiment below was set up to determine the molar heat of combustion of methanol.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The following data was obtained from the above experiment.

Mass of burner + methanol before burning                     =          62.74g

Mass of burner + methanol after burning                        =          62.36gFinal temperature of water                                                                             =          38.50C

Initial temperature of water                                             =          23.50C

Volume of water used                                                      =          100cm3

 

  1. From the above results work out the molar heat of combustion of methanol. (3marks)

(Density of water =1g/cm3, C = 12, O=16, H= 1.0)

Specific heat capacity of solution 4.2Kj K-1g  K-1)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Write a thermo chemical equation for this reaction. (1mark)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

  • Explain why the value obtained in (i) above may be lower than the actual value. (1mark)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  1. Study the data given below

C3H8(g)    +  5O2(g)                           3CO2(g)  +  4H2O(l)  ΔH = – 2209 KJmol-1

H2(g) +  ½ O2(g)                               H2O(l) ΔH = -286KJmol-1

C(s)  + O2(g)                                                             CO2(g) ΔH = -406KJmol-1

 

Use this information to find the heat of formation of propane.                          (3marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. What do you understand by the term heating value of a given fuel? (1mark)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. State two factors you consider when choosing a fuel. (1mark)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………

5.

  1. Magnesium ribbon was reacted with steam as shown in the diagram below.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • State two observations in the boiling tube. (2marks)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………….

  • Describe how you test for gas x (2marks)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..…………………….

  • State one industrial use of the product formed in the boiling tube at the end of the experiment.       (1mark)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

    • Explain what is meant by the term neutralisation.                                             (1mark)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Starting with 50cm3 of 2M nitric (v) acid, describe how you would prepare crystals of sodium nitrate.                                                                                                           (3marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..………………

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Complete the table below. (1mark)

 

 Indicator Colour in
Acidic solution Alkaline solution
Phenolphthalein __________ Pink
Methyl Orange Pink __________

 

  1. When magnesium is burnt in air two reactions take place forming two different compounds. Write down the equations for the two reactions.                                           (2marks )

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  1. The set up below is used to measure the change in mass during the course of the reaction between dilute hydrochloric acid (Excess) and marble chips at 220C.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Changes in mass were noted at one minute intervals and were as follows;

Time (Min) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Loss in mass (g) 0.26 0.46 0.60 0.69 0.73 0.73 0.73
  1. Write an equation for the reaction taking place in the flask. (1mark)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..…

  1. Give a reason why the mass of the flask charged with time?                         (1mark)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

  1. What is the role of cotton wool at the mouth of the flask? (1mark)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Explain why it is not advisable to use dilute sulphuric (VI) acid with marble chips in this experiment (1mark)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Plot a graph of loss in mass (vertical axis) against time. Label the curve 220C (3marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. On the same axis in (e) above sketch the graph you would expect to obtain if the experiment was repeated at 350 Label the curve 350C.       (1mark)
  2. State what would happen if the marble chips were replaced with the same mass of marble powder. Explain your answer.       (1mark)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Determine the volume of carbon (IV) oxide produced if 0.12g of marble chips was reacted with excess dilute hydrochloric acid. (Experiment done at room temperature and pressure. Molar gas volume at r.t.p = 24dm3,Ca = 40.0,O = 16, C = 12.0)       (2marks)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. In an experiment ,0.71g of hydrated sodium carbonate (Na2CO3.XH2O) was treated with dilute nitric v acid and the gas evolved was carbon iv oxide which was measured using a syringe at stp.The volume of carbon iv oxide obtained was 56cm3

a.Write the equation for the reaction between anhydrous sodium carbonate and dilute nitric v acid   (1mk)

 

 

  1. Calculate the number of moles of carbon iv oxide gas collected at s.t.p (molar gas volume at stp=22,400)           (2mks)

 

 

 

c.Calculate the mass of anhydrous sodium carbonate reacted                (3mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

d.Calculate the mass of water in 0.715g of hydrated sodium carbonate           (1mk)

 

 

 

  1. Determine the R.F.M of hydrated sodium carbonate, hence the value of X(3mks)

 

MOCKS 1 2023

 

Name _________________________________________   Index No. _____________________________

 

Candidate’s Signature ___________________

 

Date _________________________________

 

233/3

CHEMISTRY

PAPER 3

PRACTICAL

2 ¼  HOURS

 

 

 

 

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES

  • Write your name and admission number in the spaces provided.
  • Sign and write the date of examination in the spaces provided above.
  • Answer all questions in the spaces provided.
  • KNEC Mathematical tables and silent non-programmable electronic calculators may be used.
  • All working must be clearly shown where necessary.
  • Candidates should answer all the questions in English.

 

 

 

 

 

FOR EXAMINER’SUSE ONLY

 

Question Maximum Score Candidate’s Score
1 19  
2 10  
3 11  
TOTAL SCORE 40  

 

 

This paper consists of 8 printed pages

 

 

Turn Over

  1. You are provided with:

– Solution A, a mixture of two bases sodium hydroxide and sodium carbonate solids

dissolved in a 1 litre solution.

– Solution B, 0.2M hydrochloric acid.

– Phenolphthalein and methylorange indicators.

– Solution C, barium chloride solution.

 

You are required to determine the concentration of each of the reactants in the mixture.

 

Procedure 1

Pipette 25.0cm3 of solution A into a conical flask.

Add two drops of methylorange indicator.

Titrate solution A with B until the yellow colour just changes to pink.

Record your results in the table below.

Repeat the procedure to obtain two more readings.

 

Table I                                                                                                                                                (3 marks )

  1 2 3
Final burette reading (cm3)      
Initial burette reading (cm3)      
Volume of solution B used (cm3)      

 

(a)       Calculate the average volume (V1) of solution B used.                                            (1 mark )

 

 

 

 

 

 

(b)       Calculate the number of moles of hydrochloric acid that reacted.                           (1 ½ marks )

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Procedure II

Pipette 25.0cm3 of solution A into a conical flask. Measure 15.0cm3 of barium chloride

solution (solution C) with clean measuring cylinder.

Add it to the solution A in the conical flask.  Shake it gently and add three drops of phenolphthalein indicator.

Titrate solution B into the conical flask until the pink colour just changes to colourless.

NB:     The white precipitate should remain in the flask.

Repeat the procedure to obtain two more readings.

 

Table II                                                                                                                                               ( 3 marks )

  1 2 3
Final burette readings (cm3      
Initial burette reading (cm3)      
Volume of solution B used (cm3)      

 

(c )      Calculate the average volume (V2) of solution B used.                                                        (1 mark )

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(d)       The equation for the formation of white precipitate

 

Na2CO3 (aq)  +  BaCl2 (aq)                  BaCO3 (s)  +  2NaCl (aq)

 

During titration II the white precipitate formed after adding barium chloride does

not take part in the titration but all the hydroxide ions (OH) in the solution are neutralized.

 

(i) Calculate the moles of the acid (solution B) reacting in titration II.                   ( 1 ½ marks )

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(ii) Calculate moles of sodium hydroxide (OH) reacting during the titration.       ( 1 ½ marks )

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(e)       Calculate number of moles of acid that reacted with sodium carbonate in the mixture. ( 1 ½ marks )

 

 

 

 

 

 

(f)        Calculate the concentration of solution A in terms of sodium hydroxide in

moles per litre.                                                                                                           ( 1 ½ marks )

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(g)       Write an ionic equation for the reaction of the acid with sodium carbonate.          ( 1 mark)

 

 

 

 

 

 

(h)       (i) Calculate the number of moles of sodium carbonate in the mixture.                  (1 mark )

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(ii) Calculate concentration of solution A in terms of sodium carbonate in

moles per litre.                                                                                                     (1 ½ marks )

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. You are provided with solid Z. Carry out the tests below and write your observations

and inferences.

(a)       Using a clean metallic spatula, heat a half of solid Z in a Bunsen burner flame.

 

Observation Inferences
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

( 1 ½ marks )

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

( 1 marks

 

(b)       Dissolve the remaining portion of solid Z into 10cm3 of distilled water in a boiling tube.

Divide the resulting solution into four portions.

 

Observation Inferences
 

 

 

 

 

 

( 1 mark )

 

 

 

 

 

 

( ½  mark )

 

(c )      To 1st portion, add 3 drops of acidified potassium manganate (VII)

 

Observation Inferences
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

( ½ mark )

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

( 1 ½  marks )

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(d)       To the 2nd portion, add 3 drops of acidified potassium dichromate (VI) and warm.

 

Observation Inferences
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

( ½ mark )

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

( 1 ½  marks )

 

(e)       To the 3rd portion, add all the NaHCO3 provided.

 

Observation Inferences
 

 

 

 

 

 

( 1 mark )

 

 

 

 

 

 

( ½  mark )

 

(f)        To the 4th portion, add 3 drops of universal indicator and determine the pH value.

 

Observation Inferences
 

 

 

 

 

 

( 1mark )

 

 

 

 

 

 

( ½  mark )

 

  1. You are provided with solid Y. Carry out the tests below and record your observations and

inferences in the spaces provided.

(a)       Place half of solid Y in a boiling tube and heat.  Test any gas produced with litmus paper.

 

Observation Inferences
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

( 1 ½ marks )

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

( 1 mark )

 

 

 

(b)       Place the remaining solid Y into a boiling tube.  Add about 10cm3 distilled water and

shake.  Divide the resulting solution into 5 portions.

 

Observation Inferences
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

( ½ mark )

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

( ½  mark )

 

(c )      To the 1st portion, add NaOH(aq)dropwise till in excess.

Observation Inferences
 

 

 

 

 

 

( 1mark )

 

 

 

 

 

 

( ½  mark )

 

(d)       To the 2nd portion, add NH3 (aq) dropwise till in excess.

Observation Inferences
 

 

 

 

 

 

( 1 mark )

 

 

 

 

 

 

( ½  mark )

 

(e)       To the 3rd portion, add 1cm3 of acidified hydrogen peroxide followed by

NaOH(aq) dropwise till in excess.

Observation Inferences
 

 

 

 

 

 

( 1 mark )

 

 

 

 

 

 

( ½  mark )

 

 

 

(f)        To the 4th portion, add 3 drops of lead (II) nitrate and then filter.

Observation Inferences
 

 

 

 

 

 

( 1 mark )

 

 

 

 

 

 

( 1 mark )

 

(g)       To the 5th portion, add 3 drops of acidified barium nitrate solution.

Observation Inferences
 

 

 

 

 

 

(  ½ mark )

 

 

 

 

 

 

( ½  mark )

 

 

MOCKS 1 2023

233/3

CHEMISTRY

PAPER 3

PRACTICAL

 

 

021

Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education

CHEMISTRY

PAPER 3

 

CONFIDENTIAL TO SCHOOLS

 

The information contained in this paper is to enable the head of Institution and the teacher in charge of Chemistry to make adequate preparations for the Form 4 entrance examination.  NO ONE ELSE should have access to this paper or acquire knowledge of its contents.  The teacher in charge of Chemistry should NOT perform any of the experiments in the same room as the candidates NOR make the results of the experiments available to the candidates or given any other information related to the experiments to the candidates.  Doing so will constitute an examination irregularity which is punishable.

 

In addition to the apparatus and fittings found in a Chemistry Laboratory, each candidate will require the following:

 

  1. 1g solid Y
  2. 1g solid Z
  3. Metallic spatula
  4. 6 test tubes in a rack
  5. 2 boiling tubes
  6. Test tube holder
  7. Filter funnel
  8. Filter paper (one)
  9. Distilled water
  10. Acidified potassium manganate (VII) + dropper
  11. Acidified potassium dichromate (VI) + dropper.
  12. About 1g of NaHCO3 (s)
  13. pH chart
  14. Universal indicator.
  15. 2M NaOH(aq) + dropper
  16. 2M NH3 (aq) + dropper.
  17. Blue and red litmus papers.
  18. Acidified hydrogen peroxide + dropper.
  19. Measuring cylinder (10 mls ).
  20. Acidified 2M Barium Nitrate + dropper
  21. 2M Lead (II) nitrate + dropper.
  22. Bunsen Burner.
  23. 150cm3 of solution A.
  24. 150cm3 of solution B
  25. 50cm3 of solution C
  26. 25.0cm3 pipette.
  27. 50.0cm3 burette.
  28. A clamp and stand.
  29. 100ml measuring cylinder.
  30. 3 conical flasks.
  31. White tile.
  32. Phenolphthalein indicator.
  33. Methyl orange indicator.

 

 

 

NOTE:

 

    • Solution A is prepared by dissolving a mixture of 8g sodium hydroxide and 10.6g sodium carbonate in distilled water to make 1 litre solution.
    • Solution B is prepared by measuring 17.2cm3 of concentrated hydrochloric acid ( specific gravity 1.18) to 500cm3 of distilled water and then making it to one litre.
    • Solution C 0.1M barium chloride solution.
    • Solid Y – Hydrated ammonium iron (II) sulphate
    • Solid Z – Maleic acid

 

MOCKS 1 2023

 

MARKING SCHEME

233/2

CHEMISTRY

PAPER 2

JULY/AUGUST

 

Question 1

  • A (√1mk) elements in group (vi) have 6 electrons in the outermost energy level, they react by gaining 2 electrons.1mk
  • Amphoteric Oxide √1mk
  • Element E is more reactive than H (√1mk) Elements E and H are non – metals in group (VII) and reactivity decreases down the group √1mk / E is smaller than H and hence has a higher electron affinity therefore more reactive.
  • B(s) + Cl2(g) BCl2(s) 1mk
  • (i) The atomic radius of element F is greater than that of G √1mk / Across period number of protons (nuclear charge increases increasing effective nuclear charge.

(ii) The atomic radius of element G is greater than that of B. √1mk

  • Solution of oxide of B changes red litmus paper blue and has no effect on blue litmus paper 1mk while solution of oxide of D changes blue litmus paper red and has no effect on red litmus paper. 1mk
  • 2IOH (aq) +  H2SO4 (aq)                                     I2SO4(aq) + 2H2O(l)   √1mk

2    :           1

Moles of H2SO4                                              17.5 x0.5 = 0.00875moles √½ mk

1000

Moles of IOH                    0.00875 ÷ 2 = 0.004375 moles √½ mk

Molarity of IOH   =          1,000 x 0.004375

20

=         0.21875M √1mk

Concentration             =          0.21875 moles/litre    √½ mk

Question 2

  1. (i) Crystalline forms of sulphur √1mk

            Or

Existence of sulphur in more than one form in the same physical state.√1mk

(ii)  Transition temperature                     √1mk

  1. (i) X – dilution chamber                          √1 ½ mk

            Y- Heat exchanger                              √1 ½ mk

Z  – Burner                                          √1 ½ mk

(ii) Vandalism (v) catalyst                       √1 ½ mk

Temperature – 5000C                         √1 ½ mk

Pressure – 200atm                              √1 ½ mk

  • I – To remove dust particles and water vapour that could otherwise poison the catalyst √1mk

II- Lose heat and pre-heat incoming gases    √1mk

  • Step 2; 2SO2(g) + O2(g)             2SO3(g)             √1mk

Step 3:             SO3(g) + H2SO4(l)                      H2S2O7 (l)         √1mk

Step 4:             H2S2O7(l) + H2O(l)                    2 H2SO4(l)        √1mk

  • H2SO4(l) + SO3(g) H2S2O7(l)          √½ mk

1    :           1          :           1

 

1 mole of oleum = 178,000          =  1,000moles

178

1 mole at s.t.p       =          22.4L

1,000moles           =          ?                      √½ mk

=        1000 x 22.4  = 22,400 litres   √1mk

 

Question 3

  • Reagent : Hydrogen gas √1mk

Conditions: – Nickel catalyst                   √1mk

– I50-2500C (temperature)  √1mk

  •             H         H         H

H         C         C         C         H

Br        H         H

I – Bromopropane       √1mk

  • Polypropene √1mk
  • Y decolourisesbromine water √1mk while the product formed after step I has taken place does not                                                                                                                                           √1mk
  • Step II – dehydration √1mk

Step III – substitution       √1mk

  • (i) A hydrocarbon is a compound that contains carbon and hydrogen only √1mk

 

(ii)                   H         H         H

H         C         C         C         H

Br        Br        H                                                                                 √1mk

 

 

Question 4

  1. Molar heat of combustion is the enthalpy change that occurs when one mole of a substance is burnt completely in oxygen. √ 1 mk
    1. Mass of methanol            =          0.38g   √ ½ mk

Change in temp. ΔT       =          38.5 – 23.5

=          150C

 

Heat produced.                 =          MCDT

=          100  x 4.2  x 15           √ ½  mk

1000

=          63.1KJ.

 

Molar mass of ethanol (CH3OH) =         32 √ ½  mk

 

Molar heat of combustion            =          63.1     x   32   √ ½  mk

0.38

=          5313.68 KJ mol-1

 

  1. CH3OH(l) +  H2O2(g)                             CO2(g)+  2H2O(l)  √ 1 mk  ΔH = -5313.68KJmol-1
  • Heat is lost to the environment

Hence the value is lower √ 1 mk

  1. Equation for formation of propane.

3C(s)  +  4H2(g)                  C3H8(g)             √ 1 mk

 

Heat of formation             =          3 (-406) + 4 (-286)  +  2209) √ 1 mk

=          -1218  – 4576

=          – 3585 KJmol-1                   √ 1 mk

  1. This is the amount of heat energy given out when a unit mass or unit volume of fuel is completely burned in oxygen.                              √ 1 mk

 

  • Heating value
  • Ease and rate of combustion
  • Availability
  • Ease of transportation                             any 2 correct ½ mk each
  • Ease of storage
  • Environmental effects
  • Cost

     

 

Question 5

    1. Magnesium burns with a bright white flame √ 1 mk

A white solid is formed    √ 1 mk

  1. Place a burning splint √ 1 mk near the mouth of the test tube containing the gas.

A ‘pop’ sound is produced.

This confirms that the gas is hydrogen √ ½  mk

  • Making lining of furnaces.          √ 1 mk
    1. This the reaction between a givennumber of moles of hydrogen ions (H+)√ 1 mk and an equal number of hydroxide (OH) ions to form water.
    2. Add 50cm3 of 2M√ 1 mk sodium hydroxide solution.
  • Evaporate √ ½ mk the mixture to obtain a saturated solution.
  1. Leave the saturated solution for some time to √ ½ mk
  2. Filter the crystals and dry then dry then√ ½ mk between two filter papers.
Indicator Colour in
Acidic solution  Alkaline solution
Phenolphthalein Colourless √ ½  mk  
Methyl Orange   Yellow √ ½  mk

 

  1. 2Mg(s) +  O2(g)                                    2MgO(s)                  √ 1 mk

3Mg(s)  +  N2(g)                    Mg3N2(s)                   √ 1 mk

 

Question 6

  1. CaCO3(s) +  2HCl(aq)                       CaCl2(aq) +  H2O(l)   +  Co2(g)  √ 1 mk
  2. The carbon (iv) oxide formed escaped into the atmosphere. √ 1 mk
  3. To prevent acid from spraying out. √ 1 mk
  4. Forms insoluble salt √ ½ mk of calcium sulphate which forms a coat √ ½ mk on the surface of the marble chips preventing any further reaction. √ 1 mk
  5. The reactions rate would increase √ ½ mk marble powder provides a larger surface area, more particles are involved in reactions, thus increasing the rate of reaction. √ ½  mk
  6. CaCo3(s)  + 2HCl+(aq)                              CaCl2(aq)  + H2O(l)   +  CO2(g)  √ ½  mk

1mole                2moles                                                                1mole

0.12g                                 0.12  x  24dm3√ 1 mk

100

=          0.0288dm3 √ ½ mk

 

 

Question 7

7(a) Na2CO3(s) + 2HNO3(aq)            2NaNO3(aq) + CO2(g) +H2O(l)

(b) 1 mole of CO2(g)                    22400cm3

56cm3

=0.0025 moles

(c) Mole ratio Na2CO3   :     CO2

1           :      1

?                  0.0025moles

0.0025moles of Na2CO3

1Mole of Na2CO3= 106g

0.0025moles       =     ?

= = 0.265g

(d) Mass of water= 0.715-0.265=0.45g

 

(e)

  Na2CO3 H2O
Mass 0.265g 0.45g
RFM 106 18
Moles 0.265/106=0.0025 0.45/18=0.025
Mole ratio 0.0025/0.0025=1 0.025/0.0025=10

X=10

233/3

CHEMISTRY

PAPER 3

PRACTICAL

 

 

021

Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education

CHEMISTRY

PAPER 3

 

MOCKS 1 2023

 

MARKING SCHEME

 

  1. Procedure I

Table 1

 

  1 2 3
Final burette reading 25.1 35.0 39.9
Initial burette reading 0.0 10.0 15.0
Volume of solution B used 25.1 25.0 24.9

( Compare / use the teacher’s value )

 

Award marks as follows:

A:        Complete table                                   ( 1 mark )

Conditions

Complete table with three titration    1 mark

Incomplete table with two titrations ½ ark

Incomplete table with one titration    0 mark

 

B:        Decimal place             ( 1 mark)

Conditions :

Accept only one or two decimal places used consistently.

If two decimal place the 2nd decimal place MUST be either o or 0.5

 

C :       Accuracy         1 mark

Compare the student’s titre value with teacherstitre values.

Conditions

At least within ± 0.1   1 mark

At least within ± 0.2   ½ mark

Above ± 0.2    0 mark

 

D:        Principles of averaging          1 mark

Values averaged must be shown and within ± 0.1 of each other

 

 

 

 

  1. (a) 25.1 + 25.0 + 24.9       Ö ½

3

= 25.0cm3Ö     ½

 

(b)       Moles of acid that reacted

If 1000cm3                  0.2 moles

Then 25cm3                25.0 x 0.2      Ö1

1000

= 0.005 moles   Ö ½

 

Procedure II

 

Table II

Award according to procedure I table I

 

  1 2 3
Final burette reading 12.6 25.1 37.6
Initial burette reading 0.0 12.6 25.1
Volume of solution B used 12.6 12.5 12.5

( Compare / use the teacher’s value )

 

(c )      12.6 + 12.5 + 12.5       Ö ½

3

= 12.5333cm3Ö ½

 

(d)       (i)        Moles of the acid

If 1000cm3                  0.2 moles

12.5333cm3                 0.2 x 12.5333     Ö1

1000

= 0.002506 moles   Ö ½

 

(ii)       Moles of sodium hydroxide

Mole ratio

H+  :OH

1  :  1    Ö1

\0.002506 : 0.002506

 

Ie         0.002506 moles  Ö ½

 

(e)       Moles of acid that reacted with sodium carbonate

Ans (b) – ans (dii)

0.005 moles – 0.002506 moles Ö1

= 0.002494 moles Ö ½

 

(f)        Molarity of A in terms of NaOH

If 25.0cm3                   0.002506

The 1000cm3              0.002506 x 1000   Ö1

25cm3

= 0.10024M   Ö ½

(g)       CO32- (aq)  +  2H+(aq)                  H2O (l)  +  CO2 (g)

[Unbalanced   0 mark

Missing state symbol             ½ mark]

 

(h)       (i)        Moles of sodium carbonate

½ x 0.002494 Ö ½

= 0.001247 moles       Ö ½

 

(ii)       Molarity of A in terms of Na2CO3

If 25cm3                      0.001247

Then 1000cm3 0.001247 x 1000    Ö1

25

= 0.04988M   Ö ½

 

  Observations Inferences
2. (a) – Solid melts Ö ½

– Burns in yellowÖ ½  sooty flame Ö ½

Max 1 ½ marks

– Presence of either

C  =  C    Ö ½   or      C     CÖ

Max 1 mark

(b) – Dissolves Ö ½ into a colourless Ö ½ solution

Max 1 mark

–        Solid is polar Ö ½

Max ½ mark

(c ) –        Acidified KMnO4 changes from purple to colourless Ö ½

Max ½ mark

– Presence of either

C      CÖ ½  or    C      CÖ ½ or

R – OH    Ö ½

Max 1 ½ marks

(d) –        Acidified K2Cr2O7 changes from orange to green Ö ½

Max ½ mark

– Presence of either

C     CÖ ½ ;      C     CÖ ½    or

R – OH Ö ½

Max 1 ½ marks

(e) –        EffervencesÖ ½ production of colourless gas Ö ½

Max 1 mark

H+Ö ½ /            O

 

C      OH   present

Max ½ mark

(f) pH 4 Ö ½

Max ½ mark

Weakly acidic   Ö ½

Max ½ mark

     
3 (a) – Colourless liquid on cooler parts of test tube Ö ½

– Colourless gas with pungent smell Ö ½

– Gas turns moist red litmus blue Ö ½ / Blue litmus remains blue Ö ½

– Hydrated salt Ö ½

– Presence of NH4+Ö ½

1

(b) –        Solid dissolves into pale green solution Ö ½

–        1

–        Polar solid Ö ½

–        Presence of Fe2+Ö ½

1

(c ) -Green Ö ½  ppt insoluble Ö ½  in excess

– PPt turns brown on exposure to air Ö ½

1 ½

– Presence of Fe2+Ö ½

– Fe2+ oxidized to Fe3+ by air Ö 1

1

 

 

 

(d) – Green ppt Ö ½ insoluble in excess

– Ppt turns brown on exposure to air Ö ½

1 ½

– Presence of Fe2+Ö ½

– Fe2+ oxidized to Fe3+ by air Ö ½

1

(e) –        Pale green solution  turns yellow Ö ½

–        Brown Ö ½ ppt insoluble Ö ½ in excess

1 ½

– Presence of Fe3+Ö ½

½

(f) – Formation of white ppt Ö ½ as residue and green solution as filtrate Ö ½

1

–        Presence of Fe2+Ö ½

–        Presence of either CeÖ ½ , SO42-Ö ½ or SO32-Ö ½ , CO32-Ö ½

Max 2 marks

(g) –        White ppt forms Ö ½

½

SO42- present Ö ½

½

 

 

MOCKS 1 2023

 

MARKING SCHEME

233/1

CHEMISTRY

PAPER 1

THEORY

 

  1. (a) K   2. 8.8.2       √1mk

M    2.6              √1mk

 

(b)    K 2+

M 2-

2      (a) Anode:     I (l)                         I2 (g) +2e1mk

Cathode:      Pb2++ 2e  Pb (s)√1mk

  1. b) Increase in temperature increases the kinetic energy (1/2 mrk) of positive centres and electrons making them to vibrate more. These increase collisions of positive centres and electrons hence increased resistance (1/2mrk)
  2. Add water to the mixture and stir sodium chloride dissolve leaving copper (ii) oxide which is insoluble. (√1mk)

Filter(1/2) to remove copper (ii) oxide and sodium chloride as the filtrate

Evaporate the filtrate to saturation and cool to obtain sodium crystals (√1mk)

Dry them between filter papers/leave them in the open to dry (√1mk)

 

  • Hot platinum wire glows red. (√1mk)

Brown fumes are observed (√1mk)

Reaction between oxygen gas and ammonia gas over platinum wire is exothermic. (1/2mrk)

Ammonia is oxidized to nitrogen (ii) oxide which reacts with excess oxygen to form nitrogen (iv) oxide,(1/2 mrk)

  1. a) A bond formed by two atoms/elements by share of  electrons from one of the atoms/element(√1mk)

 

b)

 

  1. a) Remove / absorb carbon (iV) oxide (√1mk)

 

  1. b) 3Mg (s)    +   N2(g)                     Mg3N2 (s)    (√1mk)
  2. c) Neon/ Argon    (√1mk)
  3. a) But – 1 – ene (√1mk)
  4. b) Pent – 2 –ene  (√1mk)
  5. c) Potassium manganate (VII) is decolourised/ Potassium manganate (VII) changes colour from purple to colourless (√1mk)

 

  1. a) The outer zone has complete combustion and hence hotter tha the middle zone forming the charred black part (1mrk) Middle zone has incomplete combustion and hence less hot forming unburnt part (√1mk)
  2. b) – Non – luminous flame is hotter than luminous flame    (1mrk)

Non – luminous flame does not produce soot (1mrk)      Any one (√1mk)

  1. a) Sulphuric (VI) acid react with marble (Calcium carbonate) forming insoluble calcium sulphate(1mrk) which form a coat over marble stopping any further reaction (√1mk)
  2. b) Oil is less dense (1/2) than water making oil float(1/2) on top hence continues to burn.
  3. 2XOH(aq) +   H2SO4(aq)              X2SO4 (aq)      +  2 H2O(l)

 

XOH          =   2                    =   15 X  M

H2SO4       1                       20 X 0.045                        (√1mk)

M  =   2 X 20 X 0.045

1 X 15                                 =  0,12 moles/l         (1/2)

 

1mole    =    2.88

0.12               =  24              (1/2)

RFM of    XOH    =   X  + 16 + 1      (1/2)

X  =  7                    1/2)

 

  1. a) 2CxHy                     X CO2      +   y/2 H2O

X     = 6

2            =  3     (1/2)

Y  =   12

3            =   6     (1/2)

MF  =  C3H6          (1/2)

Structural fprmula  =   CH3 CH = CH2         (1/2)

 

  1. b) Alkenes
  2. on the diagram
  3. a) √1mk
  4. b) arrow from zinc half-cell towards copper half cell √1mk
  5. c) Zn(s)    +  Cu2+(aq)                         Zn2+(aq)       +    Cu(s)         √1mk

 

  1. (i) Froath floatation √1mk

 

(ii)  Concetrating the mineral ore by making impurities to sink atb the bottom. √1mk

 

  1. (a) Exp. 1 – The colour of dry cloth did not turn to white/ cloth not bleached, because of the absence of hypochloric (I) acid which is responsible for bleaching

 

(b) Exp 2 – Wet cloth turned white due to bleaching as chlorine dissolves in water to form hypochloric(I) acid√1mk

 

  1. b) Cl2(g) +  H2O(g)    + Dye                {Dye + [O]}  + 2HCl(g)   √1mk

 

  1. (a) Solubility is the maximum mass in grams of solute that will dissolve in 100g ofvwater at a given temperature/ is the mass in grams of solute required to make a saturated solution with 100g of water at given temperature. √1mk/

(b)  Mass of solid Y    =  30.4 – 26.2

= 4.2g  (1/2mrk)

Mass of water in the solution   = 42.4 – 30.4

= 12g  (1/2 mrk)

12 g of water dissolve 4.2g solid Y

100g of ware will dissolve          100  x  4.2     (1/2mrk)

12

= 35g / 100g of water   (1/2mrk)

 

  1. AH0f(CO) +          AH0c(CO)      =    AH0c(C)

-105      +       AH0c(CO)         = -393    √1mk

AH0c(CO)    =  -393   +  105        √1mk

=  -188kJMol-1  √1mk

  1. a) Water   √1mk

b)The delivery tube should first be removed √1mk to avoid sucking back of liquid M √1mk

  1. a) Atomic mass of Y 2 + 3 = a + 1

a  = 4  √1mk

Atomic number       1 + 1 = b + 0

b  =        2  √1mk

  1. b) Nuclear fusion √1mk)

V1  =   4dm3  ; P1  =  152mmHg ;  V2  = 2dm3 ;   T1  =  250K   ;  T2    =  500K  P2 = ?

152 x 4          =            P2 x 2

250                                 500                     √1mk

P2       =    152 x4 x 500

250 x 2                   √1mk

= 608mmHg √1mk

  1. a) (i) Liquid H is Water             √1mk

(ii)  Gas G is Nitrogen (i) oxide    √1mk

 

  1. b) turn white anhydrous copper (II) sulphate to blue / Turns blue cobalt(II) chloride to pink √1mk
  2. a) Amphoteric oxide  √1mk
  3. b) Lead (II) oxide / Zinc oxide / Aluminium (III) oxide (Any one) √1mk

 

  1. a) Rate of forward reaction equals to the rate of backward reaction. √1mk
  2. b) Orange colour of the solution intensifies √1mk

Equilibrium shift to the left/ backward reaction is favoured to replace OH that react with H+1mk

Element                              Ba                           S                          O

% composition                       58.81                     13.72                   24.47

RAM                                13732                       16

No. of moles                         58.81 13.72  24.47    (1/2mrk)

137                        32                        16

0.4293                          0.4281                  1.768

Mole ratio    1                                   1                         4       (1/2mrk)

E . F.           BaSO4(√1mk)

  1. (i) A white ring/ solid (1/2mrk)  was formed inside the combustion tube closer to the cotton wool soaked in concentrated hydrochloric acid (1/2mrk).  Ammonia is lighter/less dense than hydrochloric acid hence diffuse faster  (√1mk)

(ii)  NH3 (g)          +    HCl(g)                                     NH4Cl(s)   (√1mk)

  1. (i) The yield of AB is increased. (√1mk)

The forward reaction is accompanied by a decrease in volume(1/2mrk). Equilibrium shifts to the right following increase of the forward reaction (1/2mrk)

(ii) The yield of AB is increased’ (√1mk)

The forward reaction is exothermic.(1/2mrk)  Decrease in temperature favours the forward reaction, equilibrium shifts to the right.(1/2mrk)

  1. (a) Deliquescence (√1mk)

(b)   Efflorescence  (√1mk)

(c) Hygroscopy (√1mk)

 

  1. a) A – Nitrogen (IV) oxide/  NO2(√1mk)

B – Oxgygen/ O2(√1mk)

  1. b) 2ZnNO3 (g)2ZnO(s)            +   4 NO2 (g)      +   O2(g)   (√1mk)
  2. Tin    (√1mk)

 

 

 

JESMA, SIGNAL KCPE REVISION EXAMS PLUS ANSWERS

DOWNLOAD FREE CLASS 8 KCPE REVISION EXAM PAPERS BELOW;

ENGLISH

SCIENCE

KISWAHILI- LUGHA

SOCIAL STUDIES & RELIGIOUS EDUCATION

KISWAHILI- INSHA

ENGLISH- COMPOSITION

MATHEMATICS

MARKING SCHEMES- ALL SUBJECTS

Grade 9 CBC Exams, Free For Term 1 to 3

Unlimited Grade 9 CBC Exams, Free For Term 1 to 3 downloads available below:

AGRICULTURE-AND-NUTRITION-MS-MD

AGRICULTURE-AND-NUTRITION-QSS-MD

animal-production-topical-questions-and-answers-grade-8-agriculture-and-nutrition

CREATIVE-ARTS-MS-MD

CREATIVE-ARTS-QS-MD

ENGLISH-MS-MD

ENGLISH-QS-MD

G9-AGRICULTURE

G9-AGRICULTURE-AND-NUTRITION-PAPER-1-THEORY

G9-AGRICULTURE-AND-NUTRITION-pp1

G9-CAS

G9-COMPOSITION

G9-CRE (1)

G9-CREATIVE-ARTS-PRACTICAL

G9-CREATIVE-ARTS-THEORY

G9-ENGLISH

G9-ENGLISH-1

G9-ENGLISH-2

G9-ENGLISH-PAPER-1

G9-ENGLISH-PAPER-2

G9-HRE

G9-INSHA

G9-INSHA-1

G9-INTEGRATED

G9-INTEGRATED-1

G9-INTEGRATED-SCIENCE-PRACTICAL

G9-INTEGRATED-SCIENCE-THEORY-PAPER

G9-IRE (1)

G9-KISWAHILI

G9-KISWAHILI-1

G9-KISWAHILI-PAPER-1

G9-KISWAHILI-PAPER-2 (1)

G9-KSL-PRACTICAL

G9-KSL-THEORY

G9-MATHEMATICS (1)

G9-MATHEMATICS (1)

G9-MATHEMATICS (2)

G9-MATHEMATICS-1

G9-PRETECHNICAL

G9-PRETECHNICAL-1

G9-PRETECHNICAL-STUDIES-THEORY

G9-RELIGIOUS

G9-RELIGIOUS-1

G9-SOCIAL-STUDIES (2)

G9-SST

G9-SST-1

GRADE-9-AGRICULTURE-AND-NUTRITION-PAPER-2-PROJECT

GRADE-9-CREATIVE-ARTS-AND-SPORTS-PAPER-1-THEORY

GRADE-9-CREATIVE-ARTS-AND-SPORTS-PAPER-2-PRACTICAL

GRADE-9-CRE-THEORY-PAPER

GRADE-9-ENGLISH-PAPER-1

GRADE-9-ENGLISH-PAPER-2

GRADE-9-HINDU-RELIGIOUS-EDUCATION

GRADE-9-INTEGRATED-SCIENCE-PAPER-1-THEORY

GRADE-9-INTEGRATED-SCIENCE-PAPER-2-PRACTICALS

GRADE-9-ISLAMIC-RELIGIOUS-EDUCATION

GRADE-9-KENYA-SIGN-LANGUAGE-PAPER-1-THEORY-1

GRADE-9-KENYA-SIGN-LANGUAGE-PAPER-1-THEORY-2

GRADE-9-KISWAHILI-PAPER-1

GRADE-9-KISWAHILI-PAPER-2

GRADE-9-MATHEMATICS

GRADE-9-PRETECHNICAL-STUDIES-PAPER-1-THEORY

GRADE-9-PRETECHNICAL-STUDIES-PAPER-2-PROJECT

GRADE-9-SOCIAL-STUDIES-PAPER

GRADE-9-SOCIAL-STUDIES-PAPER-1

CBC Grade 9 Free JS Exams For all Subjects

Grade 9 Comprehensive Exams {1,000 plus downloads}

Grade 9 Latest Rationalized Notes

Grade 9 Rationalized Schemes of Work

Free Grade 9 Exams {Latest}

Free Grade 9 Lesson Plans

KJSEA Grade 9 KNEC Exam Revision Papers

Grade 9 Free Lesson Plans For All Subjects

Grade 9 KJSEA exams and answers

Grade 9 Rationalized CBC Lesson Plans Free

Grade 9 Rationalized Term 2 CBC Schemes of Work

Grade 9 Best CBC Notes & Schemes of Work For All Subjects

Grade 9 Latest Term 1 CBC Schemes of Work

Grade 9 Free Notes

Grade 9 Free Resources: Assessment Exams, Notes & Schemes of Work Pdf

CBC Grade 9 Free JS Exams For all Subjects

Grade 9 Term 1 Schemes of Work

KJSEA Grade 9 Free CBC exams Plus Marking schemes

Knec KJSEA Grade 9 Exams Structure: Subjects & Content Distribution

Junior secondary school jss (grade 7-9) materials

Nairobi School KCSE 2025 Exam Papers

Nairobi School KCSE 2025 Exam Papers

NAIROBI SCHOOL CHEM PP3 CONF.docx
NAIROBI SCHOOL PHYC PP3 CONF.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL PHYC PP3 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL CHEM PP3 CONF.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL CHEM PP3 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL CHEM PP3 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
NAIROBI SCHOOL BIO PP3 CONF.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL BIO PP3 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL IRE PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL IRE PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL HOME SCI PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL HOME SCI PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
NAIROBI SCHOOL HOME SCI PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL HOME SCI PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
NAIROBI SCHOOL COMP PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL COMP PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
NAIROBI SCHOOL COMP PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL COMP PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
NAIROBI SCHOOLMATH PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOLKISW PP3 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOLKISW PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOLKISW PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL ENG PP3 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL ENG PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL ENG PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL BST PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL BST PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL AGRI PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL AGRI PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL PHYC PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL PHYC PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL CHEM PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL CHEM PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
NAIROBI SCHOOL CHEM PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL BIO PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL BIO PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL GEO PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL GEO PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
NAIROBI SCHOOL GEO PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL HIST PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL HIST PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
NAIROBI SCHOOL HIST PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL HIST PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
NAIROBI SCHOOL CRE PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL CRE PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
NAIROBI SCHOOL CRE PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx

BUSINESS STUDIES NOTES FORM 3 PDF

TOPIC: SOURCE DOCUMENTS AND BOOKS OF ORIGINAL ENTRY

These are documents containing the information that makes basis of making entries in the books of accounts. They act as evidence that the transaction actually took place. They includes

  • Cash sale receipt: – a document that shows that cash as been received or paid out of the business either in form of cash or cheque. It is a source document that is mainly used in making records in the cash journals cash book, cash accounts or bank accounts. If the receipt is received, it means payments has been made and therefore will be credited in the above accounts, or taken to cash disbursement/payment journals, while when issued, it means cash/cheque has been received and therefore will be debited in the above accounts or taken to cash receipt journals

GET THE NOTES IN PDF HERE AT NO COST: BUSINESS STUDIES NOTES FORM 1-4: UPDATED

  • Invoice: – a document issued when the transaction was done on credit to demand for their payment. If the invoice is an incoming invoice/invoice received, then it implies that the purchases were made on credit, and if it is an outgoing/invoice issued then it implies that sales were made on credit.

The incoming invoice will be used to record the information in the purchases journals/diary, while an outgoing invoice will be used to record information in sales journals/diaries

 

  • Credit note: – a document issued when goods are returned to the business by the customer or the business return goods to the supplier and to correct any overcharge that may have taken place. If it is received, then it means part of the purchases has been returned and therefore the information will be used to record information in the purchases return journals, while if issued then it means the part of sales has been returned by the customers and therefore used to record the information in the sales return journals/diaries

 

  • Debit note: – a document used to correct an undercharge that may have taken place to inform the debtor to pay more. It therefore acts as an additional invoice

 

  • Payment voucher: – a document used where it is not possible to get a receipt for the cash/cheque that has been received or issued. The person being paid must sign on it to make it authentic. It is therefore used to record information just as receipts

 

Books of original entries/Journals/Diaries/day’s books/Subsidiary books

These are books where the transactions are listed when they first occur, with their entries being made on a daily basis before they are posted to their respective ledger accounts. The information in the source documents are used to make entries in these books. The books of original entries include:

  • Sales journals
  • Sales return journals/Return inwards journals
  • Purchases journals/creditors journals/bought journals
  • Purchases return journals/return outwards journal
  • Cash receipt journals
  • Cash payment/cash disbursement journals
  • Three column cash book
  • The petty cash book
  • Analysis cash book
  • General journals/journal proper

 

  • Sales journals

This is used to record credit sales of goods before they can be recorded in their various ledgers. The information obtained in the outgoing invoice/invoice issued is used to record the information in this journal as the source document

The overall total in the sales journal is therefore posted in the sales account in the general ledger on credit side and debtors account in the sales ledger as a debit entry

Sales journal

Date Particulars/details Invoice no Ledger folio amount
         

 

Example:

The following information relates to Tirop traders for the month of June 2010

June   1: Sold goods to wafula on credit of ksh 200, invoice no 0114

2: Sold to the following debtors on credit; Wanjiru ksh 400, Musyoka ksh 300,    Wafula ksh 300

5: sold goods on credit to Wanjiru of ksh 300

10: Sold goods to the following on credit Kanini ksh 100, Wafula ksh 500, Wanjiru ksh 600

12: Sold goods on credit to musyoka of ksh 350

Required:

Prepare the relevant day book for the above transactions; hence post the various amounts to their respective individual accounts

Sales journal

Date Particulars/details Invoice no Ledger folio amount
June 2010:

1

2

2

2

5

10

10

10

12

15

 

Wafula

Wanjiru

Musyoka

Wafula

Wanjiru

Wanjiru

Wafula

Kanini

Musyoka

Totals posted to the sales account (Cr)

 

0114

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

SL

SL

SL

SL

SL

SL

SL

SL

SL

 

GL

 

200

400

300

300

300

600

500

100

350

 

3050

 

(Post the rest to their individual debtors account)

 

  • Sales Return Journals/Return inwards journals

This is for recording the goods that the customers/debtors have returned to the business. It uses the information in the credit note issued as a source document to prepare it. The information is therefore recorded to the return inwards account in the general ledger, while the individual’s entries are reflected (credited) also in their respective debtors account for double entry to be completed. It takes the following format

Sales return journal

Date Particulars/details Credit note no Ledger folio amount
         

 

For example;

Record the following transaction for the 2007 in their relevant diaries, hence post them to their respective ledger accounts;

May 1: goods that had been sold to M Okondo of shs 2600 on credit was returned to the business

“   2: G. Otuya returned good worth shs 1320 that was sold to him on credit to the business

“    8: the following returned goods that had been sent to them on credit to the business H Wati shs 3500, Muya shs 4700 M Okondo shs 2900

“    12: G Otuya returned goods worth shs 5400 that were sold on credit to the business

“  30: Goods worth sh 8900 that had been sold on credit to G Otuya were returned to the business

Sales Return journal

Date Particulars/details Credit note no Ledger folio amount
May 2007:

1

2

8

8

8

12

30

 

M Okondo

G Otuya

H Wati

Muya

M Okondo

G Otuya

G Otuya

Totals posted to Return Inwards a/c (Dr)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

S.L

S.L

S.L

S.L

S.L

S.L

S.L

 

GL

 

2600

1320

3500

4700

2900

5400

8900

 

29320

 

(Post the entries to the individual ledger a/c’s (Cr))

 

  • Purchases Journal

This is used to record the credit purchase of goods. The totals are then debited in the purchases account in the general ledger, while the individual’s creditors accounts are credited. It used the invoices received/incoming invoices as it source document. It takes the following format;

Purchases journal

Date Particulars/details Invoice no Ledger folio amount
         

 

For example

The following information relates to Mikwa Traders for the month of April 2011. Record them in their relevant day’s book, hence post the entries to their relevant ledger accounts.

April 2011;

“ 2.  Bought goods worth shs 25 000 on credit from Juma, Invoice no 3502

  1.   Bought goods worth shs 16 500 from kamau on credit, invoice no 2607
  2.   Bought goods worth shs 12 700 from Juma on credit, invoice no 3509
  3. Purchased goods of shs 25 200 from juma, invoice no 3605; shs 17 500 from Kamau, invoice no 3700; shs 45 000 from Wamae wholesalers, invoice no 3750
  4. Purchased goods of shs 9 200 from Wamae wholesalers on credit, invoice no 3762
  5. Bought goods of shs 17 000 from Kamau on credit, invoice no 3802
  6. Purchased goods of shs 36 000 from Juma suppliers on credit, Invoice no 3812

 

Purchases Day book

Date Particulars/details Invoice no Ledger folio amount
April 2011:

2

3

6

8

8

8

15

18

24

 

 

Juma

Kamau

Juma

Juma

Kamau

Wamae

Wamae

Kamau

Juma

Totals posted to the Purchase account (Dr)

 

3502

2607

3509

3605

3700

3750

3762

3802

3812

 

 

 

PL

PL

PL

PL

PL

PL

PL

PL

PL

 

GL

 

25 000

16 500

12 700

25 200

17 500

45 000

9 200

17 000

36 000

 

204100

 

(Post the individual entries to their relevant accounts in the ledger (crediting))

 

  • Purchases Return Journals/Return outwards Journals

This is used to record goods that have been returned to the creditors by the business, reducing the value of the goods that had been purchased. It uses the credit note received as the source documents, with the totals being in the purchases return account while the individual creditor’s accounts are debited in their respective ledger accounts. It takes the following format

Purchases return journal

Date Particulars/details Credit note no Ledger folio amount
         

 

For example;

Record the following transaction in the purchases return day book for Njiru’s traders for the month of June 2010, hence post the information into their relevant ledger accounts.

June 2010;

“ 3. Returned goods worth shs 400 that had been bought from Nairobi stores, credit note no 56

“ 8. Return goods of shs 1 200 to Matayos store, Credit no 148

“19. Had some of their purchases returned to the following; Njoka enterprises shs 700, credit note no 205, Nairobi Stores shs 600, credit note no 58, Matayos store shs 1 000 credit note no 191

“26. Returned goods worth shs 1 800 to Njoka enterprise credit note no 210

“30. Return goods worth shs 1 020 to Matayos store, credit note no 200

 

  • Cash receipt Diaries

This is used to record all the cash and cheques that have been received in the business. They may be many that posting directly in the cash book may be tedious and are therefore first recorded here. It totals are posted to the cash and bank accounts in the general ledger (Dr), while the individual accounts are credited in their respective accounts in the ledger. It uses the cash receipt issued and bank slips received as the source documents. It takes the following format;

Cash receipt journal

Date Particulars/details Receipt no Ledger folio Disc allowed cash bank
             

 

 

 

 

  • Cash payment Journals

This is used to record cash and cheques that have been issued to the creditors/out of the business. Its totals are credited (Cr) in the cash and bank account and the individual accounts are debited (Dr) in their respective accounts It uses the cash receipt received and bank slips issued as the source documents. It takes the following format;

Cash Payment journal

Date Particulars/details Receipt no Ledger folio Disc received cash bank
             

 

For example:

Record the following transactions into their relevant day books of Onyango traders, hence post the entries to their respective ledger accounts and balance them off;

May 2011:

“1. Cash sales amounting to ksh 3 000, receipt no 0112

“2. Paid the following creditors by cheque after having deducted a cash  discount of 10% in each case; H. Mwangi ksh 1 500, J. Mwaniki ksh 1 600, N. Mugo ksh 1 200

“3. Receive the following Chaques from debtors in settlement of their debts after having deducted 5% cash discount in each case; Lucy kshs 22 800 cheque no 0115, Otieno kshs 8 550 cheque no 0011, Martha ksh 1 330 cheque no 0016

“5. Paid for repairs in cash kshs 16 000, receipt no 0251

“10. Paid Juma in cash kshs 9 500, receipt no 0295

“14. Cash sales kshs 17 000, receipt no 02714

“15. Banked kshs 6 000 from the cash till

“15. Received cash from Mary of kshs 13 500, receipt no 0258

“16. Cash sales of kshs 26 400 was directly banked, bank slip no 40152

“20. Cash purchases of kshs 8 920, receipt no 117

“22. Cash purchases of kshs 15 200 was paid for by a cheque, cheque no 512

 

Cash receipt journal

Date Particulars/details Document no Ledger folio Disc allowed cash bank
May 2011

1

3

3

3

14

15

15

16

 

 

Sales

Lucy

Otieno

Martha

Sales

Cash

Mary

Sales

 

Totals to be posted to the cash and bank a/c (Dr)

 

0112

0115

0011

0016

02714

 

0258

40152

 

GL

SL

SL

SL

GL

“c”

SL

GL

 

 

1200

450

700

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2 350

 

3 000

 

 

 

17 000

 

13 500

 

 

 

 

33 500

 

 

22 800

8 550

1 330

 

6 000

 

26 400

 

 

 

65 080

 

(Post the totals and the entries to their respective accounts)

Cash Payment journal

Date Particulars/details Document no Ledger folio Disc Received cash bank
May 2011

2

2

2

5

10

15

20

22

 

 

H. Mwangi

J. Mwaniki

N. Mugo

Repairs

Juma

Bank

Purchases

Purchases

 

Totals to be posted to the cash and bank a/c (Cr)

 

 

 

 

0251

0295

 

117

512

 

PL

PL

PL

GL

PL

“c”

GL

GL

 

166.70

177.70

133.30

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

477.30

 

 

 

 

16 000

9 500

6 000

8 920

 

 

 

 

40 420

 

1 500

1 600

1 200

 

 

 

 

15 200

 

 

 

19 500

 

(Post the totals and the entries to their respective accounts)

 

  • The petty Cash book

This is used to record money that has been set aside to make payments that does not require large amounts, such as cleaning, staff tea, posting letters, etc. it is always kept by the petty cashier, under the supervision of the main cashier. The amount received by the petty cashier is always debited, while the payments made from the same is credited. The credit side also contains the analytical columns for various items of expenditure. The amount credited is also extended to the analysis column for the specific item. At the end of the stated period, the petty cash book is balanced, and the totals are posted to their individual accounts. The individual’s accounts are debited with the totals of the analytical columns, while the cash account is credited by the main cashier for the total that was spent in the petty cash book.

Petty cash book can also be operated on an imprest system, where the petty cashier receives a given amount of money at an intervals (imprest) to spend, and report back to the main cashier at the end of the period on how the money has been spent and the balance still remaining for re-stocking (reimbursed), and only the amount spent can be reimbursed so that at the beginning of the period the petty cashier will always have the full amount (cash float).

 

For example:

A petty cashier of sina chuki traders operate a petty cash book on an imprest of kshs 2 500 on a monthly basis. On 1st February 2010, she had cash in hand of shs 150 and was reimbursed the difference by the main cashier to restore her cash float. The following payments were made during the month of February 2010

Feb; 1. Travelling expenses kshs110

  1. Correcting fluid kshs 200
  2. Sugar for staff tea ksh 180
  3. Stamps kshs 255
  4. Telephone kshs 255
  5. Entertainment kshs 130
  6. Postage stamps kshs 100
  7. Bread for staff tea kshs 148
  8. Fare kshs 200
  9. Duplicating ink kshs 250
  10. Entertainment kshs 400
  11. Telephone kshs 100
  12. Atieno a creditor was paid ksh 150

Required;

Prepare a petty cash book from the above information and post the totals to the relevant ledger accounts.

Sina Chuki Traders

Petty Cash Book

For month of Feb. 2010

Receipt sh L.F Date Details Vouch no Total sh Travel exp Office exp Staff tea postage Telephone Ent. Ledger a/c
 

150

2 350

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2500

22

 

 

C.B

2010

Feb 1

1

1

2

3

4

10

15

18

20

25

26

27

28

28

 

Bal b/d

Reimbursement

Travelling exp

Correcting fluid

Sugar

Stamps

Telephone

Entertainment

Stamps

Bread

Fare

Duplicating ink

Entertainment

Telephone

Atieno

Totals

Bal c/d

 

Bal b/d

   

 

 

110

200

180

255

255

130

100

148

200

250

400

100

150

2478

22

2500

 

 

 

110

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

200

 

 

 

 

310

 

 

 

 

200

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

250

 

 

 

450

 

 

 

 

 

180

 

 

 

 

148

 

 

 

 

 

328

 

 

 

 

 

 

255

 

 

100

 

 

 

 

 

 

355

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

255

 

 

 

 

 

 

100

 

355

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

130

 

 

 

 

400

 

 

530

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

150

150

 

The totals in the analytical columns are Debited in the individual accounts, with the petty cash book totals being credited in the cash account.

 

  • The general Journal/Journal proper

This one is used to record purchases or sales of fixed assets of the business on credit. These assets do not form part of the stock since the business does not deal in them, however the business may decide to buy or sell them for one reason or the other.

In this journal, the account to be debited begins at the margin, while the account to be credited is indented from the margin, with a narration below them put in brackets. The narration simply explains the nature of the transaction that has taken place. The individual entries are then posted to their respective accounts by either debiting or crediting depending on the transactions. It takes the following format;

 

General journal

Date Particulars/details Ledger folio Dr shs Cr shs
         

 

For example;

Journalise then following transactions which took place in the business of J Opuche during the month of March 2005

March 5; Purchased office furniture on credit for shs 25 000 from miugiza Furniture Limited

10; Sold old duplicating machine for shs 15 000 to samba academy on credit

15; Bought a new motor vehicle for shs 800 000 from explo motors Ltd, paying shs 300 000 in cash and balance was to be settled at a later date

18; Sold old vehicle to Mara Secondary school for shs 500 000 on credit

25;The owner converted personal electronic calculator valued at shs 9 000 into business asset

27; Sold old computers valued at shs 20 000 for shs 15 000 on credit to Mara secondary school

30; Sold old dining chairs worth shs 10 000 to Maendeleo for shs 15 000 on credit

 

General journal

Date Particulars/details Ledger folio Dr shs Cr shs
March 2005

5

 

 

 

10

 

 

 

 

15

 

 

 

 

18

 

 

 

25

 

 

 

27

 

 

 

 

30

 

 

 

Office Furniture a/c

Miugiza a/c

(Being a credit purchase of office furniture from Miugiza)

Samba Accademy a/c

Duplicating Machine a/c

(Being credit sales of duplicating machine to Samba academy)

Motor vehicle a/c

Cash a/c

Explo Motors a/c

(Being purchase of motor vehicle from explo. motors, paying part in cash and part on credit)

Mara Sec sch a/c

Motor vehicle a/c

(being the credit sale of old motor vehicle to mara sec sch)

Calculators a/c

Capital a/c

(being conversion of private calculator to business asset)

Mara Sec. Sch. a/c

Loss on disposal a/c

Computer a/c

(being credit sale of old computers to Mara school at a loss of 5 000)

Maendeleo a/c

Furniture a/c

Gain on disposal a/c

(being the credit sale of dining chairs to maendeleo at a gain of 5 000)

 

 

 

 

 

 

25 000

 

 

 

15 000

 

 

 

 

800 000

 

 

 

 

500 000

 

 

 

9 000

 

 

 

15 000

5 000

 

 

 

15 000

 

 

 

 

 

1 384 000

 

 

 

25 000

 

 

 

15 000

 

 

 

 

300 000

500 000

 

 

 

500 000

 

 

 

9 000

 

 

 

 

20 000

 

 

 

10 000

5 000

 

 

 

1 384 000

 

The entries are then transferred to their respective accounts in the ledger, with the ones debited in the journals being debited and the ones credited being credited.

The Journal proper can also be used to show the opening entries and the closing entries. That is;

  • Opening entries

The opening entries are the entries of the assets and liabilities at the beginning of the trading periods to facilitate the opening of different accounts for them. They are the balance b/d for the assets and liabilities of the business.

The assets to be debited are recorded first, followed by the liabilities and capital to be credited. Incase the capital is not given, it can be calculated using the book keeping equation, that is A = C + L. the narration then follows the entries.

The opening entries are necessary when;

  • A business that did not keep complete accounting records would like to start keeping
  • Opening up new sets of accounting books, after closing the old ones
  • Starting accounting records for a business which has been bought, though was in full operation

For example;

The following balances were extracted from Martine’s store that did not keep complete records, and would like to start keeping on 1st January 2011. Prepare for them their relevant subsidiary book to show the balances.

Shs

Motor vehicles                               230 000

Machinery                                                        40 000

Creditors                                                           10 000

Debtors                                                                5 000

Cash in hand                                                    20 000

Stock                                                                  10 000

Insurance prepaid                                             5 000

Bank                                                                   25 000

Premises                                                          335 000

Capital                                               660 000

Martine’s Store

General journal

On 1st January 2011

Date Particulars/details Ledger folio Dr shs Cr shs
2011 January 1 Premises

Motor vehicle

Machinery

Debtors

Cash

Insurance prepaid

Bank

Stock

Capital

Creditors

(being the records of assets, liability and capital at the beginning of new period)

 

 

  335 000

230 000

40 000

5 000

20 000

5 000

25 000

10 000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

670 000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

660 000

10 000

 

 

 

 

 

670 000

 

 

 

  • Closing entries

At the end of the trading period the business asses how it carried out its trade and the amount of profit it made by preparing the Trading profit and loss account and the balance sheet to show its financial position. These are prepared by the information obtained from the ledgers. That is, all the nominal accounts (sale, purchase, expenses and revenue accounts), both opening and closing stocks are transferred to the trading profit and loss account through the trial balance and general journals, while the rest are taken to the balance sheet.

 

Uses of general journal;

  • To record purchases of fixed assets on credit
  • To record sales of fixed assets on credit
  • To correct errors by checking the balances
  • To record the opening and closing entries
  • To write off bad debts
  • To record the inter ledger transfers
  • To issues shares and debentures in companies
  • To make end of the year adjustments for the final accounts

 

In the table below, indicate the books of original entry that the information obtained from the given source documents are used to prepare

 

Source Document Books of Original entry
Sales Invoice/invoice issued/Invoice retained/invoice copy Sales journals
Purchases Invoice/Invoice received/Original invoice Purchases journals
Credit note issued/Credit note retained/Credit note copy Return inwards/Sales return journals
Credit note received/credit note original Return outwards/purchases return journals
Original receipt/Receipt received Cash payment/Analysis cash book/ Cash book
Receipt copy/Retained receipt Cash receipt journal/Analysis cash book/cash book
Petty cash voucher Petty cash book

 

Uses of Journals

  • To relive ledger of many details
  • To record more details about the transaction that are not found in the ledger
  • To facilitate tracing of errors
  • To facilitate the preparation of control accounts
  • To curb frauds and promote efficiency, since they are prepared by different people from the ones handling ledgers

 

Assignment:

(Exercise 1B pages 50 and 51, Nos16 and 18 in Inventor book 4, KLB Students book)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

These are prepared at the end of a given trading period to determine the profit and losses of the business, and also to show the financial position of the business at a given time.

They includes; trading account, profit and loss account, trading profit and loss account and the balance sheet.

They are also referred to as the final statements.

The trading period is the duration through which the trading activities are carried out in the business before it decides to determines it performances in terms of profit or loss. It may be one week, month, six months or even a year depending on what the owner wants.

Most of the business use one year as their trading period. It is also referred to as the accounting period.

At the end of the accounting period, the following takes place;

  • All the accounts are balanced off
  • A trial balance is extracted
  • Profit or loss is determined
  • The balance sheet is prepared

 

Determining the profit or loss of a business

When a business sells its stock above the buying price/cost of acquiring the stock, it makes a profit, while if it sells below it makes a loss. The profit realized when the business sell it stock beyond the cost is what is referred to as the gross profit, while if it is a loss then it is referred to as a gross loss.

It is referred to as the gross profit /loss because it has not been used to cater for the expenses that may have been incurred in selling that stock, such as the salary of the salesman, rent for the premises, water bills, etc. it therefore implies that the businessman cannot take the whole gross profit for its personal use but must first deduct the total cost of all other expenses that may have been incurred.

The profit realized after the cost of all the expenses incurred has been deducted is what becomes the real profit for the owner of the business, and is referred to as Net profit. The net profit can be determined through calculation or preparation of profit and loss account.

In calculating the gross profit, the following adjustments are put in place

  • Return inwards/Sales return: – these are goods that had been sold to the customers, but they have returned them to the business for one reason or the other. It therefore reduces the value of sales, and is therefore subtracted from sales to obtain the net sales

Therefore Net sales = Sales – Return inwards

  • Return outwards/purchases return: – these are goods that had been bought from the suppliers to the business and have been returned to them for one reason or the other. It reduces the purchases and is therefore subtracted from the purchases to obtain the net purchases.
  • Drawings: – this refers to goods that the owner of the business has taken from the business for his own use. It reduces the value of purchases, and is therefore subtracted from purchases when determining the net purchases. It is different from the other drawing in that it is purely goods and not money
  • Carriage inwards/Carriage on purchases: – this is the cost incurred by the suppliers in transporting the goods from his premises to the customers business. It is treated as part of the purchases, and therefore increases the value of purchases. It is added to purchases to determine the actual value of purchases/Net purchases.

 

Therefore Net Purchases = Purchases + Carriage inwards – Return Outwards – Drawings

 

  • Carriage outwards/Carriage on sales: – this is the cost that the business has incurred in transporting goods from its premises to the customers premises. The cost reduces the business profit that would have been realized as a result of the sale, and is therefore treated as an expense and is subtracted from the gross profit, before determining the net profit.
  • Opening stock is the stock of goods at the beginning of the trading period, while the closing stock is the stock of the goods at the end of the trading period

Gross profit is therefore calculated as follows;

Gross Profit = Sales – Return inwards – (Opening stock + Purchases + carriage inwards – Return outwards – Closing stock)

        Or

        Gross profit = Net sales – Cost of Goods Sold (COGS)

 

        COGS = Opening Stock + Net Purchases – Closing stock

 

Net Profit = Gross profit – Total expenses

 

 

 

Trading Account

This is prepared by the business to determine the gross profit/loss during that trading period

It takes the following format;

Name of the business

Trading Account

Dr                                                                 For the period (date)                                                        Cr

                                       Shs                 Shs

Opening stock                                    xxxxxx

add Purchases              xxxxx

add Carriage inwards      xxx

less Return Outwards      xxx

less Drawings                   xx            xxxxx

Goods available for sale                    xxxxxx

Less Closing Stock                                 xxx

Cost Of Goods Sold (COGS)             xxxxxx

Gross profit c/d                                    xxxx

xxxxxx

 

                                   Shs                    Shs

Sales                             xxxxxx

Less Return inwards          xxx

Net sales                                          xxxxxx

 

 

 

 

 

 

xxxxxx

Gross profit b/d                           xxxx

 

The trading account is completed by the time the gross profit b/d is determined

For example

The following balances were obtained from the books of Ramera Traders for the year ending may 31st 2010

Sales                                                                 670 000

Purchases                                                        380 000

Return inwards                                              40 000

Carriage outwards                                          18 000

Return outwards                                                           20 000

Carriage inwards                                                           10 000

Additional information;

  • During the year the owner took goods worth sh 5 000 for his family use
  • The stock as at 1st June 2009 was shs 60 000, while the stock as at 31st May 2011 was shs 70 000

Required; Prepare Ramera Traders trading account for the period ending 31st May

2010

Ramera Traders

Trading Account

Dr                                                                 For the period ending 31/5/2010                                               cr

                                       Shs                 Shs

Opening stock                                     60 000

add Purchases              380 000

add Carriage inwards     10 000

less Return Outwards     20 000

less Drawings                   5 000        365 000

Goods available for sale              425 000

Less Closing Stock                          70 000

Cost Of Goods Sold (COGS)         355,000

Gross profit c/d                             275,000

630,000

 

                                   Shs                    Shs

Sales                             670 000

Less Return inwards      40 000

Net sales                                         630 000

 

 

 

 

 

 

630 000

Gross profit b/d                             275 000

NB:Carriage outwards is not an item of Trading account, but profit and loss account as an expense.

Importance of Trading account

  • It is used to determine the gross profit/loss for a given trading period for appropriate decision making by the management.
  • It is used in determining the cost of goods that was sold during that particular accounting period.
  • It is used to reveal the volume of turnover i.e net sales
  • May be used to compare the performance of the business in the current accounting period and the previous periods. It can also compare its performance with other similar businesses
  • It facilitates the preparation of profit and loss account, since the gross profit is carried forward to the profit and loss account.

Profit and Loss account

In preparation of this account, the gross profit is brought down on the credit sides, with all other revenues/income of the business being credited and the expenses together with the net profit being debited. Net profit = Total Revenues (including Gross Profit) – Total expenses

Name of the business

Profit and Loss Account

Dr                                                                 For the period (date)                                                        Cr

                                                           Shs

Expenses                                   

Insurance                                            xxx

Electricity                                          xxx

Water bills                                         xxx

Carriage Outwards                            xxx

General expenses                               xxx

Provision for Depreciation                xxxx

Discount allowed                               xxx

Commission allowed                        xxxx

Rent paid                                          xxxx

Any other expense                           xxxx

Net profit c/d                                   xxxx

xxxxxx

 

                                                        Shs

Gross profit b/d                                 xxxxxx

Discount received                                  xxx

Rent income                                          xxx

Commission received                            xxx

Any other income received                    xxx

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

xxxxxx

Net profit b/d                                     xxxx

The Profit and Loss Account is complete when net profit b/d is obtained. In the trial balance, the revenues/incomes are always credited, while the expenses are debited, and the same treatment is found in the Profit and Loss Account. (Any item that is taken to the Profit and Loss Account with a balance appearing in the Debit (Dr) side of a trial balance is treated as an expense, while those appearing in the Credit (Cr) side are revenue e.g. discount balance appearing in the Dr Side is Discount Allowed, while the one on Cr side is Discount Received)

For example

The following information relates to Akinyi’s Traders for the period ending March 28th 2010. Use it to prepare profit and loss account.

Gross profit                                                    100 000                Discount received           12 000

Salaries and wages                         20 000                  Power and lighting              10 000

Opening stock                                150 000                Rent income                   10 000

 

Commission allowed                       15 000                Commission received    16 000

Repairs                                                10 000                Discount allowed                           8 000

Provision for depreciation                          6 000                    Carriage outwards          4 000

 

Akinyi Traders

Profit and Loss Account

Dr                                                 For the period ending 28th March 2010                                        Cr

                                                           Shs

Expenses                                   

Power and lighting                      10 000

Carriage Outwards                       4 000

Salaries and wages                      20 000

Provision for Depreciation          6 000

Discount allowed                          8 000

Commission allowed                  15 000

Repairs                                        10 000

Net profit c/d                               65 000

138 000

 

                                                Shs

Gross profit b/d                         100 000

Discount received                       12 000

Rent income                                10 000

Commission received                  16 000

 

 

 

 

 

138 000

Net profit b/d                                      65 000

Incase the expenses are more than the income, then the business shall have made a net loss, and the loss will be credited.

 

Net profit/loss can also be found through calculation as follows;

 

Net profit/loss = Gross profit + Total other revenues – Total expenses

 

For the above example;

Total other revenues = 12 000 + 10 000 + 16 000

= 38 000

Total expenses = 10 000 + 4 000 + 20 000 + 6 000 + 8 000 + 15 000 + 10 000

= 73 000

Therefore; Net profit = Gross profit + Total other revenues – Total expenses

= 100 000 + 38 000 – 73 000

= 65 000

Importance of Profit and Loss account

  • It shows the revenue earned, and all the expenses incurred during the accounting period
  • It used to determine the net profit/net loss of a given trading period
  • It is a requirement by the government for the purpose of taxation
  • May be used by the employees to gauge the strength of the business, in terms of its ability to pay them well
  • It is vital for the prospective investor in the business, in terms of determining the viability of the business
  • The creditors or loaners may use it to asses the business ability to pay back their debts
  • It is used by the management to make a decision on the future of their business.

 

Trading, Profit and Loss Account

This is the combination of trading account and trading profit and loss account to form a single document. It ends when the net profit/loss brought down has been determined. That is;

Name of the business

Trading, Profit and Loss Account

Dr                                  For the period (date)                                        Cr

                                       Shs                 Shs

Opening stock                                   xxxxxx

add Purchases              xxxxx

add Carriage inwards      xxx

less Return Outwards      xxx

less Drawings                   xx            xxxxx

Goods available for sale                  xxxxxx

Less Closing Stock                                 xxx

Cost Of Goods Sold (COGS)            xxxxxx

Gross profit c/d                                      xxxx

Xxxxxx

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Expenses

Insurance                                                xxx

Electricity                                                xxx

Water bills                                             xxx

Carriage Outwards                                 xxx

General expenses                                     xxx

Provision for Depreciation                   xxxx

Discount allowed                                     xxx

Commission allowed                            xxxx

Rent paid                                               xxxx

Any other expense                                 xxxx

Net profit c/d                                        xxxx

xxxxxx

 

                                   Shs                    Shs

Sales                             xxxxxx

Less Return inwards       xxx

Net sales                                         xxxxxx

 

 

 

 

 

 

xxxxxx

Gross profit b/d                                     xxxx

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Discount received                                  xxx

Rent income                                          xxx

Commission received                            xxx

Any other income received                    xxx

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

xxxxxx

Net profit b/d                                       xxxx

End Year Adjustments

The following items may require to be adjusted at the end of the trading period

  • Revenues/Income
  • Expenses
  • Fixed assets

 

 

Adjustment on revenues

The revenue may have been paid in advance in part or whole (prepaid revenue) or may be paid later after the trading period (accrued revenue).

Prepaid revenue is subtracted from the revenue/income to be received and the difference is what is treated in the profit and loss account or trading profit and loss account as an income, while the accrued revenue is added to the revenue/income to be received and the sum is what is treated in the above accounts as the actual revenue.

Only the prepaid amount and the accrued amounts are what are then taken to the balance sheet.

Adjustment on the expenses

The expenses may have been paid for in advance in part or whole (prepaid expenses) or may be paid for later after the trading period (accrued expenses).

Prepaid expenses is subtracted from the expenses to be paid for and the difference is what is treated in the profit and loss account or trading profit and loss account as an expense, while the accrued expenses is added to the expenses to be paid for and the sum is what is treated in the above accounts as the actual expenses.

NB: Only the prepaid amount and the accrued amounts are what are then taken to the balance sheet.

 

Adjustment on fixed assets

The fixed assets may decrease in value, due to tear and wear. This makes the value to go down over time, what is referred to as depreciation. The amount of depreciation is always estimated as a percentage of cost.

The amount that shall have depreciated is treated in the profit and loss account or T,P&L as an expense, while the value of the asset is recorded in the balance sheet, less depreciation.

For example;

  • 1997 The following Trial balance was prepared from the books of Paka Traders as at 31st December 1995. Trial balance December 31st 1995

Dr. (shs)                                           Cr. (shs)

 

Sales                                                                                               980,000

Purchases                                         600,000

Returns                                                            80,000                                 20 000

Carriage in                                                                                    40,000

Carriage out                                   3,000

Stock (Jan 1st 1999)                        120,000

Rent                                                  60,000                                 45 000

Discount                                          15,000                                  25 000

Motor vehicle                                 150 000

Machinery                                       250 000

Debtors                                                            120,000

Salaries                                                            18,000

Commission                                        7,000                                             12 000

Capital                                                                                            178,000

Insurance                                           15 000

Creditors                                                                                       240,000

Cash                                                   122 000

1 540 000                            1 540 000

 

Additional information

  • Stock as at 31st December was 100,000
  • the provision for depreciation was 10% on the cost of Motor vehicle, and 5% on the cost of Machinery

Required: Prepare trading profit and loss account for the period ending 31st December 1999

Adjustments: Provision for depreciation;

Machinery =  = 7 500

(New balance of machinery = 250 000 – 7 500 = 242 500. The 242 500 is taken to the balance as Machinery (fixed asset), while 7 500 is taken to the trading profit and loss account as expenses)

Motor vehicle =  = 15 000

(New balance of Motor Vehicle = 150 000 – 15 000 = 135 000. The 135 000 is taken to the balance as Motor Vehicle (fixed asset), while 15 000 is taken to the trading profit and loss account as expenses)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Paka Traders

Trading, Profit and Loss Account

Dr        For the period 31/12/1995                                         Cr

                                       Shs                 Shs

Opening stock                                   120 000

add Purchases              600 000

add Carriage inwards     40 000

less Return Outwards     20 000       620 000

Goods available for sale                    740 00

Less Closing Stock                           100 000

Cost Of Goods Sold (COGS)           640 000

Gross profit c/d                                 260 000

900 000

Expenses                                   

Insurance                                             15000

Carriage Outwards                              30000

Salaries                                               18 000

Provision for Depreciation

Motor vehicle             15 000

Machinery                    7 500             22500

Discount allowed                                15 000

Commission allowed                            7 000

Rent paid                                            60 000

Net profit c/d                                   174 500

342 000

 

                                   Shs                    Shs

Sales                           980 000

Less Return inwards      80 000

Net sales                                           900 000

 

 

 

 

 

900 000

Gross profit b/d                                260 000

Discount received                               25 000

Rent income                                       45 000

Commission received                         12 000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

342 000

 

Net profit b/d                                   174 500

The net profit/loss may be taken to the balance sheet.

The items that have been adjusted will be recorded in the balance sheet less the adjustment.

The Balance Sheet

The balance sheet will show the business financial position in relation to assets, capital and liabilities. The adjustment that can be made will be on Fixed assets and capital only. That is;

Fixed assets are recorded less their depreciation value (should there be provision for depreciation) as the actual value.

Actual value of assets = Old value – depreciation.

Capital is adjusted with the following; Net capital, Drawings and additional investment. i.e.

Closing Capital/Net capital (C.C) = Opening/initial capital (O.C) + Additional Investment (I) + Net profit (N.P) or (less Net Loss) – Drawings

                                      CC = OC + I + NP – D

Where:

Opening Capital: – the capital at the beginning of the trading period

Closing capital: – the capital as at the end of the trading period

Additional Investment: – any amount or asset that the owner adds to the business during the trading period

Net profit: – the profit obtained from the trading activities during the period. Incase of a loss, it is subtracted.

 

Types of Capital

The capital in the business can be classified as follows

  • Capital Owned/Owner’s Equity/Capital invested; – this is the capital that the owner of the business has contributed to the business. It is the Net capital/Closing capital of the business (C = A – L)
  • Borrowed capital: – the resources brought into the business from the outside sources. They are the long term liabilities of the business.
  • Working capital: – these are resources in the business that can be used to meet the immediate obligation of the business. It is the difference between the total current assets and total current liabilities

Working Capital = Total Current Assets – Total Current Liabilities

  • Capital employed: – these are the resources that has been put in the business for a long term. i.e.

Capital Employed = Total Fixed assets + Working Capital

Or

Capital employed = Capital Invested + Long term liabilities

 

 

 

 

Name of the business

Balance Sheet

As at (date)

                              Shs                  shs

Fixed Assets

Land                              xxxxx

Buildings                        xxxxx

Motor Vehicle                xxxxx

Any other fixed assets   xxxxx   xxxxxx

Current Assets

Stock                               xxxx

Debtors                            xxxx

Bank                                 xxxx

Cash                                 xxxx

Prepaid Expenses            xxxx

Accrued revenues            xxxx

Any other current assets  xxxx   xxxxxx

 

 

xxxxxx

                                     Shs               shs

 

Capital                        xxxxx

Add Net profit               xxxx

Add additional investt    xxx

Less drawings               xxx

Net Capital                                 xxxxx

Long term liabilities

Long term loan            xxxx

Any other                     xxxx       xxxx

Current liabilities

Creditors                      xxxx

Short term loan            xxxx

Accrued expenses       xxxx

Prepaid revenues        xxxx

Any other                     xxxx        xxxxx

xxxxxx

Example 00A: The following information were extracted from the trial balance of Mwema traders on 31st December 2010

Sales                                   750 000                Furniture                           288 000

Purchases                          540 000                Electricity expenses       16 000

Sales return                                     24 000                  Motor vehicle                  720 000

Return outwards                              30 000                Rent expenses                  2 500

General expenses                             72 000                Capital                                842 500

Commission received      24 000                Bank Loan                         250 000

Cash                                   156 000                 Creditors                           216 000

Debtors                              244 000

Additional Information

  • Stock as at 31/12/2010 was ksh 72 000
  • Electricity prepaid was shs 4 000
  • Rent expenses accrued shs 3500
  • Depreciation was provided for as follows

-Motor Vehicle 15% p.a. on cost               -Furniture 6% p.a. on cost

Required

  • Prepare Trading, profit and loss account for the year
  • Prepare a balance sheet as at 31st December 2012
  • Determine the following:

-Owner’s equity       -Borrowed capital   -Working capital   -Capital employed

Adjustments:

Motor Vehicle =  = 108 000

Therefore Motor vehicle = 612 000

Furniture =  = 17 280

Therefore furniture = 270 720

Mwema Traders

Trading, Profit and Loss Account

Dr                                                             For the period 31/12/2010                                                    Cr

                                       Shs                 Shs

Purchases                     540 000

less Return Outwards     30 000       510 000

Goods available for sale                   510 000

Less Closing Stock                             72 000

Cost Of Goods Sold (COGS)           438 000

Gross profit c/d                                 288 000

726 000

Expenses                               

General expenses                               72 000

Electricity expenses      16 000

Less Electricity prepaid  4 000          12 000

 

Rent expenses               2 500

Accrued rent exp           3 500            6 000

 

Provision for Depreciation

Motor vehicle             108 000

Furniture                      17 280         125 280

Net profit c/d                                     96 720

312 000

 

                                   Shs                    Shs

Sales                           750 000

Less Return inwards      24 000

Net sales                                           726 000

 

 

 

726 000

Gross profit b/d                                288 000

Commission received                        24 000

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

312 000

Net profit b/d                                     96 720

 

Mwema Traders

Balance Sheet

As at 31/12/2010

                                   Shs                 shs

Fixed Assets

Motor Vehicle          612 000

Furniture                  270 720     882 720

 

Current Assets

Stock                          72 000

Debtors                    244 000

Electricity prepaid       4 000

Bank                          50 000

Cash                        156 000     526 000

 

1 408 720

                                     Shs               shs

Capital                      842 500

Add Net profit             96 720

Net Capital                                939 220

 

Long term liabilities

Bank Loan                               250 000

 

Current liabilities

Creditors                216 000

Accrued rent          3 500          219 500

 

1 408 720

 

 

 

Basic Financial Ratios

A ratio is an expression of one item in relation to the other. It is used to compare the groups of related items in the business, for the purpose of assessing the performance of the business. They include:

  • Mark-up

This is the comparison of gross profit as a percentage of cost of goods sold. i.e.

 

Mark-up =

=   100

For example: in (example OOA) above, determine the mark-up of the business.

Mark-up =

Gross profit = 288 000

COGS = 438 000

 

Mark-up =   100

= 65.75%

(This implies that the Gross profit of the business is 65.75% of its cost of goods sold)

 

  • Margin

This is the expression of the gross profit as a percentage of net sales. That is:

Margin =

=   100

For example: in (example OOA) above, determine the margin of the business

Margin =

Gross profit = 288 000

Net sales = 726 000

=   100

= 39.67%

(This implies that the gross profit of the business is 39.67% of the net sales)

 

 

 

Relationship between margin and mark-up

Since margin and mark-up are all the expression of Gross profit, it is possible to change one to the other.

  • Changing mark-up to margin

Mark-up can be changed to margin as follows:

  • Convert the mark-up percentage as a fraction in its simplest form.
  • Add the value of the numerator of the fraction to the denominator to come up with the new fraction (margin fraction) that is

If the mark-up fraction =

Margin fraction =

  • Convert the margin fraction as a percentage to obtain margin

 

 

 

For example: in the above example,

Mark –up = 65.75%

=

=

Margin fraction =

=   x 100

= 39.67%

 

  • Changing margin to mark-up
  • Convert the margin percentage as a fraction in its simplest form
  • Subtract the value of the numerator of the fraction from the denominator to come up with the new fraction (mark-up fraction) that is

If the margin fraction =

Mark-up fraction =

  • Convert the mark-up fraction as a percentage to obtain mark-up

For example: in the above example,

Margin = 39.67%

=

=

Mark-up fraction =

 

=   x 100

= 65.75%

  • Current ratio/working capital ratio

This is the ratio of the current assets to current liabilities. It can also be expressed as a percentage. That is:

Current ratio =

= current assets: current liabilities

Or

Current ratio =   x 100

For examples: in (example OOA) above, determine the current ratio;

 

Current assets = 526 000

Current liabilities = 219 500

Current ratio =

 

=          = 1052: 439

Or

=    x 100

239.64%

  • Rate of stock turnover

This is the rate at which the stock is bought or sold within a given period of time. It is obtained by;

Rate of stock turnover (ROST) =

 

Average stock =

In (example OOA) above, determine the rate of stock turnover;

The cost of goods sold = 438 000

The closing stock = 72 000

The opening stock = 0

Therefore

The average stock =

=   = 36 000

Rate of stock turnover (ROST) =

=

 

= 12.17 Times

  • Return on capital

This is the expression of net profit as a percentage of the capital invested. That is;

Return on capital =    x 100

It can be given as a ratio or a percentage.

For example: in (example OOA) above, determine the return on capital of the business

Net Profit = 96 720

Capital invested/owner’s equity = 939 220

Return on capital =    x 100

=    x 100

 

= 10.33%

 

 

  • Acid test ratio/quick ratio

This shows how fast the business can convert its current assets excluding stock to settle its current liabilities. That is;

Quick ratio =

It is given in ratio form.

For example: in above (example OOA), determine the quick ratio;

Current assets = 526 000

Stock = 72 000

Current liabilities = 219 500

Quick ratio =

=

= 2.07 (or 207 : 100)

 

Importance of Financial Ratios

  • Mark up and margin helps in the following; setting the selling price, calculating profit or losses and determining the sales for a given period of time
  • Working capital and acid test ratio help in showing whether the business is in a position to meet its short term obligations and checking whether the business is utilizing its resources properly. That is high working capital ratio shows that most of the resources are idle
  • Return on capital shows the following;
  • The performance of the business in relation to other similar businesses
  • Comparison of the performance of the business over different periods
  • Whether the business finances have been invested or not
  • Help the potential investors on the decision on where to invest

 

  • Rate of stock turnover also help in determining how fast or slow the stock is moving. It also helps in computing the gross profit or loss.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

MONEY AND BANKING

 

Barter trade

This is a form of trade where goods and services are exchanged for other goods and services.

 

Benefits

  • Satisfaction of wants: And individual is able to get what he or she needs.
  • Surplus disposal: an individual or country is able to dispose off its surpluses.
  • Social relations: it promotes social links since the communities trade together.
  • Specialization: some communities shall specialize in a particular commodity.
  • Improved living standards: this is enhanced by receiving what one is unable to produce.

Limitations of Barter trade

  • Lack of double coincidence of wants: – it is difficult to find two people with the need for each other’s product at the same time.
  • Lack of store of value/ perishability of some commodities: – some goods are perishable thus their value cannot be stored for a long time for future purposes e.g. one cannot store vegetables for exchange purposes in future.
  • Indivisibility of some commodities: -it is difficult to divide some products like livestock into smaller units to be exchanged with other commodities.
  • Lack of standard measure of value: – It is not easy to determine how much one commodity can be exchanged for a given quantity of another commodity.
  • Transportation problem: It is difficult to transport bulky goods especially when there is no faster means of transport.
  • Lack of a standard deferred payment: – The exchange of goods cannot be postponed since by the time the payment is made, there could be fluctuation in value, demand for a commodity may not exist and the nature and quality of a good may not be guaranteed. It may be therefore difficult what to decide what to accept for future payment.
  • Lack of specialization: – Everyone strives to produce all the goods he or she needs due to the problem of double coincidence of wants.
  • Lacks unit of account- it is difficult to assess the value of commodities and keep their record.

 

 

MONEY SYSTEM

Money is anything that is generally accepted and used as a medium of exchange for goods and services.

Features/ characteristics of Money

For anything to serve as money, it must have the following characteristics:

  • Acceptability: The item must be acceptable to everyone.
  • Durability: The material used to make money must be able to last long without getting torn, defaced or losing its shape or texture.
  • Divisibility: Money should be easily divisible into smaller units (denominations) but still maintains it value.
  • Cognizability: The material used to make money should be easily recognized. This helps reduce chances of forgery. It also helps people to differentiate between various denominations.
  • Homogeneity: Money should be made using a similar material so as to appear identical. This eliminates any risk of confusion and forgeries.
  • Portability: – Money should be easy to carry regardless of its value.
  • Stability in value: The value of money should remain fairly stable over a given time period.
  • Liquidity: – it should be easily convertible to other forms of wealth (assets).
  • Scarcity: – It should be limited in supply. If it is abundantly available its value will reduce.
  • Malleability- the material used to make money should be easy to cast into various shapes.
  • Not easy to forge- money should not be easy to imitate.

Functions of Money

  • Medium of exchange: It is generally acceptable by everyone in exchange of goods and services. It thus eliminates the need for double coincidence of wants.
  • Store of value: It is used to keep value of assets e.g. surplus goods can be sold and then money kept for future transactions.
  • Measure of value: Value of goods and services are expressed in money form. Performance of businesses is measured in terms of money.
  • Unit of account: It is a unit by which the value of goods and services are calculated and records kept.
  • Standard of deferred payment: it is used to settle credit transactions.
  • Transfer of immovable items (assets): Money is used to transfer assets such as land from one person to another.

 

DEMAND FOR MONEY

This is the tendency or desire by an individual or general public to hold onto money instead of spending it. It also refers to as liquidity preference.

Money is held by people in various forms:

  • Notes and coins
  • Securities and bonds
  • Demand deposits such bank current account balances.
  • Time deposits such as fixed account balances

 

REASONS (MOTIVES) FOR HOLDING MONEY

 

  1. Transaction Motive: Money is held with a motive of meeting daily expenses for both the firms and individuals. The demand for money for transaction purpose by individuals depends on the following factors:
  • Size/level of individual’s income: The higher the income of and individual, the more the number of transactions thus high demand for transactions.
  • Interval between pay days/ receipt of money: if the interval is long, then high amount of money will be held for transaction reasons.
  • Price of commodities: if the prices are high, the value of transactions will also increase thus more money balances required.
  • Individuals spending habits-people who spend a lot of money on luxuries will hold more money than those who only spend money on basics.
  • Availability of credit-people who have easy access to credit facilities hold little amount of money for daily transactions than those who do not have easy access to credit.

The transaction motive can further be divided to;

  • Income motive i.e. holding money to spend on personal/ family needs.
  • Business motive i.e. holding money to meet business recurring needs such as paying wages, postage, raw materials. Etc
  1. Precautionary Motive: Money is held in order to be used during emergencies such as sicknesses.

The amount of money held for this motive will depend on the factors such as:

  • Level of income- the higher the income the higher the amount of money held for precautionary motive.
  • Family status- high class families tend to hold more money for precautionary motive than low class families.
  • Age of the individual- the aged tend to hold more money for precautionary motive than the young since they have more uncertainties than the young.
  • Number of dependant- the more the dependants one has, the more the money they are likely to hold for precautionary motive.
  • Individual’s temperament- pessimists tend to hold more money for precautionary motives than the optimists because they normally think things will go wrong.
  • Duration between incomes- those who earn money after a short time are likely to keep less money than those who earn money after a long time.

 

  1. Speculative Motive: Money is held to be used in acquiring those assets whose values are prone to fluctuations such as shares/ money is held anticipating fall in prices of goods and services. This depends on the following:
  • The wealth of an individual
  • The rate of interest on government debt instruments
  • Interest on money balances held in the bank.
  • How optimistic or pessimistic a person is.

SUPPLY OF MONEY

This is the amount of money/ monetary items that are in circulation in the economy at a particular period of time. They include the following;

  • Total currency i.e. the coins and notes issued by the central bank.
  • Total demand deposits: money held in current accounts in banks and are therefore withdrawable on demand.

Factors influencing supply of money

  • Government policies: If there is more money in the economy, the government will put in place measures to reduce the supply such as increasing interest rates.
  • Policies of commercial banks: The more the loans offered by commercial banks, the more the amount of money in circulation.
  • Increase in national income: increase in national income means that more people will be liquid due to increase in economic activities.]
  • Increase in foreign exchange: The foreign exchange reserves will increase thus supply increases.

 

BANKING

This is the process by which banks accept deposit from the public for safe keeping and lending out the deposits in form of loans.

A bank is a financial institution that accepts money deposits from the public for safe keeping and lending out in terms of loans.

 

COMMERCIAL BANKS

These are financial institutions that offer banking services with a profit motive. Their activities are regulated by the Central bank.

Functions of commercial banks

  • Accepting deposits: They accept deposit from members of the public inform of current accounts, savings account and fixed deposit accounts. Such accounts help individuals to keep money safely.
  • Provision of safe means of payments: They provide safe and reliable means of payment such as cheques, bank drafts, credit transfers, electronic funds transfers etc.
  • Provision of loan facilities: They provide loans to members in form of short term and long term. These loans are repayable with interests thus income to the banks.
  • Facilitates foreign exchange payments: They provide foreign exchange that is used in international trade. They also make payments on behalf of their customers.
  • Provision of safe keeping of valuables: They provide security for valuables to their customers at a fee
  • Discounting bills of exchange: This is process by which a bank accepts bills of exchange and promissory notes from its customers in exchange of cash less than the face value of the bill or note.
  • Provision of financial information: – They advice their clients on financial matters affecting their businesses such as investment option and wise use of loans.
  • Money transfer:- They provide varied, safe and reliable means of money transfer. Such means include cheques, standing orders, credit transfers, bank drafts, letters of credit, credit cards, travelers cheques etc.
  • Act as guarantors and referees: – They act as guarantors to their customers who want to acquire credit facilities from other financial institutions.
  • Act as intermediaries: – They act as a link between the savers and borrowers.
  • Credit creation: – This is the process of creating money from the customer deposits through lending.
  • Provision of trusteeship: – They can manage a business on behalf of the client especially if the client does not have managerial skills. They can also manage the assets of the deceased client if there was no will.

 

TYPES OF ACCOUNTS OFFERED BY COMMERCIAL BANKS

  • Current account

This is an account where money deposited can be withdrawn on demand by the customer by means of a cheque. This means that money can be withdrawn at any time during the official working hours so long as the account has sufficient funds.

This account is also referred to as demand deposits.

Features characteristics of current accounts

  • Deposits of any amount can be made at any time.
  • Balances in this account do not earn any interest.
  • The account holder is not required to maintain a minimum cash balance in this account
  • Withdrawals can be at any time without giving and advance notice as long as the customer has sufficient funds.
  • Cheque books are issued to the account holder to be used as a means of payment/ cheques are usually used to withdraw money from the account.
  • Monthly bank statements are issued to the account holder.
  • Overdraft facilities are offered to the account holders’ i.e the bank can allow customers to withdraw more money than they have in their accounts.

 

Advantages of current account

  • No minimum balance is maintained hence the account holder can access all his/her money.
  • Withdrawals can be made at any time.
  • Transactions are made easier by use of cheques for example; one does not have to go to the bank in order to make payment.
  • Overdraft facilities are available..
  • It is possible to deposit any amount at any time during the office hours.
  • Use of cheques as means of payment serves as evidence of payments made.
  • Payments can be done even if there are insufficient funds in the account using post dated cheques.
  • The account holder can withdraw any amount at any time without notice as long as there are sufficient funds in the account.

Disadvantages of current account

  • Lengthy procedures of opening the account.
  • The account holder does not earn any income since the balances in the current account does not earn interest.
  • Initial deposit when opening the account is usually high hence discourages prospective customers.
  • Customers are not encouraged to save since they can access their money at any time.
  • Ledger fees are charged on the account making the operations of the account expensive.
  • Savings account (deposit account)

This is an account operated by individuals and firms that have money to save.

Features of Savings account

  • There is minimum initial deposit that varies from bank to bank.
  • A minimum balance is maintained at all times.
  • The withdrawals are up to a certain maximum within a given period. Withdrawal above this maximum will require notice.
  • Account holders are issued with a pass book or a debit card (ATM card) for deposits and withdrawals.
  • Overdraft facilities are not allowed.
  • Ordinarily, withdrawals across the counter can only be done by the account holder.
  • The balance on the account above a certain minimum earns some interest.

Advantages of Savings account

  • Customers are encouraged to save because of the restricted withdrawals.
  • There are relatively low banking charges.
  • Initial deposit is usually low as compared to other accounts.
  • The balances earn interest to account holder hence an incentive to save.
  • ATM facilities have made account operations very convenient to customers.

 

Disadvantages Savings account

  • A minimum balance must be maintained at all times and the customer is denied access to that money.
  • For across the counter withdrawals, it is only the account holder who can withdraw cash.
  • Withdrawals are restricted and sufficient notice is required before large amounts are withdrawn.
  • The account holders do not enjoy services such as cheque books and overdraft facilities like the current account holders.
  • Easy access to the money through ATM cards encourages overdrawals.
  • Anybody who knows the pin of the card (ATM card) can withdraw money from the account.

 

Requirements for opening an account

The following are some of the requirements for opening either a current account or a savings account:

  • Photocopies of identification documents such as National Identity Card or Passport.
  • Passport size photographs (number varies from bank to bank). Some banks are nowadays taking the photographs instead of the customers providing them.
  • For current account holders, an introductory letter from an existing customer from the prospective customer’s employer.
  • Filling in the application form provided by the bank.
  • Signing of the specimen signature cards. Usually two.

 

NB: Once these requirements are fulfilled, the bank allocates the customer an account number, upon payment of an initial deposit.

 

  • Fixed deposit account

This account is also known as time Deposit account. It is maintained by those who have money not meant for immediate use.

Once money is deposited, there are no withdrawals until the time expires.

 

Advantages of Fixed deposit account

  • Interest earned is relatively high as compared to savings account.
  • There are no bank charges to the account holder.
  • Money held in fixed deposit account can be used as security to acquire bank loans.
  • Restricted withdrawals encourage savings.
  • The account holder has time to plan for the deposited money.

 

 

Disadvantages of Fixed deposit account

  • Access to money is not allowed until the end of the agreed period.
  • Interest is forfeited if there is pre-mature withdrawal.
  • The minimum amount of money for this account is high.
  • The customer is not allowed to deposit more money in this account.
  • A notice is required if the customer wants to terminate the contract before expiry date.
  • The customer is denied the use of the deposited funds before the expiry of the period.

 

REQUIREMENTS TO OPEN AND OPERATE A BANK ACCOUNT

  • Identification documents such as National Identification Card, Passport and Driving License.
  • Reference letter from employer or and existing customer.
  • Filling an application form giving the information about the customer.
  • Submission of a specimen signature to be held by the bank.
  • An initial deposit is paid and the account becomes operational.

 

NON- BANK FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS

These are financial institutions that offer finances for development purposes to individuals and organizations.

These institutions address themselves to the needs of specific sectors in the economy.

They offer the finances inform of either short term or long term loans.

The following are some of the non-bank financial institutions in Kenya

  • Development banks
  • Building societies
  • Finance houses
  • Savings and Credit Co-operative Societies
  • Micro finance organizations
  • Insurance companies
  • Pension Funds’ Organizations
  • Hire Purchase Firms

 

  • Housing Finance Companies

They are mainly formed to finance housing activities that is they either put up houses and sell to the individuals or offer mortgage finance to those who wish to put up their own houses. They includes Housing Finance Corporation of Kenya (HFCK), National Housing Corporation (NHC)

 

  • Development Finance Institutions

These are development banks which are formed mainly to provide medium term and long term finances, especially to the manufacturing sector. They perform the following functions

  • Financing people who wishes to start either commercial of industrial enterprises, as well as the existing enterprises in the above sectors for expansion
  • Offering training services through seminars and workshops to equip the entrepreneurs’ with the relevant skill in industrial and commercial sectors
  • Offer advisory services to those people wanting to start or expand their businesses
  • Acting as guarantors to people wishing to take loan from other lending institutions to help them expand their business

They includes the following Kenya Industrial Estates (KIE), Development Finance Company of Kenya (DFCK), Industrial Development Bank (IDB), Industrial and Commercial Development Corporation (ICDC)

 

  • Savings and Credit Co-operative societies

These are co-operative societies that are formed to enable members save and obtain loans at most conveniently and favorable conditions. They are formed by those engaged in similar activities. They includes: Mwalimu Savings and Credit Co-operative Societies; Afya Savings and Credit societies; Harambee Savings and Credit Societies

  • Insurance companies

These are companies that assist in creating confidence and sense of security to their clients as well as offering financial assistance to their clients. Their functions include;

  • Enable the policy holders to save through their schemes
  • Provide finances to their policy holders in form of loans
  • Offer guarantee services to the policy holders wishing to obtain loans from other non-bank financial institutions
  • Provide advisory services to the policy holders on security matters
  • Provide finances to meet the expenses incases of loans

They includes the following: Stallion Insurance Company; Madison insurance company; Blue shield insurance company

  • Micro Finance Companies

These are financial companies formed to provide small scale and medium size enterprises with finance. They also carry out the following functions

  • Offer advisory services to their clients in matters such as business opportunities available and how to operate them.
  • Encourage the clients to carry out business activities by offering loans to them
  • They encourage the savings by advancing loans to the individual member of a certain group
  • They supervise, monitor and advise those whom they have given loans

They includes the following: Kenya Women finance Trust (KWFT), Faulu Kenya

 

  • Agricultural Finance Houses

These are institutions formed to promote the agricultural sector. They carry out the following

  • Giving loans to farmers
  • Offering supervisory and training services to the loaned farmer
  • Offering technical and professional advice to loaned farmer
  • Carry research and come up with better ways and means of agricultural sector
  • Coming up with projects that would open up new areas for agriculture

 

 

Differences between commercial banks and non-bank financial institutions

Commercial Banks Non-Bank Financial Institutions
·     Offer all types of accounts

 

·     Provide both short term and medium term finances to their customers

·     Their finance is not restricted to any sector

·     May offer foreign exchange services

·     Their finance is mainly for working capital

·     Participate in clearing house as they offer cheque

·     Offer facilities for safe keeping of valuable items such as title deeds

·     Always in direct control of the central bank

·     May offer overdraft facilities to their customers

·     Offer only two types of accounts savings and fixed deposit

·     Mainly provide medium term and long term finances

·     Their finance is restricted to a particular sector

·     Do not provide foreign exchange services

·     They provide capital for development

·     Do not participate in clearing house since they don’t offer

·     Do not offer facilities for safe keeping of valuable items

·     Not usually in direct control of the central bank

·     Do not offer overdraft facilities to their customers

 

 

THE CENTRAL BANK

This is a bank established by the government through the act of the parliament to manage and control the monetary matters in the country. It was formed to perform the following functions;

  • Issue currency in the country, which includes both new notes and coins to replace the worn-out ones
  • Banker to the commercial banks, by ensuring that all the commercial banks in the country operate an account with them
  • Being the government ‘s bank, by offering banking services to the government which enables the government to operate an account with them
  • Advisor to the government on financial issues in the economy
  • Controller of the commercial banks on how they carry out their functions in the economy to ensure that their customers are served well
  • Provide links with other central banks in other countries, facilitating financial relationships. It also provide a link between the country and other financial institutions such as IMF
  • Maintain stability in the exchange rates between the local currencies and the foreign ones.
  • Act as the lender of the last resort to the commercial banks to enable them meet their financial obligations when need arise
  • Facilitates the clearing of cheques between different commercial banks through its clearing house (a department in the central bank)
  • Administering of the public debt by facilitating the receipt and providing a means through which the government pays back the borrowed money
  • Control of the monetary system in the country in order to regulate the economy. In doing this they put in place various monetary policies that can either expand the economic activities in the country or depress them.

Monetary policy refers to the deliberate move by the government through the central bank to manipulate the supply and cost of money in the economy in order to achieve a desirable economic outcome. They do this through the use of various tools of monetary policies which includes the following: Bank rates; Open market Operation (OMO); Cash Liquidity ratio requirement; Compulsory deposit requirement; Selective credit control; Directives; Request.

 

  • Bank rates

They may increase or decrease the interest rate at which they lend to the commercial banks to enable them increase or decrease the rate at which they lend money to their customers in the economy to enable the government achieve the desirable economic development in the country

When they increase their lending interest rate, the commercial banks also raise their lending rates to the consumers to reduce the number of people obtaining loans, leading to a reduction of money supplied in the economy.

When they decrease their lending interest rate, the commercial banks also decreases their lending rates to the consumers, increase the amount of money supplied in the economy

 

  • Open Market Operations (OMO)

This is where they regulate the supply of money in the economy by either selling or buying the government securities (treasury bills or bonds) in the open market. That is when they want to increase the supply in the economy, they buying the securities from the members of the public who had bought them to increase more supply of money in the economy.

When they want to reduce the amount of money in circulation they will sell the government security to the public in the open market, to mop up/reduce the excess supply in the economy

The payment of the securities takes money from the individuals accounts in the commercial banks, reducing the amount that the individual can use in the economy, while when buying the central bank pays the security holders in their respective accounts in the commercial banks, increasing the amount that they can use in the economy

 

  • Cash/liquidity ratio requirement

Here the central bank expect the commercial bank to keep a certain proportion of their total deposits in form of cash to enable them meet their daily needs, while the rest are held in liquid assets. This proportion can be reduced by the central bank to reduces the amount of money held by the commercial banks in order to reduce the amount of money spent by the commercial banks in cash, reducing the amount of money in supply, or they may increase the proportion to be held by the commercial banks to enable them increase the amount of money they spent in cash, increasing the amount of money in supply

Cash ratio =

 

  • Compulsory deposit requirements

The commercial banks are required to maintain a certain amount of deposits with the central bank which will be held in a special account where the money stays frozen. This reduces the amount of money that the commercial banks hold and are able to spend in their operation, influencing the supply of money in the economy.

The deposit may be increase to reduce the amount of money in the commercial banks, or reduced to increase the amount of money in the commercial banks

 

  • Selective credit control

The central bank may issue a special instruction to the commercial bank and other financial institution only to lend more in a particular sector to control the amount of money reaching the economy. The instruction may be removed, if the bank feels that the supply in the economy has reduced and needs to be increased

 

  • Directives

The central bank may issue a directive to the commercial banks on the interest rate they should charge on their lending and to increase or reduce the margin requirement for borrowing to make it harder or easier for the customers to obtain loan.

Margin requirement is the proportion of money expected to be raised by the client to finance the project he/she wants to obtain the loan for, before being given a loan to complete the project with.

 

  • Request (Moral suasion)

The central bank may appeal to other financial institutions to exercise restrain in their lending activities to the public to help in controlling the money supply

 

Trends in Banking

These are the positive changes that have taken place in the banking sector to improve their service deliveries to their customers. They include;

  • The use of Automatic Teller Machines (ATMs), which has made it possible for the customers to access their money any time of the day. The ATM cards that are used for withdrawals from the ATM machines can also be used as a debit card to make purchases.
  • Networking all their branches, which has enable the customers to carry out their transactions in any of the branch.
  • E-Banking, which is the banking through the internet. This has made it possible for the customers to transact their financial businesses on-line.
  • Relaxation of some of the conditions on opening and operating some of the accounts to make them be more attractive to their customers.
  • Offering varieties of products which includes easier credit facilities to their customers to attract more customers.
  • Liberalization of foreign exchange dealings by licensing forex bureaus to offer services to the customers, improving the accessibility to the service.
  • Improving the customers care services, with some bank setting up a departments known as the customer care department to offer detailed assistance to their customers.
  • Allowing non bank financial institutions to offer banking services to the members of the public, for example; KWFT, SACCOs, FOSA, Faulu Kenya, etc
  • Mobile Banking services (M-Banking), which allows the customers to carry out their financial transactions over their mobile phones. It has brought about several benefits/ advantages to their customers which includes;

 

Advantages of m-banking

  • Easy transfer of funds from one account to the other in the same bank (inter account transfer)
  • Easy transfer of money from ones account to his mobile phone for other transactions
  • Ability to check ones account balance in the bank with ease
  • Easy to monitor your financial transactions by checking your transaction details over the phone
  • Easy payment of the bills such as electricity bill, Dstv bills, etc and other wages
  • Ability to transfer money from one mobile number to other in collaboration with the service providers
  • Easy request for new cheque books and bank statements from the banks
  • Able to top up air time to your mobile phones in collaboration with the service providers
  • Reduced risk of carrying large sums of money in cash or cheques that may be stolen

However this development has also come with its challenges, which includes;

 

Disadvantages of m-banking

  • Registration to enjoy all these services must physically be done in the banking hall, which subject the customers to stress queues of the bank
  • Only the registered mobile number can carryout these transactions which limits the customer to only using one number
  • Users requires a mobile phone with a screen that can display the transaction which a times some may not a ford
  • Mobile phones can easily be lost or stolen from the owner, inconveniencing him from carrying out the transactions
  • Bank transaction information may load slowly, which may makes it expensive for the user
  • Possibility of transferring the funds to a wrong account, due to error in typing of the account number

 

  • Introduction of agency banking, which has made them to make their services to be more accessible to even areas where they may have not put up a banking hall.

Agency banking is whereby a retail stores, supermarket, or any other commercial businesses are authorized by the financial institutions to carry out financial transactions on their behalf. They may offer the following services

  • Receiving customer deposits
  • Offering withdrawal services
  • Transfer of funds for customers
  • Pay bills for the customers
  • Balance inquiry services
  • Opening new accounts for the customers
  • Fill loan application forms for them

Advantages of agency banking

  • Reduction of set up and delivery cost to the banks, which in turn passes to the customers in form of reduced cost of accessing services
  • Time saving as the agents are located close to the customer and the customer may carry out other transactions as he withdraw the money
  • More convenient for the customer to bank with their local retailers other than the traditional banking halls
  • Enable the bank to reach far places within the country

 

 

REVISION EXERCISES

PAPER 1

 

  • Give four advantages of barter trade.
  • Highlight four services offered by the central bank of Kenya to the commercial banks.
  • State four methods through which commercial banks can transfer money.
  • State any four current developments that have taken place in the banking sector.
  • Outline four tools of monetary policy used by the central bank to control money supply.
  • Outline four factors that may have led to the downfall of barter trade.
  • Highlight two factors that may influence:
  • Transaction motive.
  • Speculative motive.
  • Mention four functions of commercial banks in an economy.
  • Outline three factors that influence the supply of money.
  • Give four characteristics of money.
  • The following are some of the accounts available to customers in Kenya banking industry: Current account, Savings account and Fixed deposit account. Give the account that corresponds to each of the description given below.
  Description Type of account
(a) Account holders required to deposit a specific initial amount as well as maintaining a minimum balance.  
(b) Account holders may deposit and withdraw money whenever they want without maintaining a minimum balance.  
(c) Banks pay interest on deposit at comparatively higher rates.  
(d) Money may be deposited at any time and interest is earned if a specific balance is maintained.  

 

  • Outline four benefits that accrue to a customer who uses automated teller machine (ATM) banking services.

PAPER             2

 

  • Explain five functions of the central bank of Kenya.
  • Describe four measures that the government may put in place to reduce the amount of money in circulation.
  • Explain five services offered by commercial banks to their customers.
  • Explain five ways in which commercial banks facilitate payment on behalf of their customers.
  • Explain four services that the central bank of Kenya may offer as a banker to commercial banks.
  • Explain five in which banks contribute to the development of Kenya
  • Outline five reasons why banks currently account is popular with traders
  • Explain service offered to commercial banks by the central bank of Kenya
  • In what ways of the functions of commercial bank differ with those of non- bank

Financial institutions

  • Explain five ways in which central bank of Kenya may control the supply of money in

The country

  • Describe methods which may be used by commercial banks to advance money to customers.
  • A businessman wishes to obtain a loan from a commercial bank. Highlight the

Conditions that he should satisfy before the bank can grant him the loan

  • Explain five services that the central bank of Kenya offers to commercial banks
  • Explain four disadvantages of using a bank  overdraft as a  source of finances
  • Describe four ways in which a non- bank financial institutions differ from the  commercial banks
  • Discuss five reasons why business people prefer to operate bank current accounts
  • Outline the benefits that bank customer gets from  operating a current  account
  • Explain the 5 services offered by a  commercial banks to their customers

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PUBLIC FINANCE

Public finance refers to the activities carried out by the government associated with raising of finances and the spending of the finances raised (it is the study of how government collects revenue and how it spends it)

The components of public finance are;

  • Public revenue
  • Public expenditure
  • Public debt
  • Public revenue-refers to the revenues (income) and resources received by the government from different sources.
  • Public expenditure-refers to the resources spent by the government.
  • Public debt-refers to the money and resources borrowed by the government.

Purpose of public finance

  • Provision of essential goods and services. The government has a responsibility of providing its citizens with essential goods and services such as security,health,schools,drought control, law e.t.c such facilities and services may not be adequately covered by the private sector because of the high costs involved and risks.
  • Encouraging consumption of certain commodities-The government may encourage consumption of certain commodities e.g. maize by subsidizing on their productions or lowering their taxes.
  • Controlling consumption of certain commodities-The government may also encourage consumption of some commodities e.g. cigarettes and alcohol by imposing heavy taxes on them.
  • Promotion of Balanced regional development-This may be done by initiating economic projects in areas that are under developed/lagging behind.
  • Wealth Redistribution-This is done by heavily taxing the rich and using the money raised to provide goods and services that benefit the poor
  • To promote economic stability-Economic instability may be caused by factors such as unemployment. Such problems can be solved through public expenditure in projects that generate employment such as ‘kazi kwa vijana’
  • Creation of a conducive Business Environment-Through public expenditure, the government may develop infrastructure such as roads, electricity, security e.t.c thereby creating a conducive environment for businesses to thrive in.
  • To raise government revenue-Through public finance, the government raises revenue which it uses in provision of essential goods and services to the public.
  • Improving balance of payment-This may be done by improving heavy taxes such as customs duty to discourage importation.

Sources of public finance

There are two major sources of public finance i.e.

  • Public revenue
  • Public debt (government borrowing)
  • Public revenue-This is the income that the government gets from its citizens. The main sources of public revenue are;
  • Tax; This is a compulsory payment levied by the government on individuals and firms without any direct benefit to the payer.
  • Fines and penalties-These are the charges imposed on individuals, firms and corporations who break the laws of the country.(offenders)
  • Fees; These are the payments charged by the government for the direct services it renders to its people e.g. road licence fee, marriage certificate fee and import licence fee.
  • Rent and rates; Charged on use of government properties e.g. game parks, forests e.t.c
  • Eschiats; Income obtained from properties of persons who die without legal heirs or proper wills. Such people’s properties are taken over by the state.
  • Dividends and profits; These are the income received from the government direct investments e.g. income/surplus from public corporations.
  • Interest from loans-This is the interest on loans advanced by the government to firms and individuals through its agencies such as ICDc, AFC e.t.c
  • Proceeds from scale of government property.
  • Public debt (Government borrowing)-This is the money that the government borrows when public revenue is insufficient to meet all its financial obligations.

Government borrowing is also referred to as national debt. It includes all outstanding borrowing by the central government, local authorities and government corporations.

These are two majorly two sources of public debts;

  • Internal borrowing
  • External borrowing

Internal borrowing

This refers to borrowing by government from firms and individuals within the country. This may be done through;

Open market operation; the government sells its securities such as treasury bonds and treasury bills. This however has a disadvantage of causing ‘crowding out effect’ where the government leaves the private investors with little to borrow from.

External borrowing

This refers to government borrowing from external sources. It may either be on a bilateral or multilateral basis.

Bilateral borrowing is where the government borrows directly from another country.

Multilateral borrowing is where the government borrows from international financial institutions such as international monetary fund (IMF), World Bank, African Development bank e.t.c.such bodies get finances from various sources which they lend to their member countries who are in need of such funds.

Generally, external borrowing has strings attached. The borrowing country is expected to meet some set conditions, sometimes adversely affecting some sectors of the economy.  The total internal borrowing (internal debt) added to the total external borrowing (external debt) constitutes the national debt.

Classes of public (National debt)

These are two classes of national debt;

  • Reproductive debt
  • Dead-weight debt.

(i) Reproductive debt

This is borrowed money used to finance project(s) that can generate revenue. Such projects, once started may become self sustaining and may contribute towards servicing/repaying the debt. E.g. money used to finance irrigation schemes, electricity production e.t.c.

  1. dead-weight debt

    This is borrowed money that is used to finance activities that do not generate any revenue. Examples are money used to finance recurrent expenditure e.g. payment of salaries or for famine relief e.t.c

Dead-weight debt is a burden to members of the public since they are the ones who are expected to contribute towards its repayment.

Factors to consider before the government decides whether to borrow internally or externally

This refers to how the government spends the finances it has raised on behalf of its citizens.

Categories of government expenditure

  • Recurrent expenditure
  • Development expenditure
  • Transfer payments.

Recurrent expenditure

This refers to government spending that takes place regularly e.g. payments of salaries to civil servants, fuelling of government vehicles e.g.

Every financial year, the government must allocate funds to meet such expenditure.

Recurrent expenditure is also known as consumption expenditure.

Development expenditure

This is also referred to as capital expenditure .It is government spending on projects that facilitate economic development. Such projects includes construction of railway lines, roads, airports, rural electrification e.t.c

Once completed expenditure on such projects ceases and may only require maintenance.

Transfer payments

This is expenditure on things/people who do not directly contribute to a country’s national income. Such expenditure include money spent on famine relief, pension, bursaries e.t.c

PRINCIPLES OF PUBLIC/GOVERNMENT EXPENDITURE

These are the considerations that are necessary before any expenditure can be incurred by the government.

They include;

  • Sanctions; Every public expenditure must be approved by the relevant authority like parliament.
  • Maximum social benefit; Any public expenditure must be incurred in such a way that majority of the citizens are able to reap maximum benefit from it e.g. improved living standards and quality of life.
  • Flexibility /elasticity-The policy on public expenditure should be flexible enough to meet prevailing economic situations i.e. it should be possible to increase or decrease the expenditure on projects depending on the prevailing circumstances e.g. during drought, it should be possible to spend on famine relief.
  • Economy-public expenditure should be planned carefully and prudently to avoid any possible waste.
  • Proper financial management (Accountability)-public funds should be well managed. This should be facilitated by maintenance of proper records which should be audited as required.
  • Productivity-The biggest proportion of public expenditure should be spent on development projects and less on non-development projects.
  • Equity-Government expenditure should be distributed equitably to all sectors of the economy in order to reduce income and wealth inequalities.
  • Surplus-Surplus revenue collected should be saved for emergencies or for when collection of revenue is below projections.

TAXATION

Tax; is a compulsory payment by either individuals or organizations to the government without any direct benefit to the payer.

Taxation- refers to the process through which the government raises revenue by collecting taxes.

Purposes/reasons for taxation

  • Raising revenue for government expenditure. This is the main reason for taxation.
  • Discouraging /controlling consumption of certain commodities e.g. alcohol and cigarattes which are considered to be harmful.
  • Discouraging importation of certain commodities in order to protect local industries. This is done by imposing heavy taxes on such commodities.
  • Controlling inflation. Taxation reduces money supply by reducing peoples ‘disposable’ income thereby controlling inflation.
  • Reducing inequality in income distribution; this is done by taxing the rich heavily and using the finances raised in provision of goods and services that benefit the poor.
  • Influencing locations of businesses. This is done by taxing businesses located in urban areas heavily and those in rural areas lightly hence businesses moving to rural areas.
  • Correcting unfavorable balance of payments. High taxes are imposed on imported commodities thereby discouraging their importation leading to an improvement in the balance of payments.
  • To protect the key selectors of the economy such as the agricultural sector, by stimulating their growth.

 

Factors that determine the amount of money raised through taxation

  • Distribution of incomes
  • Social and political factors
  • Honesty and efficiency of tax authorities
  • Citizens level of real income
  • Economic structure of the country i.e. relative size of the country’s commercial and subsistence sectors.

 

Principles of taxation

These are the characteristics that a good tax system should have. They are also referred to as the cannons of taxation.

A good tax system should be;

  • Equitable/principle of equityEvery subject of the state should pay tax in proportion to their income. A tax system should therefore have horizontal and vertical equity.

Horizontal equity means that those at the same level of income and circumstances should pay the same amount of tax.

Vertical equity means that those earning higher incomes should pay proportionately higher amounts of tax than those earning less.

  • Certain/principle of certaintyThe tax that an individual should pay should be clear in terms of the amount, time and manner in which it should be paid. The government should also be fairly certain of the amount of tax expected so that planning can be easier.
  • Convenient/principle of convenienceTax levied ought to be convenient to both the contributor and collector, it should be levied at a time when the payer has money and mode of payment should be convenient to both the payer and the payee.
  • Economical/principle of economyThe cost of collecting and administering the tax should be lower than the tax so collected.
  • Flexible/principle of flexibilityIt should be readily adaptable to changing economic times i.e. when the economic conditions of the people improve it should give raised revenue e.g. VAT
  • Ability to pay/non-oppressive-A tax system should be designed in a way that the amount charged is not too high to the extent that the contributors are unable to pay or is discouraged from working hard.
  • Diversified/principle of diversityThere should be different types of taxes so that the tax burden is on different groups in the society. This also ensures that the government has money at all times.
  • SimplicityA good tax system should be simple enough to be understood by each tax payer. This will motivate them to pay tax.
  • Elastic/principle of elasticityThe tax system should be able to generate more revenue for the government by targeting items of mass consumption.

IMPACT AND INCIDENCE OF TAX

Impact of tax; The burden of tax on the initial person

Incidence of tax; The final resting place of the tax burden.

The person on whom tax is initially imposed may either bear the whole burden or pass part or the whole burden to someone else. E.g. for manufactured goods, the impact of the tax is on the manufacturer and the manufacturer may pass the incidence of the tax to the consumer.

If the manufacturer only passes part of the burden to the consumer, then the incidence of the tax wil be partly on the manufacturer and partly on the consumer.

CLASSIFICATION OF TAXES

Taxes are classified according to;

  • Structure of the tax
  • Impact of the tax on the tax payer.

                      According to the structure

In this case, taxes are classified according to the relationship between the amount paid on tax and the income of the tax payer. These are:

Progressive tax

Regressive tax

Proportional tax

  • Progressive tax

This is a type of tax where the rate/amount paid increases proportionately with increase in income.e.g tax may be as follows

Income                               Rate

0-5000                                    20%

5001-10000                            25%

10001-15000                          30%    e.t.c

-In progressive tax, those with higher income rates remit a higher proportion of their income as tax compared to those in lower income brackets.

This type of tax is based on the belief that one only needs a certain amount in order to have a decent standard of living.

Advantages of progressive tax

  • It reduces income inequality as the rich are taxed more
  • It encourages people to work harder/more in order to maintain their standard of living
  • The revenue collected is higher
  • The unit cost of collecting tax reduces as the tax increases.
  • Disadvantages of progressive tax
  • It is oppressive-some people are taxed more than the others and punishes people for their hard work.
  • It may discourage people from working more as any additional income goes tax
  • Investors may be discouraged from venturing into risky but more profitable businesses as these would attract more tax
  • It assumes that people earning the same amount of money/income have similar needs and ability to pay tax-which in reality may not be true.
  • It can lead to tax evasion by taxpayers falsifying their level of income.

Regressive tax

This is a type of tax that takes a higher proportion of low income earners as compared to high income earners. The fax burden falls more heavily on the poor (opposite of progressive)

Example: sales tax where people pay the same amount irrespective of the level of income.

The assumption is based on the understanding that the one who deems it necessary to buy a certain products considers the utility derived from it to be equal to its price, which includes tax.

  • Proportional Tax

This is a type of tax where the rate of tax remains the same irrespective of the level of income or value of property to be taxed e.g. if the rate is 20% then a person who earns ksh.5000 will pay 20/100 x5000=ksh.1000

Ksh.10, 000 will pay 20/100×10,000=ksh.2000 e.t.c

Example: corporation tax where companies are expected to pay a fixed proportion of their profits as tax.

  • Digressive tax

This is a type of tax where the tax rate increases up to a given maximum after which a uniform tax rate is levied for any further income.

Classification according to impact on the tax-payee

Based on the impact, the tax has on the tax payer; tax may be classified as either;

  • Direct tax
  • Indirect tax
  • Direct tax

These are taxes where the impact and the incidence of the tax are on the same person. It is not possible to shift/pass any part of the tax burden to anybody else.

This type of tax is based on incomes, profits and property of individuals as well as companies.

They include:

  • Personal income tax

This is a tax that is imposed on incomes of individuals and is usually progressive in nature.

Example pay-As You-Earn (PAYE) for salaries.

In most cases it is paid through check-off system where the employer deducts it from the employee’s salary and remits it to the tax authorities.

 

  • Corporation tax

This is tax levied on profits of companies. It is usually proportional in nature.

  • Stamps duty

This is tax paid in areas such as conveyance of land or securities from one person to another.

  • Estate (death) duty

This type of tax is imposed on property transferred after the owners’ death. The tax helps in raising government revenue and also in redistributing income since the inheritor has not worked for it.

  • Wealth tax

This is tax levied on personal wealth beyond a certain limit.

  • Capital gains tax

This is tax levied on gains realized when a fixed asset is sold at a price higher than the book value.

  • Capital transfer (gifts) Tax

This is tax imposed on the value of property transferred from one person to another as a gift. The tax is designed to seal loopholes whereby a wealthy person may try to avoid tax by transferring his/her property to a friend or a relative as a gift.

This type of tax is progressive in nature. It however does not affect transfers between spouses or to charitable organizations.

Merits/advantages of direct taxes

  • Economical in collection; most of direct taxes are collect at source and the cost of collecting them is fairly low.
  • Tax revenue is certain; the tax payer knows what and when to pay and the government knows how much tax revenue to expect at what time (can be collected from the annual tax returns in advance)
  • Equitable /equity; they facilitate fair distribution in tax contribution as people pay according to the size of their income.
  • Simplicity /simple to understand; they are easy and simple to understand by both the tax payer and the collector.
  • Does not affect the price of goods and services; direct tax does not cause inflation as it only affects consumer’s disposable incomes and not the prices of goods and services.
  • Brings redistribution of wealth; direct taxes are progressive in nature hence the wealthier members of the society are taxed more than the poorer members of the society.
  • Civic consciousness; tax payers feed the pinch of paying tax and thus take a keen interest in government expenditure.
  • No leakages; loss of collected revenue is minimized as the tax is paid directly to the tax authorities and not through middle men.
  • Desirable; the tax is desirable because it only affects people who fall within the jurisdiction of income tax and corporation tax.
  • Elastic/flexible; the tax is flexible in that it can be expanded to cover as many areas as desirable. It can also be raised or reduced according to the needs of the economy.

 

 

DEMERITS OF DIRECT TAX

  • Encourage avoidance and evasion; whenever possible people come up with ways of reducing the amount of tax payable by falsifying information or just ignoring payment.
  • Discriminatory /not imposed on all citizens; direct taxes are not paid by all citizens as low income earners who do not fall within the tax brackets are exempted
  • Discourage investment/deterrent to investment; Heavy taxation on profits discourage people from investing in risky but profitable businesses
  • Discourage work/deterrent to work; High rate of direct tax may deter people from working harder as people may opt for leasure instead of working extra time.
  • Encourage capital flight; high taxes such as corporate tax make foreigners to withdraw their investments and transfer them to countries with lower taxes.
  • Unpopularity; the burden of the tax (incidence and impact) of tax is borne by the tax payer directly and at once. This makes direct taxes very unpopular.
  • May inconvenience the tax payer; the tax payer has to comply with complicated formalities relating to sources of income as well as the expenses incurred while generating it. This may force the tax-payer to engage the services of tax experts who have to be paid.
  • Lack of civic awareness; on tax payers are not interested in scrutinizing government expenditure as they do not feel the pinch of paying tax.
  • Indirect tax

These are taxes in which the impact is on one person and the incidence is partially or wholly on another person. The tax payer may shift either the whole or part of the tax burden to another person.

Such taxes are usually based on the expenditure on goods and services and include the following:

  • Sales tax: this is based on the sales made and may be assessed either as a percentage of the sales or a fixed amount e.g. sh.2 per every kilograms sold. The tax may be collected at one point or various points of sale. In Kenya, sales tax has been replaced by V.A.T
  • VALUE ADDED TAX (V.A.T): this is the tax that is levied on the value that a business adds borne by the consumer in the final price.
  • Export duty: this is a type of tax that is levied on exports. The objective may either to raise revenue or discourage the exploitation of some commodities.
  • Import duty: This is tax levied on imported products, For the following reasons.
  • Raising government revenue
  • Reducing incidences of dumping
  • Discouraging consumption of imported goods with a view of boosting local production
  • Protecting local industries

Excise duty: This is a type of tax that is imposed on goods that are manufactured and sold within a country.

Its purpose includes;

Raising revenue for the government

Discouraging the consumption of some commodities such as beer and cigarettes.

MERITS OF INDIRECT TAX

  • Can be used selectively; It can be used selectively to achieve a given objective e.g. consumption of some commodities.
  • Tax payment is voluntary; indirect tax is only paid by those who consume the tax commodities therefore those who do not want to pay the tax would only need to avoid taxed commodities.
  • Difficult to evade; the tax cannot be evaded because it is part of the price of the commodity. All those who buy the commodity taxed must therefore pay the tax.
  • Wide coverage/broad based; the tax is levied on a wide range of essential commodities thus a high amount of revenue is collected.
  • Stimulate effort; indirect taxes if increased increases the prices of goods and services. People who want to maintain the same living standards will therefore have to work harder to be able to buy/affect the same goods and services.
  • Convenient; the tax is paid in bits as one buys the goods and services. The tax is also hidden in the price of the commodity and the payer may not be aware of it.
  • Flexible; flexible; the government can raise or reduce the tax rate to suit the prevailing economic situation in a country.

DEMERITS OF INDIRECT TAXES

  • May fuel inflation; continued increase in indirect taxes may fuel inflation as it directly increases the prices of goods and services.
  • Less equitable/regressive; the same amount is charged on both the high and the low income earners making the tax burden to fall heavily on the low income earners. The low income earners end up paying a larger proportion of their income as tax.
  • Can be avoided; indirect taxes can be avoided by people who do not consume the taxed commodity.
  • Encourages falsification of records; traders may falsify their rewards in order to pay less tax.
  • Lack of civic/contributors awareness; the tax is hidden in the price of the commodities therefore the tax payers are not aware that they are contributing anything to the state.
  • Expensive to administer/expensive in collection; the government must employ many tax inspectors making indirect taxes expensive in collection and administration.
  • Uncertainty in revenue collection; the government may not predict the amount of revenue yield as it is not easy to forecast sales and people can also not be forced to buy the taxed commodities.
  • Might interfere with resource allocation; indirect taxes increases the prices of commodities and can therefore force consumers and producers to shift to the consumption and production of commodities that are not taxed.
  • Discourages savings; increased expenditure due to increased prices will lead to low saving and hence low investments.

 

 

 

INFLATION

Introduction
Inflation refers to an economic situation where the demand for goods and services in the economy is continuously increasing without corresponding increase in supply which pushes the general prices up.

The opposite of inflation is called deflation.

Inflation is measured by considering the Consumer Price Index (C.P.I) which involves comparison of prices of certain goods and services for two different periods.

In constructing the C.P.I;

  • A basket of commodities is selected which includes selecting the generally consumed commodities by average consumers.
  • Choosing the base period which should be a period when the prices were fairly stable.
  • The price of commodities both in the current period (P1) and base period (P2)

Consumer Price Index (C.P.I)= × 100
Types and causes of inflation

Inflation is classified in relation to its causes.
Demand pull inflation

This is a type of inflation caused by excessive demand for goods and services without a corresponding increase in production resulting into rise in prices.

Causes of demand pull inflation

  • Increase in population.;Increased number of people in a family calls for increased demand of goods and services thus fueling demand-pull inflation.
  • Increase in government expenditure;The government expenditure has the effect of making money available to people thus increasing the aggregate demand for goods and services.
  • A fall in the level of savings; This increases the consumer expenditure on goods and services which brings pressure on the available goods and services thereby pulling up prices.
  • Effects of credit creation by the commercial banks; When banks lend more money to the public, their purchasing power increases hence increasing demand which in turn leads to increase in the prices.
  • Consumers’ expectation of future price increases; When consumers expect the prices of goods and services to increase in the future, they will buy more in the present thus increasing the demand thus fueling demand-pull inflation.
  • General shortages of goods and services; Any shortage in goods caused by factors such as; adverse climatic conditions, hoarding, smuggling, withdrawal of firms from the industry and decline in level of technology calls for scramble for the available goods thus increasing their demand and prices.

 

\ Cost push inflation
This is a type of inflation caused by increase in cost of factors of production which translates to increased prices of goods and services.

Causes of cost push inflation.

  • Increase in wages and salaries; An increase in the wages and salaries may increase the cost of labour. The increased cost of labour may be reflected in the increased prices of commodities which in turn would cause wage push inflation.
  • Increase in cost of raw materials and other inputs; This increases the cost of production thus increased prices.
  • Increase in indirect taxes; This increases the cost of production and this causes firms to raise the prices of their product.
  • Increase in profit margin; If the business decides to raise its profit, it leads to an increase in the price of the commodities resulting to profit push inflation.
  • Reduction in subsidies; removal of a subsidy implies that the producer would produce at a higher cost that was being met by the subsidy. This increase cost is finally reflected in increased prices.

 

Imported inflation
This is a type of inflation which is caused by importation of high priced inputs of production such as; technology/machines, skilled human resources
and crude oil.

This in turn increases the prices of locally produced goods which may lead to inflation.

Causes of imported inflation

  • Importation of expensive technology especially highly skilled labour.
  • Importation of expensive machines and equipment.
  • Importation of high priced oil.
  • The currency depreciating thus increasing the price of the country’s imports.

LEVELS OF INFLATION

  • Mild / Creeping/Moderate Inflation

This a slow rise in price level of not more than 5 % per annum. It is associated with some beneficial effects on an economy especially to firms and debtors.

  • Galloping /Rapid Inflation

This is a very rapid accelerating inflation characterized by a situation whereby the general prices levels increase rapidly.

  • Stagflation;

This is an economic condition in which unemployment is high, the economy is stagnant, but prices are rising.

  • Hyper /Runway Inflation;

This is when prices are rising at double or triple digit rates of 20%, 100%, 200%.

The price levels are extremely high and under this situation people may lose confidence in the money as a medium of exchange and as a store of value.

 

EFFECTS OF INFLATION IN AN ECONOMY
positive effects of inflation

  • Mild inflation motivates people to work hard as they try to cope with the effects of the inflation in order to maintain their standards of living.
  • Mild inflation encourages proper utilization of resources with an attempt of avoiding wastage as much as possible.
  • Mild inflation increases investment especially in trading activities since sellers buy goods when prices are low and sell later when prices are higher.
  • It promotes creativity in an economy in terms of production in order to survive the effects of inflation.
  • It benefits debtors since they obtain goods on credit and pay for them in future at the old low prices.

 

Negative effects

  • It leads to reduction in profits as sales volumes reduce since inflation reduces the purchasing power of consumers resulting to low sales.
  • It wastes time as a lot of time is wasted in shopping around for reasonable prices and also firms may waste a lot of time adjusting their price lists to reflect new prices.
  • It leads to conflicts between employers and employees as firms are pressurized by employees and trade unions to raise wages and salaries to cope with inflation.
  • It leads to loss by creditors as they lend money when the value of money is high but at the time of payment is low since the value of money will have been eroded by inflation.
  • It leads to decline in standards of living as consumers’ purchasing power decrease and therefore one can not lead the lifestyle he/she used to live before.
  • Leads to unemployment.
  • Discourages savings and investment since during inflation people tend to spend most of their earnings leaving little or nothing to save.
  • Leads to retardation of economic growth.
  • Worsens balance of payments position.

CONTROL OF INFLATION

The govt. may adopt the following policies depending on their situation to reduce inflation to manageable levels. They include;

  • Monetary policy

This is a deliberate move by the govt. through the central bank to regulate and control the money supply in the economy which may lead to demand pull inflation. The policies include;

  • Increase rate of interest of lending to the commercial banks. This forces them to increase the rate at which they are lending to their customers, to reduce the number of customers borrowing money, reducing the amount of money being added to the economy
  • Selling of govt. securities in an open market operation (O.M.O). the selling of securities such as Bonds and Treasury bills mops money from the economy, reducing the amount of money being held by individuals
  • Increasing the commercial banks cash/liquidity ratio. This reduces their ability to lend and release more money into the economy, reducing their customer’s purchasing power
  • Increasing the compulsory deposits by the commercial banks with the central banks. This reduces their lending power to their customers, which makes their customers to receive only little amount from them, reducing the amount of money in the economy
  • Putting in place the selective credit control measures. The central bank may instruct the commercial bank to only lend money to a given sector of the economy which needs it most, to reduce the amount of money reaching the economy
  • Directives from the central banks to the commercial banks to increase their interest on the money being borrowed, to reduce their lending rates
  • Request by the central bank to the commercial banks (the moral persuasion) to exercise control on their lending rates to help them curb inflation.

 

FISCAL POLICY

These are the measures taken by the govt. to influence the level of demand in the economy especially through taxation process controlling government expenditure. They include;

  • Reducing govt. spending. This reduces the amount of money reaching the consumers, which is likely to increase their purchasing powers, leading to inflation
  • Increasing income taxes. This reduces the level of the consumers disposable income and lowering their spending levels, reducing the inflation
  • Reducing taxes on production. This reduces the cost of production, lowering the prices of goods reaching the market
  • Subsidizing the production. This reduces the cost of production in the economy, which in turn passes over the benefits to the consumers inform of reduced prices.
  • Producing commodities that are in short supply. This increases their availability to meet their existing demand in the market, controlling demand pull inflation

 

  • Statutory measures

These are laws made by the govt. to help in controlling the inflation. They include;

  • Controlling wages and salaries. This reduces the pressure put on the employers to meet high cost of labour for their production which in turn is just likely to lead to cost push inflation. It also minimizes the amount reaching the consumers as their income, to control their purchasing power and the level of demand, controlling the demand pull inflation
  • Price controls. This reduces the manufactures ability to fix their prices beyond a given level which may cause inflation due to their desire to receive high profits.
  • Restricting imports. This reduces the chances of high prices of imported goods impacting on the prices of the goods in the country (imported inflation) and making the manufactures to look for alternative source of raw materials for their production
  • Restricting the terms of hire purchase and credit terms of sales. This reduces the level of demand for those particular commodities in the economy which if not controlled may lead to demand pull inflation
  • Controlling exports. This ensures that the goods available in the local market are adequate for their normal demand. Shortage of supply of goods in the market is likely to bring about the demand pull inflation.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Revision Question

Outline measures that the government may employ to control the following types of inflation;

  • Demand pull inflation
  • Cost push inflation
  • Cost push inflation
  • By controlling the wages and salaries in the economy
  • Restricting import on raw materials
  • Reducing taxes on production
  • Subsidizing the production
  • Employing the price control techniques
  • Demand pull inflation
  • Increasing the rate of interest of lending to the commercial banks
  • Selling govt. securities on O.M.O
  • Increasing the commercial banks cash/liquidity ratio
  • Increasing the compulsory deposits from the commercial banks to the central bank
  • Putting in place the selective credit control measure
  • Directives to the commercial banks
  • Request to the commercial banks
  • Reducing govt. expenditure
  • Increasing income taxes
  • Producing commodities that are short in supply
  • Restricting terms of hire purchase and credit terms of sale
  • Controlling export

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

INTERNATIONAL TRADE

A trade involving the exchange of goods and services between two or more countries. If the exchange is between two countries only, then it is referred to as bilateral trade, but if it is between more than two countries then it is referred to as multilateral trade.

Advantages of International Trade

  • It enable the country to get access to wider range/variety of goods and services from other countries
  • It enable the country to get what it does not produce
  • It helps in promoting peace among the trading countries
  • It enable the country to specialize in it’s production activities where they feel they have an advantage
  • It earns the country revenue through taxes and licenses fees paid by the importers and exporters in the country
  • It enable the country to dispose of its surplus goods and services thereby avoiding wastage
  • It creates employment opportunities to the citizens of that country either directly or indirectly
  • It may lead to the development of the country through importation of capital goods in to the country
  • It encourages easy movement of factors of production across the boarders of the countries involved
  • It enable countries to earn foreign exchange which it can use to pay for its imports
  • A country may be able to obtain goods and services cheaply than if they have been produced locally
  • During hard times or calamities such as wars, the country is able to get assistance from the trading partners
  • It brings about competition between the imported and locally produced goods, leading to improvement in their quality
  • It gives the country an opportunity to exploit fully its natural resources, due to increased market

 

Disadvantages of International trade

  • It may lead to collapse of the local industries, as people will tend to go for the imported goods. The collapse may also lead to loss of employment
  • It may also lead to importation of harmful foods and services such as drugs and pornographic materials
  • May lead to over depending on imported commodities especially the essential ones, making the country to be a slave of the other countries, interfering with their sovereignty
  • It may make the country to suffered during emergencies if they mainly rely on the imported goods
  • May make the country to suffer from import inflation
  • May lead to acquisition of bad culture from other countries as a result of their interactions
  • May lead to unfavorable balance of payment, if the import is higher than exports

 

Terms of Trade

This refers to the rate at which the country’s export exchanges with those from other country. That is:

Terms of trade =

 

 

 

 

It determine the value of export in relations to import so that a country can know whether it’s trade with the other country is favourable or unfavourable

Favourable terms of trade will make the country spent little on import and gain a lot of foreign exchange from other countries

For example;

Then table below shows trade between Kenya and China in the year 2004 and 2005, with the Kenyan government exporting and importing to and from china, and China also importing and Exporting from and to Kenya.

Year Average prices of export
Kenya China
2004 1000 4000
2005 1200 6500

 

Calculate the Terms of trade for;

  • Kenya
  • China
  • Solution;

 

 

Kenya

  • Export price index (E.P.I) =              x  100

 

=       x100

= 120%

  • Import price index (I.P.I) =                                                                                        x 100

=           x 100

=  162.5%

  • Terms of trade (T.O.T) =       x  100

=        x 100

= 73.8%

This implies that Kenya is importing from China more than it is exporting, leading to unfavourable terms of trade i.e. when the percentage is less than 100%, it implies unfavourable terms of trade.

 

China                                        (work out)

The average prices is the various prices of the individual export or import items divide by their number

 

Factors that may lead to either favourable or unfavourable terms of trade

The country is experiencing a favourable terms of trade if:

  • The prices of imports decline and those of export remains the constant
  • The prices of imports declines while those of exports increase
  • The price of imports remains constant while those of exports increase
  • The prices of import and export increases but the rate of increase in export is higher
  • Both prices decrease but the decrease in import prices is higher

 

 

The country will experience unfavourable terms of trade if;

  • Prices of import increases while those of exports decline
  • Prices of import remains constant while those of export declines
  • Prices of import increase as the export remains constant
  • Both prices increase, but for imports increases at a higher rate than export
  • Both prices decrease, but for export decreases at a higher rate than import

 

Reasons for differences in terms of trade between countries

The terms of trade may differ due to:

  • The nature of the commodity being exported. If a country exports raw materials, or unprocessed agricultural products, its terms of trade will be unfavourable, as compared to a country that exports manufactured goods
  • Nature of the commodity being imported. A country that imports manufactured goods is likely to have unfavourable terms of trade as compared to that which imports raw materials or agricultural produce
  • Change in demand for a country’s export. An increase in demand for the country’s export at the world market will make it have favourable terms of trade as compared to those with low demand at the world market
  • Existing of world economic order favouring the products from more developed countries. This may make the developing countries to have deteriorating terms of trade
  • Total quantity supplied. A country exporting what most countries are exporting will have their products trading at a lower price, experiencing unfavourable terms of trade as compared to a country that export what only few countries export
  • Trade restrictions by trading partners. A country with no trading restrictions is likely to import more products, leading to unfavourable terms of trade, as compared to if it impose trade restrictions

Balance of trade

This is the difference between value of country’s visible exports and visible imports over a period of time. If the value of visible/tangible export is higher than the value of visible/tangible imports, then the country experiences favourable terms. If less than the invisible value, then the country is experiencing unfavourable. The country is at equilibrium if the value of visible export and import is the same

 

 

Balance of payments

This is the difference in the sum of visible and invisible export and the visible and invisible imports.  If positive then it means the country is having favourable terms, while if negative, then it means unfavourable It goes beyond the balance of trade in that it considers the following

  • The countries visible/tangible export and import of goods (visible trade)
  • The countries invisible/services exported and imported in the country (invisible trade)
  • The inflow and outflow of investment (capital goods)

 

Balance of Payment account

This is the summary showing all the transactions that have taken place between a particular country and the rest of the world over a period of time. The transaction may arise from

  • The export of visible goods
  • The import of visible goods
  • The export of invisible goods/services
  • The import of invisible goods/services
  • Flow of capital in and out of the country

 

 

 

 

Components of balance of payments account

The balance of payment account is made up of the following

  • Balance of payment on current account
  • Balance of payment on capital account
  • Official settlement account/Cash account/foreign exchange transaction account

 

Balance of payment on current account

This is the account that is used to determine the difference between the value of the country’s visible and invisible imports and exports. That is

Balance of payment on current account = (visible export + invisible export) – (visible import + invisible import)

In the account, the payments for the visible and invisible imports are debited while the receipts from visible and invisible exports are credited that is

 

Dr                                                         current account                                                      Cr

Payments for imports

(Visible and Invisible)

Receipts from exports

(Visible and Invisible)

The balance of payment on current account may be;

  • In equilibrium i.e. if Dr = Cr
  • Unfavourable i.e. if Dr > Cr (-ve)
  • Favourable i.e. if Dr < Cr (+ve)

For example;

A given country had the following values of visible and invisible export and import during the year 2004 and 2005

Trade 2004 (shs) 2005 (shs)
Visible export 18926 29954
Visible imports 22780 32641
Invisible exports 6568 19297
Invisible imports 5239 16129

Required

Prepare the country’s balance of payments on current account for the years 2004 and 2005 and comment on each of them.

 

Dr                                                         current account year 2004                                               Cr

                                                                              shs

Visible imports               22780

Invisible imports                                              5239

Total                                                                   28019

                                                                              Shs

Visible export                                           18926

Invisible export                                          6568

Total                                                            25494

Deficit                                              2525

The country experienced unfavourable balance of payment on current account in the year 2004, since they imported more than they exported

Dr                                                         current account year 2005                                               Cr

                                                                              shs

Visible imports                                                 32641

Invisible imports                                              16129

Total                                                                   28019

Excess   481

                                                                              Shs

Visible export                                           29954

Invisible export                                        19297

Total                                                            49251

 

The country experienced favourable balance of payment on current account in the year 2005, since they exported more than they imported

Balance of payments on capital account

This account shows the summary of the difference between the receipt and payments on the investment (capital). Receipts are income from investments in foreign countries while payments are income on local investments by foreigners paid out of the country.

The capital inflow includes investments, loans and grants from foreign donors, while capital outflow includes dividends paid to the foreign investors, loan repayments, donations and grants to other countries.

In the account the payments are debited, while the receipts are credited. That is;

Dr                                                         capital account                                                       Cr

Payments

 

Receipts

 

The account may be;

  • In equilibrium i.e. if Dr = Cr
  • Unfavourable i.e. if Dr > Cr (-ve)
  • Favourable i.e. if Dr < Cr (+ve)

The combined difference on the receipts and payments on both the current and capital accounts is known as the overall balance of payments.

The official settlement account

This account records the financial dealings with other countries through the IMF. It is also called the foreign exchange transaction account, and is always expected to balance which a times may not be the case. That is;

  • Incase of surplus in the balance of payment, the central bank of that country creates a reserve with the IMF and transfer the surplus to the reserves account.
  • Incase of a deficit in the balance of payment, the central banks collect the reserves from the IMF to correct the deficit, and incase it did not have the reserves, the IMF advances it/give loan

 

Balance of payment disequilibrium

This occurs when there is either deficit or surplus in the balance of payments accounts. If there is surplus, then the country would like to maintain it because it is favourable, while if deficit, the country would like to correct it.

 

Causes of balance of payment disequilibrium

It may be caused by the following;

  • Fall in volume of exports, as this will reduce the earnings from exports leading to a deficit.
  • Deteriorating in the countries terms of trade. That is when the countries exports decreases in relation to the volume of imports, then her payments will higher than what it receives.
  • Increasing in the volume of import, especially if the export is not increasing at the same rate, then it will import more than it exports, leading to a disequilibrium
  • Restriction by trading partners. That is if the trading partners decides to restrict what they can import from the country to a volume lower than what the country import from them, it will lead to disequilibrium
  • Less capital inflow as compared to the out flow, as this may lead to a deficit in the capital account, which may in turn leads to disequilibrium.
  • Over valuation of the domestic currency. This will make the country’s export to very expensive as compared to their import, making it to lose market at the world market
  • Devaluation of the currency by the trading partner. This makes the value of their imports to be lower, enticing the country to import more from them than they can export to them.

 

 

 

 

Correcting the balance of payment disequilibrium

The measures that may be taken to correct this may include;

  • Devaluation of the country’s currency to encourage more exports than imports, discouraging the importers from importing more into the country.
  • Encouraging foreign investment in the country, so that it may increase the level of economic activities in the country, producing what can be consumed and even exported to control imports
  • Restricting the capital outflow from the country by decreasing the percentage of the profits that the foreigner can repatriate back to their country to reduce the outflow
  • Decreasing the volume of imports. This will save the country from making more payments than it receives. It can be done in the following ways;
  • Imposing or increasing the import duty on the imported goods to make them more expensive as compared to locally produced goods and lose demand locally
  • Imposing quotas/total ban on imports to reduce the amount of goods that can be imported in the country
  • Foreign exchange control. This allows the government to restrict the amount of foreign currencies allocated for the imports, to reduce the import rate
  • Administrative bottlenecks. The government can put a very long and cumbersome procedures of importing goods into the country to discourage some people from importing goods and control the amount of imports

 

  • Increasing the volume of exports. This enable the country to receive more than it gives to the trading partners, making it to have a favourable balance of payment disequilibrium. This can be done through;
  • Export compensation scheme, which allows the exporter to claim a certain percentage of the value of goods exported from the government. This will make them to charge their export at a lower price, increasing their demand internationally
  • Diversifying foreign markets, to enable not to concentrate only on one market that may not favour them and also increase the size of the market for their exports
  • Offering customs drawbacks. This where the government decides to refund in full or in part, the value of the custom duties that has been charged on raw materials imported into the country to manufacture goods for export
  • Lobbying for the removal of the trade restriction, by negotiating with their trading partners to either reduce or remove the barrier put on their exports

 

Terms of sales in international trade

Here the cost trading which includes the cost of the product, cost of transporting, loading, shipping, insurance, warehousing and unloading may be expensive. This makes some of the cost to be borne by the exporter, as some being borne by the importer. The price of the goods quoted therefore at the exporters premises should clearly explain the part of the cost that he/she is going to bear and the ones that the importer will bear before receiving his/her goods. This is what is referred to as the terms of sale

Terms of sales therefore refers to the price quotation that state the expenses that are paid for by the exporter and those paid for by the importer.

Some of the common terms include;

  • Loco price/ex-warehouse/ex-works. This states that the price of the goods quoted are as they are at the manufacturers premises. The rest of the expenses of moving the good up to the importers premises will be met by the importer
  • O.R (Free on Rail). This states that the price quoted includes the expenses of transporting the goods from the seller’s premises to the nearest railway station. Other railways charges are met by the importer
  • D (Delivered Docks)/Free Docks. This states that the price quoted covers the expenses for moving the goods from the exporter’s premises to the dock. The importer meets all the expenses including the dock charges
  • A.S (Free Along Ship). States that the price quoted includes the expenses from the exporter’s premises to the dock, including the loading expenses. Any other expenses are met by the importer
  • O.B (Free on Board). States that the price quoted includes the cost of moving the goods up to the ship, including loading expenses. The buyer meets the rest of the expenses
  • C&F (cost & freight). The price quoted includes the F.O.B as well as the shipping expenses. The importer meets the insurance charges
  • I.F (Cost Insurance & freight). The price includes the C&F, including the insurance expenses
  • The price includes all the expenses up to the port of destination as well as unloading charges
  • In Bond. The price quoted includes the expenses incurred until the goods reaches the bonded warehouse
  • Franco (Free of Expenses). The price quoted includes all the expenses up to the importer’s premises. The importer does not incur any other expenses other than the quoted price
  • N.O (Or Nearest Offer). This implies that the exporter is willing to accept the quoted price or any other nearest to the quoted one

 

Documents used in International trade

  • Enquiry/Inquiry. A letter sent by an importer to the exporter asking about the supply of the goods and the terms of sale.
  • Order of Indent. This asks the supplier to supply goods. It may specify the goods to be supplied and suggest the preferred mode of transport for them. An indent may be open or closed
  • Open Indent. Here the importer does not specify the supplier and the goods to be bought and therefore the exporter or export agent is free to choose the supplier
  • Closed Indent. Here the importer specifies the supplier and the goods to be bought
  • Letter of Credit. A document issued by the importers bank to the exporter’s bank to assure the exporter of the payment for the goods ordered. The exporter can then be paid by his bank on the basis of this letter.
  • Import Licence. A document issued by the country to allow the importer to buy goods from abroad.
  • Bill of Lading. A document of title to goods being exported issued by the shipping company to the importer who should use it to have goods released at the port of entry.
  • Freight Note. A document prepared by the shipping company to show the transportation charges for goods.
  • Certificate of insurance. A document issued by the insurance company or agent, undertaking to cover the risk against the loss or damage to goods being exported.
  • Certificate of Origin. A document that shows the country from which the goods are being imported have originated from.
  • Commercial Invoice. A document issued by the exporter to demand for the payment for the sold on credit to the importer.

It shows the following;

  • The name and address of the exporter
  • The name and the address of the importer
  • The price charged
  • The terms of sale
  • The description of the consignment
  • The name of the ship transporting the consignment
  • Consular Invoice. A document that shows that the prices of the goods that have been charged is fair as certified by the consul with the embassy of the exporting country.
  • Pro-forma Invoice. A document sent by the exporter to the importer if he/she is not willing to sell goods on credit. It may be used to serve the following purposes;
  • Serve as a formal quotation
  • Serve as a polite request for payment before the goods are released for the customer
  • To enable the importer to initiated the clearing of the custom duty early enough to avoid delays
  • Used to by the importer to obtain permission from the Central Bank to import goods
  • Airway Bill. Issued by the airline company to show the charges for the goods being transported
  • Letter of Hypothecation. A letter written by the exporter to his/her bank authorizing it to resell the goods being exported. This occurs if the bank fails to get payment on the bill of exchange drawn on the importer that it has discounted for the exporter. Should there be a deficit after the resale, the exporter pays the deficit
  • Weight note. A documents that shows the weight and other measurements of the goods being delivered at the dock
  • Shipping advice note. A document issued by the exporter to his/her shipping agent containing instruction for shipping goods.

 

 

INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS

Some of the institutions that play a role in international monetary system include;

  • International Monetary Fund (I.M.F)
  • African Development Bank (A.D.B)
  • African Development Fund (A.D.F)
  • International Bank For Reconstruction and Development (World Bank)

 

  • International Monetary Fund (I.M.F)

This bank operates like the central bank of the central banks of the member countries. Its objective includes the following;

  • Ensuring that the member country maintains a stable foreign exchange rates for their currencies. This it does by advising the country to raise or increase the supply of their currency to devalue them or increase their value internationally
  • Provide financial support to the member country to alleviate poverty and boost their income.
  • Relieving heavily indebted countries of debt repayment so that it can use that fund to raise the living standards of its people.
  • Providing funds to the member countries to finance the deficits in their balance of payment.
  • Provide forum through which the member country can consult and cooperate on matters concerning trade among them
  • Maintaining currency reserves of the different countries, enabling member countries to buy foreign exchange to be used to import goods and services.

 

  • African Development Bank (A.D.B)

This bank was formed to promote the economic and social progress of its regional member countries in Africa. It main source of finance is the members’ contributions and the interest charged on the money they lend members.

Its functions include;

  • Providing loans for economic and social development to member countries
  • Provide technical advice in planning and implementation of the development plans
  • Assist member country to appropriately exploit it resources
  • To encourage co-operation among African countries in order to bring economic growth
  • To co-operate with various economic institutions in order to bring about development especially in Africa countries

 

  • African Development Fund (A.D.F)

This was formed to provide long term financial assistance to the low income countries that cannot obtain loan from other financial institutions at the prevailing terms and condition. Their loans may recover a longer repayment periods with no interest except the commitment fees and service charge which is minimal. They fund activities, which includes;

  • Education and research activities
  • Offer technical advice to the member countries
  • International Bank For Reconstruction and Development (World Bank)

The World Bank was formed to carry out the following functions;

  • Giving loans to countries at very low interest rates to finance economic development activities.
  • Provision of grants to finance the provision of social amenities and basic infrastructural development in developing countries.
  • Fighting against corruption and poor governance which may lead to misuse of public funds in different countries.
  • Advancing money to countries to finance balance of payment deficit.
  • Giving advice on economic challenges that country may face.
  • Availing technical assistance and personnel to help countries run their economic programmes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ECONOMIC INTEGRATION

This occurs where two or more countries enter into a mutual agreement to cooperate with each other for their own economic benefit. They may do this by allowing free trade or relaxing their existing trade barriers for the member countries.

Economic integration may occur in the following forms;

  • Free Trade Area

This is a case where the member countries agree to abolish or minimize tariffs and other trade restrictions but the individual countries are free to impose restrictions on non-member countries. They includes; Preferential Trade Area (P.T.A), European Free Trade Area (E.F.T.A), Latin America Free Trade Area (L.A.F.T.A), etc.

  • Custom union

This is where the members of the free trade area may agree not only to abolish or minimize their tariffs, but also establish a common tariff for the exchange of goods and services with the non member countries. They include; Economic Community of West Africa States (E.C.O.W.A.S), East Africa Custom Union (E.A.C.U), Central Africa Custom and Economic Union (C.A.C.E.U)

  • Common Market

This is where the member countries allow for free movement of factors of production across the boarders. People are free to move and establish their business in any member country. They include; East Africa Common Market (E.A.C.M), European Economic Community (E.E.C), Central American Common Market (C.A.C.M), Common Market for Eastern and Southern Africa (COMESA)

  • Economic Union

This is where the members of the common market agree for put in place a common currency and a common central bank for the member countries. They even develop common infrastructures which includes railways, communication networks, common tariffs, etc

 

Importance of economic integration

Economic integration will ensure the following benefits for the member countries;

  • Availability of wider market for the goods and services produced by the member countries. This enables them to produce to their full capacity
  • It enables the country to specialize in the goods they produce best, making them to effectively utilize their resources
  • It leads to promotion of peace and understanding among the member countries through interaction
  • It leads to high quality of goods and services being produced in the country due to the competition they face
  • It allow members to get access to wider variety of goods and services which satisfy different consumer needs
  • It leads to creation of employment for individuals living within the region, as they can work in any of the member country
  • It increase the economic bargaining power in trading activities by the countries forming a trading bloc
  • Improvement of the infrastructure in the region due to increased economic activities.
  • It brings a bout co-ordination when developing industries, as the members will assign the industries to each other to create balance development and avoid unnecessary duplication

 

Free Trade Area

This is a situation where there is unrestricted exchange of goods and services between the countries. It has benefits/advantages similar to those of economic integration.

 

Disadvantages of free trade area

Some of the problems it is likely to bring include;

  • It may lead to importation of inferior goods and services to the country, as the member country may not be able to produce high quality as compare to other non-member countries
  • It may discourage the growth of the infant industries due to competition from well developed industries in other countries
  • It may lead to reduced government revenue because no tariff may be charged on the goods and services
  • A country may be tempted to adopt technology not suitable for its level of development.
  • If not controlled, it may lead to unfavourable balance of payment, where a country imports more than it export
  • It may lead to importation of harmful goods and services, that may affect the members health such as illegal drugs
  • It may lead to lack of employment opportunities especially where more qualified people have moved from their country to secure job opportunities in the country
  • It may expose the country to negative cultural practices in other countries, interfering with their morals. For example the exposure to the pornographic materials.
  • Compromising political ideologies especially where member countries with different ideologies wants to fit in to the bloc
  • It may lead to over exploitation of non-renewable economic resources such as minerals

 

Trade Restrictions

These are deliberate measures by the government to limit the imports and exports of a country. They are also known as protectionism and includes the following;

  • Tariffs which include taxes levied on both import and export. It can be used to increase or decrease the level of both import and export
  • Quotas which is the restriction on the quantity of goods to be either imported or exported. It can be increased or decreased to increase or decrease the level of import or export respectively.
  • Total ban (zero quota) where the government issues a direction illegalizing either the import or export of the products
  • Complicated import procedure in order to discourage some importers from importing
  • Subsidies on locally produced goods to discourage imports
  • Legislation against importation of certain goods
  • Setting the standards of products to be imported

 

Reasons for trade restrictions

  • To prevent the inflow of harmful goods into the country, that may be harmful to the lives of the citizens
  • To protect the local infant industries that may not be able to compete favourably with well established industry
  • To give a country a chance to exploit its natural resources in producing their goods
  • To protect strategic industry, since their collapse may make the country to suffer
  • To minimize dependency of the country to other countries for their stability
  • To create employment opportunity to its people by establishing the industries to produce the goods and services
  • To prevent dumping of goods in the country by the developed partners which may create unfair competition
  • To correct balance of payment deficit by limiting import
  • To protect good cultural and social values which may be influenced by unaccepted values they are likely to acquire from other country through interaction
  • To expand market for locally produced goods by restricting the number of foreign goods in the market.
  • To enable the country earn foreign exchange through imposing taxes and other tariffs

 

Advantages of trade restrictions

  • It promotes self reliance as industries have an opportunity to engage in the production of goods and services that were previously imported
  • It protects the local industries from stiff competition that they may have faced from the well developed countries
  • It may help to correct the balance of payment deficit
  • It restrict the entry of harmful goods into the country as it controls the inflow of imports in to the country
  • It enables the country to conserve their valuable social and cultural values from the external influence
  • It help in creating more job opportunities through diversification in the production
  • It promotes the growth of local/infant industries in the country.

 

Disadvantages of trade restriction

  • There will be availability of limited variety of goods in the country that will limit the consumer’s choices
  • May lead to production of low quality goods as there will be no competition for the producing firms
  • Other countries may also retaliate, leading to reduction in export from their country
  • There is likely to be high prices charged on the locally produced goods, since the small firms which produce them may not be enjoying the economies of scale
  • The country is likely to be exposed to small market, should all countries restrict which may lead to reduction in trade.
  • As a result of the continued protection, some industries may develop a tendency of remaining young to still enjoy the protection, which limits the level of development
  • It may lead to emergence of monopoly as the protected industry may end up remaining alone in the market, bringing about the problems of monopolies

 

Trends in International Trade

  • Liberalization that has led to removal of many trade restriction among the countries, increasing the levels of trade
  • Development of E-Banking which has enable the international trader to get access to their bank accounts from wherever they are in
  • Development of export processing zones (EPZ) by the government to allow the industries involved just concentrate in the exported goods only. It enable the country enjoy the following benefits (advantages of EPZ)
  • It creates job opportunities to the citizens
  • It creates market for locally produced raw materials that they use in their production
  • It encourage the foreign investors to invest in the countries, i.e. in the processing zones, increasing the level of investment in the country
  • Encourages export in the country as the incentives given to them by the government makes them to produce more and more for export
  • It stimulates industrialization in the country in all sector including the ones producing for local consumptions

However EPZ’s have the following problems/disadvantages

  • Most of them employs foreigners in their management team, denying the locals a chance to get employed
  • They do not generate revenue to the government, especially during tax free periods
  • They are concentrated in few towns, bringing about imbalance regional development
  • Some of them encourages social evils such as prostitution in areas where they are developed
  • Development of e-commerce/website trading which has promoted the selling and buying of items through the internet, with payments made online.

E-commerce has the following benefits/advantages:

  • One is able to access the market world wide, as the countries are connected to the internet
  • There is no discrimination, as both the small and large industries are able to transact through the internet
  • It is fast to transact the business through internet, as it saves on travelling time and therefore suitable for urgent transaction
  • It is cheap especially on the cost of sending, receiving and storing information
  • It is easy for firms to share valuable information about production

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT AND PLANNING

 

Economic Growth

This is the increase in the productivity of a country which can be seen in the continued increase in the national income over a period of years.

It can be measured by taking the average percentage of increase in national income over a period of time (number of years) and be assumed to be the average rate of economic growth in the country

 

Economic Development

This is the quantitative change or increase in a country’s national income over the years, accompanied by favorable changes in the structures within the country that leads to general improvement of the individual well being, as well as the entire nation

A country may experience economic growth without experiencing economic development. This is because the increase in the national income may be as a result of people working for long hours without any time for rest, recreation and other development to occur in their body. This will make them not to have better living, despite the fact that the national income shall have increased.

The expected structural changes to be realized in a case of economic development include;

  • Shifting from depending on agricultural sector to manufacturing sector in the economy
  • Reducing illiteracy levels
  • Increase in skilled manpower in the economy
  • Improvement in health facilities within the country
  • Increase in technology and improvement of entrepreneurial ability
  • Increase and improvement of institution that handles new methods of productive economic activities

Outline the differences that exist between economic growth and economic development

Economic Growth Economic Development
·   An increase in size of the country’s National income ·     An increase in the size and quality of the country’s National income
·     Number of people living in absolute poverty can increase despite the increase in national income ii) Number of people living in absolute poverty does not increase
iii)Increase in national income could be due to increase in income of only few people ·     Increase in national income is attributed to general increase of incomes of majority of the people in the country
·     No tendency to bridge the gap between the rich and the poor iv)Tends to bridge the gap between the rich and the poor

 

Underdevelopment

This refers to a situation whereby the economic growth is in the negative direction (decreasing) accompanied by uneven distribution of wealth and decrease in quality and quantity of the factors of production available

 

Characteristics of Underdevelopment

  • High level of poverty. This is characterized by most of the people in the country depending on mainly subsistence, or lives below the poverty levels. Their per capita income is lower as compared to the developed countries
  • High disparity in income distribution. The income in this countries are not evenly distributed with the few rich people earning so much while the poor majority earns so little
  • Low levels of savings and investments. They have very little if at all exist to save and invest for their further development, making them to continue being poor. This is well illustrated in the vicious circle of poverty
  • High population growth rates. This is due to some of them not being able to afford, ignorant about or simply refusing to use the modern birth control methods since they find consolation on their high number of children
  • Dominance of subsistence sector. This is due to their inability to raise capital for indirect production
  • Problem of unemployment. The high population growth rate leads to high supply of labour that the country’s economy cannot afford to absorb all, leading to unemployment
  • Under utilization of natural resources. This may be due to lack of capital in this countries or in appropriate technology they use
  • Dependence on the developed countries. This is due to their in ability to sustain themselves financially, which makes them keep on calling upon the developed partners for financial assistance
  • Poor infrastructure. Their roads and communication networks are not properly maintained due to the in availability of adequate resources to improve them

 

Goals of Economic Development

The following are the changes that economic development seeks to put in place, which in Kenya they have been joined together in what is referred to as the millennium development goals. They includes

  • Eradicate extreme poverty and hunger
  • Achieve universal primary education
  • Promote gender equality and empower women
  • Reduce child mortality
  • Improve maternal health
  • Combat HIV/AIDS, malaria and other diseases
  • Ensure environmental sustainability
  • Develop a global partnership for development

Some includes

  • Reducing income disparity in distributions
  • Reducing unemployment
  • Provision of important basic needs such as food, shelter, etc

 

Factor which may hinder development in a country

The rate of a country’s economic development may be influenced negatively by the following factors

  • Low natural resource endowment. Absence or inadequacy of natural resources such as raw materials, fertile land for agriculture, etc may slow the pace of the country’s economic development
  • Inadequate capital. This reduces the rate at which they exploit their natural resources, or produce in the economy
  • Poor technology used. The traditional methods of production that they use cannot sustain their requirement any more
  • Poor human resource endowment. Their inability to train adequate skilled manpower together with their inappropriate system of education leads to their slow development
  • Unfavorable domestic environment. Their political, social and economic institutions within their countries are not structured to favour economic development. For example
  • Their political system is characterized by corruption, authoritarian kind of leadership with lengthy procedures and bureaucratic controls that scares the investors
  • Their social environment is still full of outdated or retrogressive cultural values and negative attitude towards work and investment, leading to slow development
  • Their Economic institutions has allowed their markets to be influenced so much that that leads to interference in their smooth operations

 

Development Planning

This is the process through which the country establishes their objectives to be achieved, identify the resources that will be required and put in place the strategies or methods of acquiring the resources and achieving their pre-determined objectives.

In most cases their objectives or goals are the goals of economic development

The plan will prioritize the objectives to be achieved and even brake it down in to targets that if achieved with the planned strategy and resources, the objective shall have been achieved.

 

Need for economic planning

It enhances the following

  • Appropriate resource allocation, where resources are allocated according to the need of the objective and in a most productive way
  • Stimulation of effort of people in the desired direction. The plan outlines including the possible outcomes which persuade people to move to that direction
  • Support foreign aid bargain. Since it shows including the objective that the country seeks to achieve, it is capable of convincing the donor to finance it in the country
  • Project evaluation, by assisting on checking whether the predetermined targets or objectives are being achieved
  • Long term decision making, as it will show what each and every sector of the economy will require in the future to make it stable.
  • Avoiding duplication of industries in different parts of the country, for it will show the ones that have been set in those parts and even enhance balancing
  • Promote balancing in regional development by ensuring that they are not concentrated in only one region, ignoring other regions

 

Problems encountered in development planning

 

Problems at the planning stage

  • Lack of accurate or detailed data for planning. This may lead to in appropriate plan being developed, as it entirely depends on the quality and availability of the data
  • Existence of large subsistence sector, which make the planning unrealistic
  • Lack of qualified personnel to assist in planning. This may make the country to rely on foreign experts who do not fully understand the country
  • Problem of the private sector which will always require incentives for them to follow the plan
  • Transfer of inappropriate development plan. As some planners may simply borrow a plan that they feel may have worked for a given country, yet the condition in those countries may not be the same

 

Problems at the implementation stage

  • Over reliance on donor funding, which if they don’t receive, the plan may not be implemented
  • Lack of domestic resources such as skilled personnel, finance and capital may make the implementation a problem
  • Failure to involve the local people in planning. This will make them not to be willing to implement it, for they will not be understanding it or rebelling for the fact that they were not included
  • Natural calamities such as diseases, floods, drought, etc may make the funds that had been set a side for implementation be diverted to curb them
  • Over-ambitious plans which are a times just made to impress the donors to release their funds but may not be easy to implement
  • Lack of co-operation among the executing parties which may make the work not to kick off. For example a conflict between the ministry of finance and that of planning of the amount to be released
  • Inflation which may make the estimated value of implementation not to be adequate, bringing a problem of finances
  • Lack of political will and commitment in implementing the plan. This may frustrate the implementation.

HOME SCIENCE FORM 2 SCHEMES OF WORK

HOME SCIENCE FORM 2 SCHEMES OF WORK

 

HOME SCIENCE  FORM 2 SCHEMES OF WORK 

WEEK LESSON TOPIC/SUB

TOPIC

OBJECTIVES TEACHING AID TEACHING ACTIVITY REFERENCE REMARKS
1 3&4 Laundry process.

Repair of clothes & house hold articles.

  • Importance.
  • Factors that determine the repair method.
By the end of the lesson the leaner should be able to
  • Identify laundry process.
  • Explain the various laundry processes.
  • Teacher – pupil discussions.
  • Book.
  • Chalk.
  • Board.
KLB fm 2

H/science.

Pg 52-55

 
2 1 Darning.

·        Rules

·        Darning different

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to

·        Darn

·        A straight cut

·        A three cornered cut.

·        Discussion
  • Working of samples.
  • Fabrics.
  • Sewing tools.
  • Threads.
  • Books.

 

KLB Fm 2

H/science.

Pg 57-62

 
2&3 Types of tears cuts By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • a diagonal cut
  • a circular hole in a woven fabric.
  • A hole in a knitted fabric.
  • Machine darning
  • Reinforcing thin place
       
  4 Patenting
  • Rules
  •  Types.
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • State rules of patching
  • Identify types of patches

 

  • Discussion
  • Working of samples
  • Fabrics
  • Sewing  tool
  • Threads
  • Books
KLB Fm 2

H/science

Pg 62-66

 
3 1 Working Work patches        
  2&3 Repairing

·        Hanging hems

·        Gasping seams

·        Replacing buttons.

·        Belt loops.

·        Button holes.

·        Working of samples

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to.
  • Explain the repair of hanging hems gasping seams, belt loops, and button holes & replacing buttons.

 

·        Discussion

·        Working of sample.

·        Garments requiring repair.

·        Books

·        Chalk

·        Board.

   
4 4 Laundering different fabrics. By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to

·        Write the methods that are used for laundering different fabrics.

 

·        Discussion & note taking ·        Groups

·        Note books

KLB fm 2 pg 71-77.  
5 1 Care labels.
  • Importance symbols & interpretation.
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to

·        State the importance of care labels.

·        Identify symbols used on care labels & interpret them

·        Drawing

·        Discussion

·        Charts.

·        Books

·        Chalk

KLB fm 2 H/science Pg 77-82.  
  2-4 Sundering different fabrics.

·        Cotton.

·        Woolen

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • launder different fabrics
  • Practical laundry in groups
·        Laundry equip & materials.

·        Garments

KLB fm 2 pg 71-77  
  2&3 Repairing

·        Hanging hems

·        Gasping seams

·        Replacing buttons.

·        Belt loops.

·        Button holes.

·        Working of samples

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to.

·        Explain the repair of hanging hems gasping seams, belt loops, and button holes & replacing buttons.

 

·        Discussion

·        Working of sample.

·        Garments requiring repair.

·        Books

·        Chalk

·        Board.

   
4 4 Laundering different fabrics. By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to

·        Write the methods that are used for laundering different fabrics.

 

·        Discussion & note taking ·        Groups

·        Note books

KLB fm 2 pg 71-77.  
5 1 Care labels.

·        Importance

·        symbols &

·        Interpretation.

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to

·        State the importance of care labels.

·        Identify symbols used on care labels & interpret them

·        Drawing

·        Discussion

·        Charts.

·        Books

·        Chalk

KLB fm 2 H/science Pg 77-82.  
  2-4 Sundering different fabrics.

·        Cotton.

·        Woolen

 

-By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • launder different fabrics
  • Practical laundry in groups
·        Laundry equip & materials.

·        Graments

KLB fm 2 pg 71-77 2-4
6 1&2 Laundering Different fabrics

·        Loosed coloured.

·        Woolens

·        Silks

·        Nylons

·        Acylics

·        Polyster

By the end  of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • Explain the difference in handling fast colored and loosely colored cottons.
·        Teacher – pupil discussions.

·        Note taking.

 

·        Text books

·        Note books

Focus fm 2 Pg 42-46  
  3&4 ·        General rules for ironing.

·        General rules for pressing.

·        Care labels.

By the end  of the lesson the learner should be able to

·        State rules for ironing and pressing.

·        Explain care labels.

·        Teacher pupil

·        Discussions

·        Pictures.

·        Books

Focus fm 2 pg 46-50.  
7 1&2 Special treatment in laundry work.

·        Defination.

·        Stain removal.

·        Disnifection

By the end  of the lesson the learner should be able to

·        State factors to consider while removing stains.

·        Define stain removal & disinfection.

·        State methods of disinfection.

·        Teacher – pupil

·        Discussions

Text books

·        B.B.

·        Chalk

Focus fm 2 pg 51-53  

 

  3&4 Fixing colour starching.

·        Blueing

·        Valeting

·        Dry cleaning

·        Sponging

·        Fabric. Conditioning.

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to prepare starch.

·        Identify types of starch.

·        Explain valeting dry cleaning, sponging and fixing of colour.

·        Teacher – pupil

·        Discussion

·        Books

·        Chalk

·        B.B

Focus fm 2 pg 53-55  
8 1-4 Practical

·        Cottons

·        Woolens

·        Nylons

·        Tcylres

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to prepare starch
  • Laundering and special treatment.
  • Laundering and treat different fabrics correctly.
       
9 1-4 Storage of clothes & household articles. By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to prepare starch

·        Identify storage facilities.

·        Explain methods of storing clothes.

·        Practical hanging /folding.

·        Teacher learner discussions.

·        Clothes.

·        Hangers.

·        Assorted facilities.

KLB fm 2

Pg 103

 

 

10 1&2 ·        Seams

·        Types.

·        Choice of seams

·        Qualities of well made seams.

·        Points to note when making seams, plain seam.

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • Classify seams.

·        State the qualities of well made seams.

·        Explain factors in choice of seams.

·        Identify various types of plain seams.

 

·        Teacher – pupil

·        Discussions

·        Samples

·        Boards

·        Chalk

·        Board

Fm 2 KLB pg 141.  
  3&4 Working of pain seams

·        Open

·        Not open.

·        Neatening of edges.

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to

·        Work an open and plain seam that is nor open.

·        Neaten edges of a plain seam.

Practical working of seams and neatening. ·        Fabrics

·        Needles.

·        Threads.

·        Books.

Form 2 KLB pg 142-146  
11 1 French seam.

·        Uses.

·        Working

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to

·        Explain the uses of a French seam.

·        Work a French seam.

 

·        Working of samples.

·        Discussions.

·        Fabrics.

·        Needles.

·        Threads.

·        Books samples.

Fm 2 KLB pg 147-148  
  2&3 Double stitched seam.

·        Machine fell.

·        Run & fell.

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:-

·        Identify types of double stitched seam.

·        Work double –stitched seam.

·        Discussions.

·        Working samples

·        Fabrics.

·        Needles.

·        Threads

·        Samples

KLB fm2 pg 149  
  4 Overlaid seam By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to

·        State uses of an overlaid seam.

·        State advantages.

·        Work samples.

·        Working of samples ·        Fabrics.

·        Needles

·        Threads.

·        Samples.

KLB fm 2 pg 148  
12 1&2 Consumer buying.

·        Principles of wise buying.

·        Factors influencing consumer buying.

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:-

·        Define buying.

·        Explain the principles of wise buying.

·        State factors that influence consumer buying.

·        Books

·        Chalk

·        Board.

KLB fm 3 pg 166. Teacher pupil

Discussion.

 
  3&4 Common methods of buying. By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:-
  • Explain the commonly used methods of buying
·        Books.

·        Chalk

 

KLB  fm 3 pg 168 Teacher –pupil discussion.  
  1&2 Making a budget.

·        Definition.

·        Importance.

·        Steps

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • Define a budget.
  • State the importance of budgeting
  • Explain in budgeting
·        Sample budgets

·        Books.

KLB 3 PG 172 Teacher – pupil discussions.  
  3&4 Factors that may affect

– Sample budget.

 By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • Explain factors that may affect a budget.
  • Prepare a sample budget

 

·        Books.

·        Writing materials

KLB fm 3 pg 173 Each learner prepares a sample budget.  
13   Holiday assignment
14 1-4 REVISION AND END OF TERM

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

HOME SCIENCE  FORM 3 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 1

 

WEEK

 

LESSON

 

TOPIC/SUB TOPIC

 

OBJECTIVES

 

LEARNING/ TEACHING ACTIVITIES

 

TEACHING AID

 

REF

 

REMARKS

1 1-4
  • REPORTNG
  • REVISION OF SERIES 3 EXAM 1

 

2 1 Maternal child health care
  • Antenatal care
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;
  • Define antenatal care
  • Explain activities at antenatal clinics
  • State importance of antenatal care

 

  • Teacher-learner discussions
  • Note taking
  • Books
  • Chalk
  • -Board
KLB fm 3 pg 41-43

 

 
2 Maternal child health care
  • Factors that affect normal foetal development
  • Developmental stages of foetus

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;
  • Explain the stages of growth of a foetus
  • Explain factors that affect normal foetal development
  • Teacher-learner discussions
  • Note taking
  • Pictures
  • Books
  • -Board
H/sc by EAEP pg 57  
3-4 Maternal child health care – preparing for delivery
  • Post-natal care
  • Care of lactating mother
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;
  • Explain the preparation for delivery
  • Define post-natal care
  • Give the importance of post-natal care

 

  • Teacher-learner discussions

 

  • Pictures
  • Books

 

H/sc by EAEP pg 64 KLB fm 3 pg 43 Focus fm 3 pg 53

 

 
3 1 Immunization
  • Definition
  • Importance
  • Immunization chart
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;
  • Define immunization
  • Identify common vaccines
  • Teacher-pupil discussions
  • Charts
  • Cards
  • Resource
  • -personnel
H/sc KLB pg 50  
  2 Childhood diseases and ailments
  • Respiratory

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;
  • State signs and symptoms and management of respiratory tract infections
  • Teacher-pupil discussions
  • Books
  • Resource
  • persons
H/sc EAEP pg 78  
3-4 Childhood diseases and ailments – influenza(B)
  • Measles
  • Pneumonia
  • Tetanus
  • Vomiting
  • Hepatitis

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;
  • State the signs, prevention and management of each disease
  • Teacher-pupil discussions
  • Books
  • Resource
  • persons
H/sc by EAEP pg 80  
4 1 Childhood diseases and ailments
  • Mumps
  • Chicken pox
  • Diarrhoea
  • Diptheria

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;
  • State signs, prevention and management of each disease
  • Teacher-pupil discussions
  • Books
  • Resource
  • persons
H/sc EAEP pg 83  
2 Breastfeeding
  • Importance/ advantages and disadvantages
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;
  • State the advantages and disadvantages of breastfeeding
  • Teacher-learner discussions

 

  • Books
  • Board
H/sc KLB pg 55  
3-4 Problems related to breastfeeding
  • -Supplementary feeding
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;
  • Explain problems related to breastfeeding
  • State advantages and disadvantages of supplementary feeding
  • Teacher-learner discussions

 

  • Pictures
  • Books
H/sc KLB pg 56  
5 1 Weaning
  • Definition
  • Importance
  • Factors to consider

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;
  • Define weaning
  • State importance of weaning
  • Explain factors to consider when weaning
  • Discussions
  • Note taking
  • Books
H/sc fm 3 pg 63  
  2
  • Choice and preparation of weaning foods
  • Dangers of too early/too late weaning

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;
  • State the dangers of weaning too early or too late
  • Writing of recipes and menus
  • Discussion
  • Sample menus
  • Books
KLB fm 3 pg 68  
3-4 Practical on weaning dishes

 

6 1-2 Habit training
  • Play and play things

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;
  • Explain the importance of habit training and play
  • State the types of play
  • Make toys
  • Note taking
  • Discussion
  • Materials for toys
  • Books
KL fm 3 pg 71  
3-4 Construction of apron
  • Taking body measurements
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;
  • Take measurements for apron
  • Learners take measurements in pairs
  • Tape measures
  • Writing materials
Fm 2 KLB pupils book pg 152-154 KLB teachers guide

 

 
  Drafting pattern for apron By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to draft a pattern for apron
  • Learners work in groups
  • Blown paper
  • Writing materials
Fm 2 KLB pg 159-165 fm 2 teachers guide

 

 
7 1 Revision of the series 3 exam 3

 

2 Preparation of fabric
  • Graining
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to grain fabric for apron

 

  • Each learner works on own fabric
  • Fabrics
  • Scissors

 

Fm 2 KLB pupils book pg 165  
  3-4 Preparation of fabric
  • Pressing
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to press his fabric

 

  • Each learner presses his own fabric
  • Fabric
  • Pressing equipment
Fm 2 KLB pupils book pg 165  
8 1-2
  • Laying out of pattern pieces before cutting
  • Cutting
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;
  • Lay out pattern pieces
  • Cut out fabric for apron
  • Each learner lays out and cuts own fabric
  • Fabrics
  • Patterns
  • Pins
  • Scissors
Fm 2 KLB pupils book pg 165-166

 

 
  3-4 Transfer of pattern markings By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;
  • Identify methods of transferring pattern markings
  • Transfer pattern marking onto fabric

 

  • Discussions
  • Demonstration
  • Transfer of markings into fabric by each learner
  • Fabric (art)
  • Patterns
  • Sewing tools
KLB fm pg 202-203  
9 1 Stitching up of apron
  • Neck and waist bands

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to stitch up neck and waist bands
  • Each learner stitches up his apron
  • Neck bands
  • Waist bands
  • Needles
  • Threads
KLB fm 2 pupils book pg 167  
2 Stitching up of apron
  • Sides

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to stitch up the sides of his apron
  • Each learner works on own apron
  • Apron pieces
  • Sewing tools
KLB fm 2 pg 167  
3-4 Stitching up of apron
  • Hem
  • Attaching bands
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to stitch up
  • Hem
  • Neck and waist bands

 

  • Each learner works on own apron
  • Apron pieces
  • Sewing tools
KLB fm 2 pg 167  
10 1-4 Stitching up of apron
  • Pockets
  • Trimmings

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • Prepare and attach pocket to apron
  • Attach trimmings to apron
  • Each learner works on own apron
  • Apron
  • Pocket
  • Trimmings
  • Sewing tools
KLB fm 2 pg 167

 

 
11 1 Meal planning and management
  • Definition
  • Importance
  • Factors to consider

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • Define meal planning
  • State the importance of meal planning
  • Explain factors to consider when planning meals

 

  • Teacher-pupil discussions
  • Note takings
  • Note books
  • Chalks
  • Board
Focus H/sc fm 3 pg 1  
2-3
  • Types of meals
  • Menu planning

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • Identify types of meals
  • Define menu
  • Plan variety of menus

 

  • Teacher-pupil discussions
  • Drawing up of menus

 

  • Sample menus
  • Books
  • Chalk
  • Board
H/sc fm 3 by EAEP pg 3  
4 Food presentation
  • Points to note
  • Styles of meal service
  • State factors to note when presenting meals
  • Explain styles of meal service
  • Teacher-pupil discussions
  • Note takings
  • Pictures
  • Books
Focus H/sc fm 3 pg 17-20  
12 1-3 Table setting
  • Requirements
  • Points to note
  • Practical table setting

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • Identify requirements for table setting
  • State points to note
  • Set a table for a meal

 

  • Teacher-pupil discussions
  • Practical table setting
  • Tables
  • Requirements for table setting
  • Books
Focus fm 3 pg 20  
4
  • Garnishing and decorating food
  • Table etiquette

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • Differentiate garnishing from food decoration
  • State etiquette to be observed at table

 

  • Teacher-pupil discussions

 

  • Pictures
  • Books
Focus fm 3 pg 24-25  
13 1-4 REVISION    END OF TERM
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

HOME SCIENCE  FORM 3 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 2

WK LESSON TOPIC/SUBTOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES TEACHING AID REFERENCE(S) REMARKS
1 1-2 Reporting/ Holiday assignment
  3-4 Flour mixtures and raising agents
  • Types of flour
  •  Types of flour mixtures
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • Identify types of flours
  • Classify flour mixtures
  • Teacher-pupil discussions
  • Books
  • Chalk
  • Board
Focus form 3 pg 87-89  
2 1 Raising agents
  • Defination
  • Use of air
  • Use of steam
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • Define raising agents
  • Explain use of air and steam as raising agents
  • Teacher –pupil discussions
  • Books
  • Chalk
  • Board
Form 3 KLB pg 77-78 2
  2
  • Carbon dioxide as a raising agent
  • Biological method of raising flour mixtures
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • Explain the use of carbon dioxide as a raising agent
  • -Explain the biological method of raising flour mixtures
  • Teacher – pupil discussions
  • -Books
  • Chalks
  • Assorted agents

 

KLB form 3 pg 79-80  
  3-4 Batters
  • Defination
  • Recipes
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • Explain batters
  • Identify recipes that use batters
  • Teacher –pupil discussions
  • Recipe writing
  • Recipe books
  • Chalk
  • Board
Form 3 H/science by EAEP pg  
3 1-2 Pastry making
  • General rules
  • Types
  • Recipes
  • Common faults and causes
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • Identify types of pastries
  • Explain common problems and their causes in pastry making
  • Teacher –pupil discussions
  • Recipe writing
  • Recipe books
  • Chalk
  • Board
H/science

EAEP pg 84-87

3
  3-4 Cake making
  • Ingredients
  • Preparation of cake tins
  • Testing if cooked
  • Cooling cakes
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • State and explain the importance of ingredients used in cake making
  • Prepare cake tins
  • Explain the methods of testing cakes for doheriss
  • Explain how to cool cakes
  • Practical preparation of cake tins -Discussion
  • Cake tins
  • Oil and brushes
  • Books
H/science by EAEP form3 pg 117-119  
4 1
  • -Rubbed in cakes
  • -Creamed cakes
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • Explain the making of rubbed in mixtures
  • Identify faults in making of rubbed in cakes and creamed cakes
  • Teacher-pupil discussions
  • Recipe writing
  • Books
  • Chalks
  • Board
H/science by EAEP pg 120-127 4
  2 Bread and doughnut
  • Ingredients
  • Recipe
  • Method
  • Common faults and causes
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • Explain the method of making bread / doughnuts
  • State common faults and their causes

 

 

 

  • Teacher-pupil discussions
  • Recipe writing
  • Books
  • Chalk
  • Board
H/science by EAEP pg 128-132  
5 1 Practical on

Creamed cake

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • Prepare creamed mixtures correctly

 

  • Demonstrations
  • Practice in groups

 

  • Ingredients
  • Kitchen equipment
  • Recipes

 

Recipes

 

Books

5
  2
  • Biscuit mixtures
  • General guidelines
  • Recipes
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • -State guidelines in making
  • -Teacher –pupil discussions
  • -Recipe writing

 

  • -Chalk
  • -Board
  • -Recipe books
KLB form 3 pg 105  
  3-4 Practical on
  • Batters
  • Rubbed in cakes
  • Demonstrations
  • Practice the preparation of each in group
  • Kitchen equipment
  • Recipes
  • Food stuffs
Recipe

 

Books

 
6 1
  • Pleats
  • Types
  • Working
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • Identify types of pleats
  • Work different pleats
  • Teacher-pupil discussions
  • Work of samples
  • Samples
  • Books
  • Chalk
  • Board
  • Sewing equipment machine
H/science KLB pg 112 6
  2 Management of fullness
  • Defination
  • Importance
  • Darts
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;
  • -Define management of fullness
  • -State the importance of managing fullness
  • -Identify types of darts
  • Teacher-pupil discussions
  • Working of samples
  • Samples
  • Books
  • Chalk
  • Board
  • Sewing equipment and tools
H/science KLB pg 109  
  3-4 Disposal of fullness
  • Tucks
  • Gathers
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • Name types of tucks
  • Explain the working of tucks and gathers

 

  • Discussions
  • Working of samples
  • Samples
  • Fabrics
  • Sewing equipment and tools
H/science KLB form 3 pg 115  
7 1-2
  • Easing
  • Shirring
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to
  • Work easing and shirring
  • Discussions
  • Work of samples
  • Samples
  • Fabrics
  • Sewing equipment and tools
H/science KLB form 3 pg  
3-4 MID-TERM BREAK

 

8 1-2 Disposal of fullness
  • Smocking
  • Elastic
By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;
  • Work smocking and elastic
   

 

  8

 

 

 

 

 

3-4 construction of apron
  • taking body measurements
By the end of the lesson, the Learner should be able to take measurements for apron
  • Learners take measurements in pairs
  • Tape measures
  • writing materials
Form 2 KLB pupils  BK pg152-154

-KLB Teachers guide

 
9 1-4 Drafting pattern for apron By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to draft a pattern for apron
  • Learners work in groups
  • Brown paper
  • writing materials
Form 2 KLB PG 159-165

-form 2 teachers guide.

 
10 1 Revision of

 Series 1 exam

  2-3 Preparation fabric
  • Graining
By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to  grain fabric for apron
  • Each learner works on own fabric
  • Fabrics
  • scissors
Form 2 KLB pupils BK pg 165  
 

 

11

4

 

1

Preparation of fabric pressing By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to press his fabric
  • Each learner presses his own fabric
  • Fabric pressing equipment
 Form 2 KLB pupils BK pg 165  
  2-4 Laying out of pattern pieces before cutting By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to lay out pattern pieces
  • cut out fabric for apron
  • Each learner ays out and cuts own fabric
  • fabrics
  • patterns
  • pins
  • scissors
KLB F2  pupils BK pg 165-166  

 

12 1-2 Transfer of pattern markings The learner should be able to  identify methods of transferring pattern markings
  • transfer pattern markings out of fabric
  • Discussions
  • demonstrations
  • transfer of markings into fabric b each learner
  • Fabrics[cut]
  • patterns
  • sewing tools
KLB F 1 pg 202-203  
  3-4 Stitching up apron
  • neck and waist bands
By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to stitch up neck and waist bands
  • Each leaner stitches up his own
  • Neck bands
  • waist bands
  • needles
  • threads
KLB F 2 pg 167  
13 1-2 Stitching up  of apron
  • sides
By the end of the lesson, the learner should  be able to stitch up the sides of his apron
  • Each learner works on own apron
  • Apron pieces
  • -sewing tools
KLB F 2 pg 167  
  3-4 Revision and end of term

Holiday assignment

 

AGRICULTURE SCHEMES OF WORK FORM 1-4 (EDITABLE)

AGRICULTURE FORM 1 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 1

 

WEEK

LESSON

TOPIC

SUB-TOPIC

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

TEACHING/LEARNING

ACTIVITIES

TEACHING/LEARNING

RESOURCES

REFERENCES

REMARKS

 
 

4

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

 

Introduction to Agriculture

 

 

Definition and branches of Agriculture

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define Agriculture

·        State main branches of Agriculture

 

·        Definition of Agriculture

·        Giving examples

·        Use of questions and answers

·        Note taking

 

·        Charts

·        Tree diagrams

·        Students book

·        Chalk board

·        handouts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 1-3

·        Certificate Agriculture F1 pg 1-3

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 1-5

Teachers guide pg 37

·        Golden tips KCSE Agriculture pg 4-5

·        Top mark Agric Pg 2-2

   
   

2-3

 

Introduction to Agriculture

 

·        Crop farming

·        Livestock farming

·        Agricultural economics and engineering

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State various types of crop and animal farming

·        Describe various types of crop and animal farming

·        Explain agricultural economics and engineering

 

·        Giving descriptions of crops and animals

·        Explanations

·        Note taking

 

·        Photographs

·        Charts

·        Students book

·        Chalk board

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 3-5

·        Certificate F1 Agriculture pg 3

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 2-6

Teachers guide pg 37

·        Golden tips KCSE Agriculture pg 5-6

·        Top mark Revision pg 2-4

   
 

5

 

1

 

Introduction to Agriculture

 

Systems of farming

Extensive

Intensive

Small scale

Large scale

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State and describe farming systems

·        State and explain the advantages and disadvantages of each system

 

·        Asking questions

·        Answering questions

·        Describing farming systems

·        Stating advantages and disadvantages of each

·        Note taking

 

·        Student’s book

·        Charts

·        Diagrams

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 5

·        Certificate F1 pg 5-7

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 6-9

Teachers guide pg 38

·        Golden tips KCSE Agriculture pg 6-7

·        Top mark Revision pg 3

   
   

2-3

 

Introduction to Agriculture

 

Methods of faming

–        Mixed

–        Nomadic

–        Shifting

–        Organic

–        agro forestry

 

By the end of the lesson ,the learner should be able to

·        identify various methods of farming

·        explain the various methods

 

·        explanations of the methods

·        identification of methods

·        note taking

 

·        photographs

·        livestock product

·        charts

·        chalkboard

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 6-8

·        Certificate F1 pg 7-10

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 9-12

Teachers guide pg 39

·        Golden tips KCSE Agriculture pg 7-8

·        Top mark Revision pg 4-5

   
 

6

 

1

 

Introduction to Agriculture

 

Role of Agriculture in the economy

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State and explain the roles of agriculture in economy

 

·        Explaining the roles of Agriculture in the economy

·        Appreciating the importance of Agriculture

·        Note taking

 

·        Raw Materials

·        Flow charts

·        Specimen on produce

·        Industrial goods

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 8-9

·        Certificate F1 pg 3-4 Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 9-12

Teachers guide pg 39

·        Golden tips KCSE Agriculture pg 7-8

·        Top mark Revision pg 5

   
   

2-3

 

Factors influencing agriculture

 

Human factors

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State and explain human factors influencing agriculture

 

·        Explaining the human factors influencing agriculture

 

·        Charts with HIV data

·        Photographs on means of transport

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 11-15

·        Certificate F1 pg 11-12

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 16-21

Teachers guide pg 43-44

·        Golden tips KCSE Agriculture pg 7-8

·        Top mark Revision pg 7

   
 

7

 

1

 

Climatic factors

 

Factors influencing Agriculture

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify and explain the biotic factors influencing agriculture

 

·        Explaining the biotic factors

·        Identify the factors

 

·        Weather

·        Station equipment

·        Maps in students books

·        Maps showing rainfall distribution

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 16-17

·        Certificate F1 pg 20

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 21-24

Teachers guide pg 43-45

·        Golden tips KCSE Agriculture pg 7-8

·        Top mark Revision pg 7

 

   
   

2-3

 

Factors influencing Agriculture

 

Climatic factors

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State climatic factors

·        Describe how climatic factors influence Agriculture

 

·        Stating climatic factors

·        Describing how climatic factors influence agriculture

 

·        Weather

·        Station equipment

·        Maps in students books

·        Maps showing rainfall distribution

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 18-21

·        Certificate F1 pg 13-129

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 24-32

Teachers guide pg 46

 

   
 

8

 

1

 

Factors influencing Agriculture

 

Edaphic Factors

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define soil

·        Describe soil formation processes

 

·        Defining soil

·        Describing soil formation processes

 

·        Soil samples

·        Diagrams in students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 22-29

·        Certificate F1 pg 21-26

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 33-38

Teachers guide pg 47

·        Golden tips KCSE Agriculture pg 7-8

·        Top mark Revision pg 9-10

 

   
   

2-3

 

Factors influencing Agriculture

 

Soil profile

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to describe the soil profile

Explain its influence on crop production

 

·        Describing soil profile

·        Explaining its influence on crop production

 

·        Diagrams in students books

·        Excavated areas charts showing soil profile

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 22-29

·        Certificate F1 pg 21-26

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 33-38

Teachers guide pg 47

·        Top mark Revision pg 9-10

 

   
 

9

 

1

 

Factors influencing Agriculture

 

Soil constituents

Mineral & organic matter

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Determine soil constituents

·        State the importance of each constituents

 

·        Determining soil constituents

·        Stating the importance of soil constituents

 

·        Sieves

·        Soil samples

·        Lens

·        Diagrams and apparatus in students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 32-33

·        Certificate F1 pg 29-34

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 40-49

Teachers guide pg 49

·        Gateway secondary Revision paper 1 pg 15-17

·        Top mark Revision pg 12-13

 

   
   

2-3

 

Factors influencing Agriculture

 

Soil constituents

Organic matter

Air

Water

Living organisms

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        Determine soil constituents

·        State the importance of each constituents

 

·        Determining soil constituents

·        Stating the importance of soil constituents

 

·        Sieves

·        Soil samples

·        Lens

·        Diagrams and apparatus in students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 32-33

·        Certificate F1 pg 29-34

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 40-49

Teachers guide pg 49

·        Gateway secondary Revision paper 1 pg 15-17

·        Top mark Revision pg 12-13

 

   
 

10

 

1

 

Factors influencing Agriculture

 

Physical properties of soil

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

(i)                Classify soil according to structure

 

·        Classify soil according to structure

 

·        Soil samples

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        School farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 43-45

·        Certificate F1 pg 40-42

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 49-53

Teachers guide pg 47

·        Gateway secondary Revision paper 1 pg 17-19

·        Top mark Revision pg 12

 

   
   

2-3

 

Factors influencing Agriculture

 

Physical properties of soil

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Classify soil according to texture and colour

 

·        Classifying soil according to texture and colour

 

·        Soil samples

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        School farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 46-54

·        Certificate F1 pg 35-39

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 53-59

Teachers guide pg 47

·        Gateway secondary Revision paper 1 pg 17-19

·        Top mark Revision pg 13-14

   
 

11

 

1

 

Factors influencing Agriculture

 

Influencing of physical and chemical properties of soil on crop production

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Explain the chemical properties of soil

 

·        Explain  the chemical properties of soil

 

·        PH Meter

·        PH Papers

·        Diagrams

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 55-56

·        Certificate F1 pg 43-45

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 59-60

Teachers guide pg 47

·        Gateway secondary Revision paper 1 pg 19-20

·        Top mark Revision pg 13-14

   
   

2-3

 

Factors influencing Agriculture

 

Influence of physical and chemical properties of soil on crop production

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Explain the effects of PH on mineral availability Relate crop and animal distribution to chemical and physical properties of soil

 

·        Explain the effects of soil PH relating crop and animal distribution on soil properties

 

·        Charts on PH

·        Distribution maps for crops and livestock in Kenya School

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 56-57

·        Certificate F1 pg 45-47

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 53-60

Teachers guide pg 47

·        Gateway secondary Revision paper 1 pg 17-20

·        Top mark Revision pg 13-14

 

   
 

END OF TERM ONE EXAMINATIONS

MARKING AND CLOSING

 
AGRICULTURE  FORM 1 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 2

 

 
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS  
 

1

 

1-2

 

Farm tools and Equipment

 

Garden and equipment

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify various garden tools and equipments

·        Draw various garden  tools and equipments

·        Name the garden tools and equipments various parts

 

·        Identifying tools and demonstrating their use

·        Draw the garden tools and equipments

·        Name various parts

 

·        Garden tools and equipments

·        Diagrams in students books

·        photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 59-62

·        Certificate F1 pg 49-54

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 63-67

Teachers guide pg 52-54

·        Gateway secondary Revision paper 2 pg 90-99

 

   
   

3

 

Farm tools and Equipment

 

Garden tools and equipment

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the use of various tools

·        Carry out maintenance practices on tools and equipments

 

·        State the use of tools

·        Practicing

·        Maintenance of tools and equipments

 

·        Photographs of tools

·        Diagrams in students book

·        School farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 59-62

·        Certificate F1 pg 49-56

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 63-67

Teachers guide pg 52-54

·        Gateway secondary Revision paper 2 pg 90-99

 

   
 

2

 

1-3

 

Farm tools and Equipments

 

Workshop tools and equipment

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify workshop tools and equipment

·        Name various parts

·        State the use of various tools

·        Carry out maintain ace practices on workshop tools and equipment

 

·        Identifying tool

·        Demonstrating their use

·        Drawing the tools

·        Labeling the parts

·        Practicing maintenance of tools and equipment

 

·        Workshop tools

·        Diagrams in students text books

·        School store

·        School farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 75-93

·        Certificate F1 pg 59-71

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 84-101

Teachers guide pg 52-54

·        Gateway secondary Revision paper 2 pg 107-117

   
 

3

 

1-3

 

Farm tools and Equipment

 

Livestock production tools

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to

·        Identify livestock production tools

·        Draw various livestock production tools

·        Name various parts of the tools

·        State the use of the various tools

·        Carry out maintenance practices on livestock production tools

 

·        Drawing tools

·        Labeling

·        Demonstrating their use

·        Identifying the tools

·        Practicing maintenance practices

 

·        Livestock

·        Diagrams on students book

·        Livestock store

·        School farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 63-74

·        Certificate F1 pg 54-59

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 74-84

Teachers guide pg 52-54

·        Gateway secondary Revision paper 2 pg 100-106

 

   
 

4

 

1-3

 

Farm tools and Equipment

 

Plumbing and masonry tools and equipment

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify plumbing and masonry tools and equipment

·        Name parts of various plumbing and masonry tools and equipment

·        Draw the various plumbing and masonry tools and equipment

·        State the use of various plumbing and masonry tools and equipment

·        Carry out maintenance practices on plumbing and masonry tools and equipment

 

·        Naming parts of tools

·        Drawing various tools

·        Stating the use of the tools

·        Carrying out maintenance practices

 

·        School workshop

·        Drawing in the students book

·        Plumbing and masonry tools

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 99-102

·        Certificate F1 pg 72-75

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 97-101

Teachers guide pg 52-54

·        Gateway secondary Revision paper 2 pg 116-117

 

   
 

5

 

1

 

Land Preparation (Crop production 1)

 

Definition and importance of land preparation

Land clearing

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define land preparation

·        Explain importance of land preparation

·        Describing land clearing

 

·        Defining and preparation

·        Explaining the importance of land preparation

·        Describing land clearing

 

·        School farms

·        Panga

·        Slashers

·        digging

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 104-105

·        Certificate F1 pg 77-78

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 103-105

Teachers guide pg 56-57

·        Top mark Agric pg 28

 

   
   

2-3

 

Land Preparation

 

Primary cultivation

Secondary Cultivation

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define primary and secondary cultivation

·        Explain how each is carried out and importance

·        Discuss the choice of correct tool and equipment for each operation

 

·        Defining terms

·        Explain how each is carried out

·        Discussion the correct choice of tools and equipment

 

·        School farms

·        Jembes

·        Diagrams in students books

·        pangas

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 106-110

·        Certificate F1 pg 79-84

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 105-109

Teachers guide pg 58-59

·        Gateway secondary Revision paper 2 pg 116-117

·        Top-mark secondary Agric Revision pg 28-29

   
 

6

 

1

 

Land Preparation

 

Tertiary Operation

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify tools used in tertiary operations

·        Explain how each of the operation is done

·        State the importance of the operation

 

·        Discussion

·        Identifying the tools

·        Explaining how operation is done

 

·        Drawing in the students book

·        Photographs of tools used

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 110-113

·        Certificate F1 pg 85-87

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 109-111

Teachers guide pg 59

·        Gateway secondary Revision paper 2 pg 116-117

·        Top-mark secondary Agric Revision pg 29

   
   

2-3

 

Land Preparation

 

Minimum tillage

Meaning

Importance

practices

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define minimum tillage

·        Explain how it is done

·        State the importance

·        List the practices involved in minimum tillage

 

·        Defining minimum tillage

·        Explaining how it is done

·        Stating the importance

·        Listing practices involved

 

·        School farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 112-113

·        Certificate F1 pg 85-86

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 112

Teachers guide pg 57-59

·        Top-mark secondary Agric Revision pg 29

   
 

7

 

1

 

Water supply irrigation and drainage

 

Water supply

Source

importance

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the various sources of water in the farm

·        State the importance in the farm

 

·        Describing sources of water

·        Stating the importance of water in the farm

 

·        Drawing in student book

·        Photographs of dam, boreholes

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 120-126

·        Certificate F1 pg 94-100

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 116-121

Teachers guide pg 62-63

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 127-288

   
   

2-3

 

Water Supply Irrigation and drainage

 

Water collection storage of water

Pumping of water

Conveyance of water

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe collection, pumping and conveyance of water

 

·        Describing collecting, pumping and conveyance of water

 

·        Pipes

·        Pumps

·        Tanks

·        Water treatment plant

·        Diagrams in students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 120-126

·        Certificate F1 pg 94-100

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 116-121

Teachers guide pg 62-63

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 127-288

   
 

8

 

1

 

Water Supply irrigation and drainage

 

Water treatment methods and importance

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State methods of water treatment

·        Describe the method

·        State the importance of water treatment

 

·        Stating the methods of water treatment

·        Describing the methods

·        Stating importance of water

 

·        Charts

·        Water treatment plants

·        Diagrams in the student book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 126-129

·        Certificate F1 pg 98-100

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 121-125

Teachers guide pg 62-63

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 129-130

   
   

2-3

   

Irrigation

·        Definition

·        Importance

·        methods

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        define irrigation

·        state the importance of irrigation

   

·        charts

·        school farm

·        students book

·        photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 129-130

·        Certificate F1 pg 101-103

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 125-129

Teachers guide pg 62-63

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 130

·        Top mark secondary Agriculture pg 16

   
 

9

 

1

 

Water supply, irrigation and drainage

 

Methods of irrigation surface/basin irrigation

Overhead irrigation

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe surface and overhead irrigation

 

·        Describing surface and overhead irrigation

 

·        School farm

·        Drawings in students book

·        Photographs, sprinklers and spades

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 130-131,134

·        Certificate F1 pg 104-106

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 128-130

Teachers guide pg 62-63

 

   
   

2-3

 

Water supply, irrigation and drainage

 

Methods of irrigation

Drip irrigation

Sub-surface

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe drip and sub-surface irrigation

 

·        Describe both drip and sub-surface irrigation

 

·        School farm

·        Drawings in the students book

·        Photographs

·        Bottles

·        pipes

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 132-134

·        Certificate F1 pg 107-108

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 131-133

Teachers guide pg 62-63

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 132,134

·        Top mark secondary Agriculture pg 16

   
 

10

 

1

 

Water supply and irrigation and drainage

 

Drainage

·        Definition

·        Importance

·        Causes of poor drainage

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define drainage

·        Explain the importance of drainage

·        Describe causes of poor drainage

 

·        Defining drainage

·        Explaining the importance of drainage

·        Describe the causes of poor drainage

 

·        Charts

·        Photographs

·        Diagrams in the student book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 136-139

·        Certificate F1 pg 108-109

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 133-134

Teachers guide pg 63-65

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 134-134

 

   
   

2-3

 

Water supply irrigation and drainage

 

Methods of drainage

Water pollution

 

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe methods of drainage

·        Define water pollution

·        Explain how farming practices causes pollution

 

·        Describe methods of drainage

·        Defining water pollution

·        Explain how farming practices cause pollution

 

·        School farm

·        Drawing in students book

·        Photographs

·        Polluted water

·        School farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 137-141

·        Certificate F1 pg 108-110

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 135-138

Teachers guide pg 63-65

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 136

   
 

11

 

1

 

Soil Fertility (organic)

(Manures)

 

Soil fertility

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define soil fertility

·        Explain the factor influencing soil fertility

 

·        Define soil fertility

·        Explain factors influencing soil fertility

 

·        Soil samples

·        Charts

·        School farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 140-144

·        Certificate F1 pg 112-113

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 140

Teachers guide pg 63-65

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 136

   
   

2-3

 

Soil Fertility

 

Soil Fertility

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Explain how soil fertility loses its fertility

·        Describe how soil fertility can be maintained

 

·        Explaining how soil loses its fertility

·        Describing how soil fertility is maintained

 

·        Leached soils

·        Samples of fertile soil

·        Eroded soil

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 143-146

·        Certificate F1 pg 112-113

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 141-142

Teachers guide pg 68-69

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 61-62

 

   
 

12

 

1

 

Organic manure

 

Definition

importance

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define organic manures

·        Explain the importance of organic manure

 

·        Definition

·        Explanation of importance of organic manure

 

·        Chalkboard

·        School farm

·        charts

 

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 146-147

·        Certificate F1 pg 113

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 143-144

Teachers guide pg 69-71

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 62-63

 

   
   

2-3

 

Organic Manure

 

Types of organic manure

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the 3 types of organic manure

·        Describe preparation of green manure

·        Describe preparation of farmyard manure

·        Describe preparation of compost manure

 

·        Stating types of organic manure

·        Describing the preparation of green, farmyard and compost manure

 

·        Sample of green manure

·        Sample of compost manure

·        Sample of farm yard

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 148-154

·        Certificate F1 pg 114-117

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 145-150

Teachers guide pg 69-71

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 63-64

·        Top mark revision Agriculture for m 1 page 31-33

 

   
 

END OF TERM TWO EXAMINATIONS

 
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
 

AGRICULTURE  FORM 1 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 3

 
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS  
 

1

 

1

 

Livestock Breeds

 

Importance of livestock

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Explain the importance of livestock to man

 

·        Explaining the importance of livestock to man

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Photographs of livestock

·        Livestock products e,g skin, milk

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 155

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 118

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 152-153

Teachers guide pg 73-74

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 62-63

·        Top mark Agriculture page 173

   
   

2-3

 

Livestock Breeds

 

Cattle breeds

·        Exotic

·        indigenous

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        state examples of exotic and indigenous breeds

·        describe the characteristics of exotic and indigenous cattle

 

·        stating examples

·        describing the characteristics of exotic and local cattle breeds

·        charts

·        photographs

·        school farm

·        drawings from student books

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 155

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 118

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 152-153

Teachers guide pg 73-74

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 62-63

·        Top mark Agriculture page 173

   
 

2

 

1-3

 

Livestock breeds

 

Dairy

Cattle

breeds

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify various breeds

·        Describe their characteristics

·        Draw and label the external parts of cattle

 

·        Describing the characteristics of cattle breeds

·        Drawing the external parts of the cattle

·        Labeling the external parts of the cattle

·        Identifying various breeds

 

·        Charts

·        Photographs

·        Drawing from the students book

·        School farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 159-162

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 119-122

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 158-162

Teachers guide pg 73-77

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 1-4

·        Top mark Agriculture page 173

   
 

3

 

1-2

 

Livestock Breeds

 

Beef breeds

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify various breeds

·        Describe their characteristics

·        Draw the external parts of cattle

·        Label the external parts of the cattle

 

·        Identifying various breeds

·        Describing the characteristics of cattle breeds

·        Drawing external parts of cattle

·        Labeling the external parts of cattle

 

·        Charts

·        Photographs

·        School farm

·        Drawings from the student’s book.

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 162-165

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 124-126

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 155-158

Teachers guide pg 73-77

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 3-4

 

   
   

3

 

Livestock Breeds

 

Dual Purpose Breeds

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify various breeds

·        Describe their characteristics

·        Draw and label the external parts of the cattle

 

·        Identifying various breeds

·        Describing their characteristics

·        Drawing and labeling their external parts

 

·        Charts Photographs

·        Wall hangings showing dual breeds

·        School farm

·        Drawing from the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 164-165

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 127-129

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 164-168

Teachers guide pg 73-77

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 1-4

·        Top mark Agriculture page 75

   
 

4

 

1-3

 

Livestock Breeds

 

Sheep breeds

Wool sheep

Mutton sheep

Dual sheep

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify various breeds

·        Describe their characteristics

·        Draw the external parts of sheep

·        Labeling the external pars

 

·        Identifying the various breeds

·        Describing their characteristics

·        Drawing the external parts of the sheep

·        Labeling the external parts

 

·        Charts

·        Photograph

·        School farm

·        Drawings from the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 174-179

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 129-134

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 164-168

Teachers guide pg 73-77

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 8

·        Top mark Agriculture page 75-76

   
 

5

 

1-3

 

Livestock breeds

 

Goats Breeds

·        Milk

·        Meat

·        Hair

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        identify various breeds

·        describe their characteristics

·        draw the external parts of the goat

·        label the external parts of the goat

 

·        identifying various breeds

·        describing the characteristics of goat breeds

·        drawing the external parts of the goat

 

·        charts

·        photographs

·        drawing from the student books

·        school farm

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 179-182

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 135-137

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 169-173

Teachers guide pg 73-77

·        Top mark Agriculture page 76

   
 

6

 

1-3

 

Livestock Breeds

 

Pigs

Breeds

Bacon

pork

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify various breeds of pigs

·        Describe their characteristics

·        Draw the external parts of pigs

·        Labeling the external parts of the goat

 

·        Identifying various breeds

·        Drawing the various external parts of a pig

·        Labeling the external parts

·        Describing the characteristics

 

·        Drawings from the students book

·        Photographs

·        Charts

·        School farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 165-171

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 139-140

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 174-178

Teachers guide pg 73-77

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 5-6

·        Top mark Agriculture page 77

   
 

7

 

1-3

 

Livestock Breeds

 

Chicken

·        Light breeds

·        Heavy breeds

·        Dual purposes

·        hybrids

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        identify various breeds

·        describe their characteristics

·        draw the various external parts

·        draw the various external parts

·        label the various external parts

 

·          identify various breeds

·          describing the characteristic of various breeds

·          drawing the external parts of chicken

·          labeling the various parts of the chicken

 

·        school farm

·        photographs

·        charts

·        drawings from the students books

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 171-174

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 143-145

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 178-182

Teachers guide pg 73-77

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 6-7

·        Top mark Agriculture page 77

   
 

8

 

1

 

Livestock breeds

 

Rabbit breed

Characteristics

drawings

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify various breeds

·        Describe their characteristics

·        Draw and label the external parts

 

·        Identifying various breeds

·        Describing their characteristics

·        Drawing the external parts of rabbit

·        Labeling the various parts

 

·        Photographs

·        Charts

·        Drawings in the students book

·        School farm

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 182-184

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 141-142

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 164-168

Teachers guide pg 73-77

·        Top mark Agriculture page 78

   
   

2-3

 

Livestock breeds

 

Camels, donkeys breeds

Characteristics

drawings

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify various breeds

·        Describe characteristics

·        Draw and label external parts of camels

 

·        Identifying various breeds

·        Describing their characteristics

·        Drawing external parts

·        Labeling the various parts

 

·        Drawings in the students book

·        School farm

·        Charts

·        photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 185-186

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 146-147

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 186

Teachers guide pg 73-77

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 10-11

·        Top mark Agriculture page 78

   
 

9

 

1

 

Livestock breeds

 

Terms used to describe livestock

·        Age

·        Sex

·        Use

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·                  Explain the terms used to describe livestock

 

Explaining the various terms used to describe livestock

 

·        School farm

·        Charts

·         Photographs

·        Drawing from the student book

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 164-165

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 164-168

Teachers guide pg 73-77

 

   
   

2-3

 

Agriculture Economics

 

Economics

·        Definition

·        Agricultural economics

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·          Define economics

·          Define agricultural economics

·          Explain the factors of production

 

·        Defining economics

·        Explaining the factors of production

 

·        Flow chart

·        Students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 189

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 149

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 190-191

Teachers guide pg 78-80

 

   
 

10

 

1

 

Agricultural Economics

 

Basic concepts of economics principles

Scarcity

Opportunity cost

Preference & choice

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State basics concepts of economics

·        Explain the basic concepts of economics

 

·        State basic concepts

·        Explaining the basic concepts of economics

 

·        Students books

·        Chalk board

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 189-190

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 149-150

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 191-192

Teachers guide pg 78-80

 

   
   

2-3

 

Agricultural Economics

 

Farm records define

Types of records

importance

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        Define farm records

·        Explain the uses of farm records

·        Describe breeding and feeding records

 

·        Defining farm records

·        Explaining uses of farm records

·        Describing breeding and feeding records

 

·        Sample records

·        School farm

·        Sample records in students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 190-191,194-196

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 150-156-158

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 193-196

Teachers guide pg 80-81

 

   
 

11

 

1

 

Agricultural Economics

 

Farm records

·        Production records

·        Health records

·        Field records

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the farm records

·        Describing production health, field records

 

·        Stating farm records

·        Describing production, health and field records

 

·        Diagrams on students book

·        Charts

·        chalkboard

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 193,197

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 152-154

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 198-200

Teachers guide pg 80-81

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 1-4

·        Top mark Agriculture page 75

   
 

END TERM THREE EXAMS

 
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
 

AGRICULTURE  FORM 2 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 1

 
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
 

1

 

1

 

Soil Fertility

 

Essential elements

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

(a)    List essential elements

(b)    Classify the essential elements

 

·        Listing essential elements

·        Classifying the essential elements

 

·        Students book

·        Charts on classification of essential minerals

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 1,6

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2  pg 1-2

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 1-2

Teachers guide pg 33-36

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 37, 39

·        Top mark Agriculture page 37

 
   

2-3

 

Soil Fertility (II)

 

Essential elements

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the role of each macro-element

·        Describe the deficiency symptoms of the macro-nutrients

 

·        Stating the role of macro-elements

·        Describing the deficiency symptoms of the macro-nutrients

 

·        Photographs

·        Tables in student books

·        Plant samples

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 1-5

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 2-5

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 2-12

Teachers guide pg 33-36

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 1-4

·        Top mark Agriculture page 37-38

 
 

2

 

1

 

Soil Fertility (I)

 

Essential elements

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        State the role of each micro-element

·        Describe the deficiency symptoms of the macro-nutrients

 

·        Stating the role of micro nutrients

·        Describing their deficiency symptoms

 

·        Photographs

·        Tables in the students book

·        Plant samples

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 6-7

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 1-2

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 10-11

Teachers guide pg 33-36

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 66-68

·        Top mark Agriculture page 75

 
   

2-3

 

Soil Fertility (II)

 

Inorganic fertilizers

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Classify fertilizers

·        Identify fertilizers

·        Describe the properties of various fertilizers

 

·        Classifying fertilizers

·        Identifying fertilizers

·        Describing the properties of various fertilizers

 

·        Photographs of fertilizers

·        Students book

·        Fertilizers samples

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 7-12

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 5-8

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 11-18

Teachers guide pg 36-38

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 66-70

 

 
 

3

 

1

 

Soil Fertility (II)

 

Inorganic fertilizers

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State methods of fertilizer application

·        Explaining various methods of fertilizer application

 

·        Stating various methods

·        Explaining various methods of fertilizer application

·        Describing the various methods of fertilizer application

 

·        School farm

·        Buckets

·        Fertilizer samples

·        Panga

·        Soil

·        Spade

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 12-13

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 9

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 18-21

Teachers guide pg 36-38

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 70

 
   

2-3

 

Soil Fertility (II)

 

Inorganic fertilizers

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Calculate the fertilizer grade

·        Calculate fertilizer ratio

·        Determine fertilizer amount per lecture

 

·        Calculating fertilizer rates

 

·        School farm

·        Students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 6-7

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 1-2

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 10-11

Teachers guide pg 33-36

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 66-68

·        Top mark Agriculture page 75

 
 

4

 

1

 

Soil Fertility

 

Soil Sampling

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define soil sampling

·        Explain the sampling methods

·        Describe sampling procedures

 

·        Defining soil sampling

·        Explain the sampling methods

·        Describing sampling procedures

 

·        Charts

·        Soil samples

·        Students book

·        Polythene bags

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 20-21

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 11

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 23-24

Teachers guide pg 39-41

·        Top mark Agriculture page 41-42

 
   

2-3

 

Soil Fertility

 

Soil testing

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define soil testing

·        Explain the importance of soil testing

·        Describe soil testing procedure

·        Explain how soil PH affects crop production

 

·        Defining soil testing

·        Explaining the importance of soil testing

·        Describing soil testing procedure

·        Explaining how

 

·        Test tubes

·        Diagrams in students book

·        Distilled water

·        Soil testing reagents

·        PH scale

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 22-26

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 12-13

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 24-28

Teachers guide pg 39-41

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 71

·        Top mark Agriculture page 42

 
 

5

 

1

 

Crop Production (II)

 

Planting materials

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        Describe types of planting materials

·        State advantages and disadvantages of planting materials

 

·        Describing types of planting materials

·        Stating the advantages and disadvantages

 

·        Seed samples

·        Vegetative parts

·        Students book

·        School farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 27-28

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 15-17

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 1 pg 33-35

Teachers guide pg 45-46

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 28

 
   

2-3

 

Crop production (II)

 

Planting materials

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        State various parts used for vegetative propagation

·        Describe various parts used for vegetative propagation

 

·        Stating various parts

·        Describing various parts used for vegetative propagation

 

·        School farm

·        Various vegetative parts

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 29-34

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 15-17

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 35-40

Teachers guide pg 45-47

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 29-30

 

 
 

6

 

1

 

Crop Production (II)

 

Selection of planting materials

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Select planting materials

 

·        Selecting planting materials

 

·        Tape measure

·        Student’s books

·        School farm

·        Planting line

·        Seed dressers

·        Planting materials

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 34-35

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 18-19

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 35-40

Teachers guide pg 47-48

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 30

 

 
  2-3  

Crop Production (II)

 

Preparation of Planting

·        Breaking seed dormancy

·        Dressing

·        Seed inoculation

·        chitin

 

By the end of the lesson, thelearner should be able to

·        Prepare planting materials

·        Determine optimum planting time

·        Describe methods of planting

 

 

 

·        Preparing planting materials

·        Determining optimum planting time

·        Describing methods of planting

 

·        Planting line

·        Tape measure

·        Planting materials

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 35-39

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 20-22

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 49-50

Teachers guide pg 35-39

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 30-32

 

 
 

7

 

1

 

Crop production (II)

 

Plant population

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Calculate plant population of various crops

 

·        Calculating plant population

 

·        Charts

·        School farm

·        Seeds for planting

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 29-34

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 26

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 49-50

Teachers guide pg 50-51

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 32

 

 
   

2-3

 

Crop Production (II)

 

Spacing seed rate planting depth

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State factors determining spacing, seed rate and depth

·        Explain the factors which determine spacing depth and seed rate

 

·        Stating factors

·        Explaining factors which determine spacing, depth and seed rate

 

·        Tape measure

·        School farm

·        Panga

·        Jembe

·        Students book diagram

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 42-45

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 24-26

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 50-54

Teachers guide pg 51-52

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 32-33

 

 
 

8

 

1

 

Crop Production (III) Nursery practices

 

Nursery practices

Nursery bed

Seed bed

Seedling bed

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define nursery practices

·        Describe nursery bed, seed bed and seedling bed

·        Distinguish between nursery, seedling and seed bed

 

·        Garden tools

·        School farm

·        Nursery beds

·        Students book

·        Diagrams on the students book

·        charts

 

·        garden tools

·        school farm

·        nursery beds

·        students book

·        diagrams on the students book

·        charts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 46

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 28

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 56-57

Teachers guide pg 54-56

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 34

 
   

2-3

 

Crop Production (III) Nursery Practices

 

Nursery bed

Importance

Site selection

Vegetable nurseries

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the importance of nursery in crop propagation

·        Select a suitable site for the nursery

·        Prepare a nursery bed for vegetables

 

·        Stating importance of nursery

·        Selecting suitable sites for nursery

·        Preparing nursery bed for vegetables

 

 

·        Nursery beds

·        School farm

·        Diagrams from students books

·        Garden tools

·        Students books

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 46-49

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 28-29

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 57-58

Teachers guide pg 54-56

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 34-35

·        Top mark Agriculture page 34

 
 

9

 

1

 

Crop Production (III) Nursery Practices

 

Nursery establishment

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        Establish a vegetable nursery

·        Establish a tree nursery

 

·        Establishing a vegetable and a tree nursery

 

·        Charts

·        Diagrams from students book

·        School farm

·        School nurseries

·        Boxes

·        Grass

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 48-49

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 29-32

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 58-60

Teachers guide pg 54-56

·        Top mark Agriculture page 34

 
   

2-3

 

Crop production (III)

 

Nursery Establishment

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Establish tea nursery using cuttings

·        Manage a nursery bed

 

·        Establishing tea nursery using cuttings

·        Managing nursery bed

 

·        Tea cuttings photographs

·        School farm

·        Diagrams from students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 49-51

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 30-32

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 60-62

Teachers guide pg 54-58

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 35

 
 

10

 

1

 

Crop production (III)

 

Grafting

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define grafting

·        Describe the methods of grafting

·        Give reasons for grafting

 

·        Defining grafting

·        Describing methods of grafting

·        Giving reasons for grafting

 

·        Knives

·        Grafting materials

·        Students book

·        Raising boxes

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 53-55

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 35-36

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 64-65

Teachers guide pg 58-59

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 36

·        Top mark Agriculture page 35-36

 
   

2-3

   

Budding

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define budding

·        Describe methods of budding

·        State the importance of budding

 

·        Defining budding

·        Describing methods of budding

·        Giving reasons for budding

 

·        School farm

·        Water

·        Budding materials

·        Students book

·        knives

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 55-58

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 34-35

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 66-70

Teachers guide pg 57-59

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 36

·        Top mark Agriculture page 35

 
 

11

 

1

 

Crop Production (III)

 

layering

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define layering

·        Describe methods of layering

·        State the importance of layering

 

·        Defining layering

·        Describing methods of layering

·        Giving importance of layering

 

·        Peg

·        Strings

·        School farm

·        Root medium

·        Student books

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 58-60

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 41-44

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 71-72

Teachers guide pg 59

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 36-37

·        Top mark Agriculture page 35

 
   

2-3

 

Crop production (III)

 

Tissue culture

Transplanting seedlings

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define tissue culture

·        Explain importance of tissue culture in crop propagation

·        Describe the procedure of transplanting seedlings

 

·        Defining tissue culture

·        Explaining importance of tissue culture

·        Describing procedure of transplanting seedlings

 

·        School farm

·        Garden trowel

·        School nursery

·        Seedlings

·        Diagrams

·        Students books

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 61-66

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 41-44

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 72-77

Teachers guide pg 60-61

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 36-37

·        Top mark Agriculture page 35

 

 
END TERM ONE EXAMINATIONS  
 

 

 

 

 

 
AGRICULTURE  FORM 2 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 2

 

 
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS  
 

1

 

1

 

Crop Production (IV) Field practices

 

Crop Rotation

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define crop rotation

·        Explain the importance of crop rotation

·        State principles of crop rotation

 

·        Defining crop rotation

·        Explaining the importance of crop rotation

·        Stating principles of crop rotation

 

·        Charts

·        School farm

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 67-68

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 50

·         Teachers guide pg 59

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 40

·        Top mark Agriculture page 43

   
   

2-3

 

Crop production (IV) field practices

 

Crop Rotation

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify factors influencing crop rotation

·        Draw a crop rotation programme

·        Distinguish terms used in crop farming

 

·        Identifying factors influencing crop rotation

·        Drawing a crop rotation progamme

·        Distinguishing terms used in crop farming

 

·        Photographs

·        Charts

·        School farm

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 69-71

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 50-51

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 79-80

Teachers guide pg 84-88

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 40-42

 

   
 

2

 

1

 

Field Practices

 

Mulching

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define mulching

·        State the importance of mulching

 

·        Defining mulching

·        Stating the importance of mulching

 

 

 

·        Samples of mulch

·        School farm

·        Photograph in students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 71-72

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 51-52

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 82-84

Teachers guide pg 59

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 36-37

·        Top mark Agriculture page 43

   
 

 

 

2-3

 

Field Practices

 

Routine

Field practices

Thinning

Gapping

Training

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the various routine practices

·        Describe importance of field practices

·        Carry out field practices

 

·        Stating various routine practices

·        Describing importance of field practices

·        Carrying out field practices

 

·        School farm

·        Pruning saw

·        Pruning knives

·        Jembes

·        Diagrams in students book

·        wire

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 72-74

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F1 pg 52-54

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 88-90

Teachers guide pg 67-68

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 36-37

·        Top mark Agriculture page 44

   
 

3

 

1

 

Field Practices

 

Pruning

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define pruning

·        Give reasons for pruning

·        Describe procedure of pruning

 

·        Defining pruning

·        Giving reasons for pruning

·        Describing the procedure of pruning

 

·        Running tools

·        School farm

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        secateurs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 73-75

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 41-44

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 91-93

Teachers guide pg 67-68

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 42-43

·        Top mark Agriculture page 44

   
   

2-3

 

Field practices

 

Tea Pruning

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe methods of pruning in tea

·        Describe plucking table formation

 

·        Describe methods of pruning in tea

·        Describing the plucking table formation

·        Note taking

·        Demonstration of plucking table formation

 

·        Pegs

·        Rings

·        School farm

·        Charts

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        Photographs

·        farms

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 76-80

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 54-57

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 93-96

Teachers guide pg 67-68

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 43

 

   
 

4

 

1

 

Field practices

 

Coffee pruning

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Give reasons for pruning coffee

·        Describing the methods of pruning coffee

 

·        Giving reasons for pruning coffee

·        Describing the methods of pruning coffee

 

·        Farms

·        Photographs

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 81-84

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 57-59

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 96-98

Teachers guide pg 67-68

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 43-44

 

   
   

2-3

 

Field practices

 

Pruning in bananas

Pruning pyrethrum

Earthling up

Weed control

Pest and disease control

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe how to carry out the routine field practices

·        State the importance of each practices

 

·        Stating the importance of various practices

·        Describing how to carry out the routine field practices

   

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 85-87

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 60

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 98-101

Teachers guide pg 67-68

·        Top mark Agriculture page 44

   
 

5

 

1

 

Field Practices

 

Harvesting

 

By the end of the lesson, the end of the learner should be able to

·        State the stage of harvesting

·        Explain timing of harvesting

·        Describe the methods of harvesting

 

·        Stating the stage of harvesting

·        Explaining timing of harvesting

·        Describing harvesting methods

 

·        Crops

·        Photographs in students book

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        School farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 73-75

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 60

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 101-104

Teachers guide pg 68

·        Top mark Agriculture page 44-45

   
   

2-3

 

Field Practices

 

Post harvesting practices

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        explain post harvesting practices

·        state importance of storage

·        describe storage methods

 

 

·        explaining post harvesting practices

·        stating importance of storage

·        describing harvesting methods

 

·        crops

·        photographs in students book

·        diagrams in the students book

·        school farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 90-94

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 60-66

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 103-105

Teachers guide pg 67-68

·        Top mark Agriculture page 45

   
 

6

 

1

 

Crop production (V) vegetables

 

Cabbages/kales

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State importance of vegetables

·        Describe the production of the vegetable crop from nursery to harvesting

·        Keep crop production records

·        Market the vegetable  produce

 

 

·        Stating importance of vegetables

·        Describing vegetable production

·        Keeping crop production record

·        marketing the vegetable produce

 

·        pesticides

·        herbicides

·        fertilizers

·        photographs

·        students book

·        school farm

·        crops

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 96-99

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 74-78

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 107-111

Teachers guide pg 72-75

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 47-48

·        Top mark Agriculture page 45

   
   

2-3

 

Crop production (V) vegetable

 

Cabbages/Kales

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        State importance of vegetables

·        Describe the production of the vegetable crops from nursery to harvesting

·        Keep crop production records

·        Market the vegetable produce

 

·        Stating importance of vegetables

·        Describing vegetable production

·        Keeping crop production records

·        Marketing the vegetable produce

 

·        Pesticides

·        Herbicides

·        Fertilizers

·        Photographs

·        Diagrams from the students book

·        Crops

·        School farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 96-99

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 60-66

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 107-111

Teachers guide pg 72-75

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 47-48

 

   
 

7

 

1

 

Crop production (V) vegetables production

 

Tomatoes

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the importance of tomatoes

·        Describe the production of tomatoes from nursery to harvesting

·        Keep crop production records

·        Market the produce

 

·        Stating the importance of tomatoes

·        Describing tomatoes production

·        Keeping crop production records

·        Marketing the produce

 

·        Photographs

·        Students book

·        School farm

·        Garden tolls

·        Pesticides

·        Herbicides

·        fertilizers

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 100-106

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 67-71

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 112-115

Teachers guide pg 67-68

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 48-49

   
   

2-3

 

Crop production (V) vegetable production

 

Carrots

onions

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        State importance of carrots and onions

·        Describe the production of tomatoes from nursery to harvesting

·        Keep crop production records

·        Market the produce

 

·        Stating the importance of carrots & onions

·        Describing their production

·        Keeping crop production records

·        Marketing the produce

 

·        School farm

·        Garden tools

·        Pesticides

·        Herbicides

·        Fertilizers

·        photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 90-94

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 60-66

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 103-105

Teachers guide pg 67-68

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 42-43

·        Top mark Agriculture page 48-49

   
 

8

 

1

 

Livestock Health (I) Disease

 

Health disease

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        Define health and disease

·        State the importance of livestock health

·        State the predisposing factors of diseases

 

·        Defining health and disease

·        Stating the importance of livestock health

·        Stating the predisposing factors of diseases

 

·        Livestock species

·        Farm

·        Students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 115-119

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 82-85

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 121-122

Teachers guide pg 77

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 52

·        Top mark Agriculture page 80

   
   

2-3

 

Livestock health (i) disease

 

Signs of ill/good health in livestock

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        Describe signs of sickness in livestock

·        Describe signs of good health in livestock

 

·        Describing signs of sickness in livestock

·        Describing signs of good health in livestock

 

·        Livestock species

·        Farm animals

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        Farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 116-119

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 82-85

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 123-124

Teachers guide pg 77

·        Top mark Agriculture page 80

 

   
 

9

 

1

 

Livestock Health (Disease)

 

Classification of livestock diseases

Causes of livestock diseases

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        Explain the causes of livestock diseases

·        Classify livestock diseases

 

·        Explaining causes of livestock diseases

·        Classifying livestock diseases

 

·        Student book

·        Chart

·        Farm animals

·        Tables in the students book

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 120-125

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 86-88

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 123-124

Teachers guide pg 77

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 52-53

 

   
   

2-3

 

Livestock Health (disease)

 

General methods of disease control

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the various methods of disease control

·        Carry out disease control measures

 

·        Describing methods of disease control

·        Carrying out disease control

 

·        Livestock tolls

·        Farm animals

·        Students book

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 125-128

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 89-91

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 126-127

Teachers guide pg 78-79

·        Top mark Agriculture page 80

   
 

10

 

1-3

 

Livestock Health (Disease)

 

Appropriate methods of handling livestock

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the reasons why animals are handled

·        Explain the reasons why animals are handled

 

·        Stating the reasons

·        Explaining the reasons why animals are handles

 

·        Farms animals

·        Charts

·        Diagrams in students book

·        Photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 129

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 92

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 128-133

Teachers guide pg 79-80

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 54

·        Top mark Agriculture page 81

   
 

11

 

1-3

 

Livestock Health (Disease)

 

Appropriate methods of handling livestock

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State various methods of handling livestock

·        Demonstrate a caring attitude towards livestock

 

·        Stating various methods of handling livestock

·        Demonstrating a caring attitude towards livestock0

 

·        Diagrams in the students books

·        Farm animals photographs

·        Charts

·        Students books

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 129-132

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 95-96

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 128-133

Teachers guide pg 79-80

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 54

 

   
 

END TERM TWO EXAMINATIONS

 
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
 

AGRICULTURE  FORM 2 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 3

 
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
 

1

 

1

 

Livestock Health II (Parasites)

 

Host parasite relationship

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define parasites

·        Explain their effects on host

 

·        Defining a parasite

·        Explaining the effects of parasites

 

·        Farm animals

·        Parasite specimen students book

·        Photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 133-134

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 98

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 134

Teachers guide pg 83

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 56

 

 
   

2-3

 

Livestock Health (II) parasites

 

Types of parasites –External parasites ticks

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify types of ticks

·        Describe the life cycle of the parasite

·        Identify the livestock attacked

·        State the control measures

 

·        Identifying types of ticks

·        Describing the life cycle of the parasite

·        Identifying the livestock attacked stating the control measures

 

·        Parasite specimen

·        Photographs

·        Students book

·        Farm animals

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 138-143

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 98-102

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 135-139

Teachers guide pg 83-85

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 56-58

·        Top mark Agriculture page 82

 
 

2

 

1

 

Livestock Health (Parasites)

 

External parasites

Tsetse fly

mites

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the life cycle of parasite

·        Identify the livestock attacked

·        State the control measures

 

·        Describing the life cycle of the parasite

·        Identifying the livestock attacked

·        Stating the control measures

 

·        Farm animals

·        Parasites specimen

·        Students book

·        Photographs

·        Diagrams from the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 134-135

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 103,104,107

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 139-141

Teachers guide pg 83-85

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 52

 

 
   

2-3

 

Livestock health (Parasites)

 

External parasites

·        Lice

·        keds

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        describe the life cycle of the parasite

·        identify the livestock attacked

·        state the control measures

 

·        describing the life cycle of parasite

·        identifying the livestock attacked

·        stating the control measures

 

·        farm animals

·        parasites specimen

·        students book

·        photographs

·        diagrams from the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 136-138

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 105-107

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 141-142

Teachers guide pg 83-85

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 56-58

 

 
 

3

 

1

 

Livestock (Parasites)

 

Internal parasites

Liver flukes (Trematodes)

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the life cycle of the parasites

·        Identify the livestock attacked

·        State the control measures

 

·        Describing the life cycle of the parasites

·        Identifying the livestock attacked

·        Stating the control measures

 

·        Farm animals

·        Parasites specimens

·        Student books

·        Photographs

·        charts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 151-154

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 110-113

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 142-144

Teachers guide pg 84-85

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 56-58

·        Top mark Agriculture page 83

 

 
   

2-3

 

Livestock Health (Parasites)

 

Internal parasites

Tape worms

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the life cycle of the parasite

·        Identify the livestock attacked

·        State the control measures

 

·        Describing the life cycle of the parasite

·        Identifying the livestock attacked

·        Stating the control measures

 

·        Charts

·        Farm animals

·        Parasites specimens

·        Students book

·        Photographs

·        Tables on the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 144-148

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 108-110

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 144-146

Teachers guide pg 83-85

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 1 page 60

·        Top mark Agriculture page 83

 

 
 

4

 

1

 

Livestock health (Parasites)

 

Internal parasites

Round worms

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the life cycle of the parasite

·        Identify the livestock attacked

·        State the control measures

 

·        Describing the life cycle of the parasite

·        Identifying the livestock attacked

·        Stating the control measures

 

·        Farm animals

·        Parasite specimen

·        Students book

·        photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 149-151

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 112-113

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 146-147

Teachers guide pg 83-85

·        Top mark Agriculture page 84

 

 
   

2-3

 

Livestock health (parasites)

 

Principles of controlling

Endoparasites

Treatment

Drug administration

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        Explain factors to consider when controlling endoparasites

·        Describe methods of administration of drugs

·        State the rules that are followed in treatment of parasites

 

·        Explaining factors considered in controlling endoparasites

·        Describing methods of drug administration

·        Stating the rules followed in treatment of parasites

 

·        Chart

·        Students book

 

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 154-155

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 113-114

 

 
 

5

 

1

 

Livestock production nutrition (II)

 

Components of food

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define nutrition

·        Explain major components of food

 

·        Defining nutrition

·        Explaining major food components

 

·        Charts

·        Chalkboard

·        Students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 158

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 115

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 148-149

Teachers guide pg 83-85

·        Top mark Agriculture page 85

 
   

2-3

 

Livestock Nutrition

 

Food nutrients

·        Water

·        Carbohydrate

·        fats

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        describe the food nutrients

·        describe the feed nutrients

·        explaining the functions of each feed

 

·        describing the feed nutrients

·        explaining the functions of each feed

 

·        students book

·        samples of feed nutrients

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 159-161

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 115-116,118

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 149-152

Teachers guide pg 81-82

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 12

·        Top mark Agriculture page 85-86

 
 

6

 

1

 

Livestock production (II) nutrition

 

Feed nutrients

·        Proteins

·        minerals

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        explain the functions of each food

·        describe the food nutrients

 

·        explaining functions of each food

·        describing food nutrients

 

 

·        Feed specimen

·        Photographs

·        Farm stores

·        Students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 163-165

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 117

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 157

Teachers guide pg 89-92

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 13

·        Top mark Agriculture page 86

 
   

2-3

 

Livestock Production (II) Nutrition

 

Food nutrients

vitamins

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State various types of vitamins

·        Explain the importance of vitamins

·        Describe the food nutrients

 

·        Stating various types of vitamins

·        Explaining the importance of vitamins

·        Describing the food nutrients

 

·        Food store

·        Photographs of animals with deficiency

·        Feed specimen

·        Students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 163-165

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 117

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 157

Teachers guide pg 89-92

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 13

·        Top mark Agriculture page 86

 

 
 

7

 

1

 

Livestock production (II) nutrition

 

Foods and foodstuffs

·        roughages

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        state the classifications of animals food

·        identify the food stuffs

·        state the characteristics of foodstuffs

 

 

·        Stating the classes of food stuffs

·        Identifying the food stuffs

·        Stating the characteristics of food stuffs

 

·        food stuffs

·        food store

·         photographs

·        Students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 169-170

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 118-119

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 162-163

Teachers guide pg 89-92

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 14-15

·        Top mark Agriculture page 86

 
   

2-3

 

Livestock production (II) nutrition

 

Foods and foods stuffs

·        Concentrates

·        Proteins

·        Carbohydrate

·        Mixed succulents

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        Identify the food stuffs

·        State their characteristics

 

·        Identifying the food stuffs

·        Stating the characteristics of the food stuffs

 

·        Food stuffs

·        Students book

·        Food store

·        photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 171

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 117

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 163-164

Teachers guide pg 89-92

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 15

·        Top mark Agriculture page 86-87

 
 

8

 

1

 

Livestock production (II) nutrition

 

Concept of rationing

Terms used to express food values

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the terms used to express food values

·        Explain the various terms

 

·        Stating the terms used to express food values

·        Explaining the various terms

 

·        Charts

·        Students book

·        Chalk board

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 172-175

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 125

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 162-164

Teachers guide pg 89-92

·        Top mark Agriculture page 87

 
   

2-3

 

Livestock production (II) Nutrition

 

Ratio computation

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Explain the process of ration computation

·        Stating the methods

·        Compute a livestock station

 

·        Stating the methods

·        Explaining the process of ration computation

·        Computing livestock ration

 

·        geometric set

·        Students book

·        Charts

·        Tables in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 176-179

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 126-128

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 166-169

Teachers guide pg 89-92

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 16-17

·        Top mark Agriculture page 87-88

 
 

9

 

1

 

Livestock production (II) nutrition

 

Digestion in livestock

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        Define digestion

·        Describe the  process of digestion generally

 

·        Defining digestion

·        Describing the process of digestion

 

·        Chart

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        Specimens of digestive systems

·        School farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 179-182

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 120-121

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 173-175

Teachers guide pg 89-92

·        Top mark Agriculture page 88

 
   

2-3

 

Livestock production (II) nutrition

 

Digestion in non-ruminants (Pigs)

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe digestion and digestive system of a pig

 

·        Describing digestion and the digestive system of a pig

·        Drawing diagrams

 

·        Chart

·        Specimens of digestive systems

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 182-184

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 121-122

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 172-173

Teachers guide pg 89-92

 

 
 

10

 

1

 

Livestock production (II) nutrition

 

Digestion in poultry

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe digestion and digestive system of poultry

 

·        Describing digestion and digestive system of poultry

·        Drawing diagrams

 

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        Specimen of the digestive system

·        chart

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 185

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 123-124

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 170-172

Teachers guide pg 89-92

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 18-19

·        Top mark Agriculture page 90

 
   

2-3

 

Livestock production (II) nutrition

 

Differences and similarities in 60th ruminant and ruminant digestive systems

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the differences & similarities in both ruminant and non-ruminant digestive systems

 

·        Stating the differences and similarities both in ruminant and non-ruminant digestive system

 

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        Specimens of digestive system chart

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 186-188

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 123-124

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 175-176

Teachers guide pg 89-92

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 13

·        Top mark Agriculture page 90

 
 

11

 

1-3

 

Livestock production (II) nutrition

 

Appropriate livestock

Landling techniques while feeding

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        Handle livestock appropriately while feeding

 

·        Handling livestock appropriately

 

·        Farm animals

·        Charts

·        Farm structures

·        Students book

·        Diagrams from the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 129-132

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 128-131

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 2 pg 176-178

Teachers guide pg 89-92

 

 
 

END TERM THREE EXAMS

 
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
 

AGRICULTURE  FORM 3 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 1

 
 

1

 

1

 

Livestock Production (III) selection

 

Reproduction and reproductive systems in cattle

 

By  the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        describe reproduction and reproductive systems in cattle

 

 

·        Describing reproduction and reproductive systems in cattle

·        drawing reproductive systems in cattle

 

·        charts

·        diagrams in students book

·        farm animals

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 1-6

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 123-124

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 1-5

Teachers guide pg 37-38

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 21-23

·        Top mark Agriculture page 91-92

 
   

2

 

Livestock production (III) selection and Breeding

 

Reproduction and reproductive systems in poultry

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        Describe reproduction and reproductive systems in poultry

 

·        Describing reproduction and reproductive systems in poultry

·        Drawing reproduction system in poultry

 

·        Charts

·        Farm animals

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 6-8

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 123-124

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 6-8

Teachers guide pg 37-38

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 23-24

·        Top mark Agriculture page 92

 
   

3-4

 

Livestock production selection and Breeding

 

Selection of dairy and beef cattle

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define selection

·        Describe selection of the breeding of stock in cattle

 

·        Defining selection

·        Describing selection of the breeding stock in cattle

·        Drawings in students book

 

·        Farm animals

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        charts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 8-9

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 123-124

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 8-10

Teachers guide pg 38-39

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 24

·        Top mark Agriculture page 91-92

 
 

2

 

1

 

Livestock selection and breeding

 

Selection of sheep and goats

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe selection of the breeding stock

 

·        Describing selection of the breeding stock

·        Note taking

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Farm animals

·        Diagrams in students book

·        charts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 8-9

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 123-124

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 11-12

Teachers guide pg 37-38

 
   

2

   

Selection of pigs and camels

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe selection of the breeding stock

 

·        Describing the breeding stock

·        Note taking

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Farm animals

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 1-6

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 123-124

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 1-5

Teachers guide pg 37-38

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 21-23

·        Top mark Agriculture page 91-92

 
   

3-4

 

Livestock section and breeding

 

Selection of breeding

Methods of selection

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State factors considered when selecting a breeding stock

·        Describe the methods in selection

·        Define breeding

·        Explaining the importance of breeding

 

·        Stating factors considered in selection

·        Describing the various methods used

·        Defining breeding

 

·        Charts

·        Chalkboard

·        Diagrams on students book

·        Farm animals

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 11-16

·        Certificate Secondary Agriculture F2 pg 123-124

·         Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 15-16

Teachers guide pg 38-39

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 24

·        Top mark Agriculture page 93

 
 

3

 

1

   

Breeding

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Explain the terms used in breeding

 

·        Explaining the various terms

 

·        Charts

·        Chalkboard

·        Farm animals

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 16

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 16-19

Teachers guide pg 39-41

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 24-25

·        Top mark Agriculture page 93-94

 
   

2

 

Livestock selection and breeding

 

Signs of heat in livestock cattle, pigs rabbits

 

By the end of the lesson, should be able to

·        Explain the process of mating in cattle, pigs & rabbits

·        State signs of heat in cattle, pigs and rabbits

 

·        Explaining the process of mating

·        Stating signs of heat in pigs, rabbits and cattle

 

·        Farm animals

·        Photographs

·        Students book

·        Farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 16-19

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 19-23

Teachers guide pg 39-41

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 25

·        Top mark Agriculture page 94-95

 
   

3

   

Breeding systems of breeding

 

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State various systems of breeding

·        Explain reasons for breeding systems

·        Describe various

 

 

·        Stating various systems of breeding

·        Explaining reasons for breeding

·        Describing various breeding systems

 

·        Charts

·        Farm animals

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 16-19

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 19-23

Teachers guide pg 39-41

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 25

·        Top mark Agriculture page 94-95

 
  4 Livestock selection and breeding  

Methods of service in livestock

Natural mating

Artificial insemination

Embryo transplant

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        Identify the various services in livestock

·        Describe the methods of services in livestock

·        Explain the advantages & disadvantages of the methods

 

·        Identifying the various methods of services

·        Describing the methods of services in livestock

·        Drawing diagrams

·        Explaining the advantages & disadvantages

 

·        Farm animals

·        A.I technicians

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 20-23

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 23-30

Teachers guide pg 41-43

 

 
 

4

 

1

   

Signs of parturition in livestock

·        Cows

·        Sows

·        Does

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State signs of parturition in cows, sows and does

 

·        Stating signs of parturitions in cows, sows and does

 

·        Coral, photographs

·        A.I Technicians

·        Students book

·        Farm animals

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 24-25

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 41-43

Teachers guide pg 39-41

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 26-27

·        Top mark Agriculture page 96-97

 
   

2

 

Livestock production

Livestock rearing practices

 

Routine

Livestock rearing practices

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define a routine

·        Explain the routine practices in livestock rearing

·        State the importance of each of the practice

 

·        Defining a routine

·        Explaining the routine  practices

·        Stating the importance of each practice

 

·        Livestock structures

·        Livestock feeds

·        Animals farm

·        Livestock

·        Student book

·        photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 27-31

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 33-35

Teachers guide pg 49-51

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 28-29

·        Top mark Agriculture page 98

 
   

3-4

 

Livestock production (IV)

 

Parasite and disease control practices

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State various methods of parasite and disease control

·        Describe the various parasite and disease control practices

 

·        Stating the various control practices

·        Describing various control practices

·        Carrying out the various control practices

 

·        Livestock drugs

·        Livestock tools

·        Photographs

·        Diagrams on the students book

·        Livestock tools

·        Students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 32-36

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 35-39

Teachers guide pg 49-51

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 25

·        Top mark Agriculture page 98-99

 
 

5

 

1

 

Livestock production (IV)

Livestock Rearing

 

Breeding practices

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the breeding practices

·        Describe the various breeding practices

·        Carry out the various practices

 

·        Stating the breeding practices

·        Describing the various breeding practices

·        Carrying out the various practices

 

·        Livestock drugs

·        Livestock tools

·        Photographs

·        Students book

·        Diagrams on the students book

·        Livestock

·        Livestock farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 27-29

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 49-51

Teachers guide pg 49-51

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 30-31

·        Top mark Agriculture page 99

 
   

2

 

Livestock Rearing practices

 

Identification

De-breaking

Tooth clipping

culling

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe de-beaking tooth, clipping and culling

·        Carry out these practices

 

·        Describing de-beaking, tooth clipping and culling

·        Carrying out the practices

·        Drawing the diagrams showing the practices

 

·        Livestock

·        Livestock drugs

·        Livestock tools

·        Students book

·        Photographs

·        Diagrams on the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 41-48

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 41-44

Teachers guide pg 49-51

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 25

·        Top mark Agriculture page 99-100

 
   

3-4

   

Dehorning, shearing, castration

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        describe dehorning, shearing, castration

·        Carry out these practices

 

·        Describing  dehorning, shearing castration

·        Carry out these practices

 

·        Livestock

·        Livestock drugs

·        Livestock tools

·        Students book

·        Photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 45-50

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 41-44

Teachers guide pg 49-51

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 25

·        Top mark Agriculture page 100

 
 

6

 

1

 

Livestock rearing practices

 

Management of cows during parturition

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        Describe the management of a cow parturition

 

·        Describing the management of a cow during parturition

·        Drawing diagrams

 

·        Cows

·        Photographs

·        Students book

·        Veterinary personnel

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 53

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 50-54

Teachers guide pg 49-51

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 170, 295

·        Golden tips agriculture page 277

 
   

2

   

Management of sows, nannies, does, ewes

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the management, does & ewes during parturition

 

·        Describing the management of sows, nannies, does, ewes& during parturition

   

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 53-56

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 54-56

Teachers guide pg 49-51

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 33-34

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 170, 295

·        Golden tips agriculture page 175,295-296

 
   

3-4

 

Bee- keeping

 

·        Importance

·        Bee colony

·        Sitting the a apiary

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the importance of bee keeping

·        Describe the importance of bee keeping

·        Describe the bee conolony

·        Explain factors to consider when citing an apiary

 

 

·        Stating the importance of bee keeping

·        Describing the bee colony

·        Explaining factors to consider when citing an apiary

 

·        Combs

·        Bee hives

·        Apiary

·        Bee handling tools

·        bees

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 56-60

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 51-52

Teachers guide pg 49-51

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 33-34

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 175-176

 
 

7

 

1

 

Bee keeping

 

Types of bee hive stocking the bee hive

Management of bees

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the various types of bee hives

·        Describe the stocking of bee hive and management

 

·        Stating various types of bee hives

·        Describing the stocking of a bee hive and management

 

·        Beehives

·        Combs

·        Apiary

·        Bee handling

·        Students book

·        Protective clothing

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 60-69

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 59-62

Teachers guide pg 51-52

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 33-34

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 175-176

·        Golden tips agriculture page 299-300

 
   

2

 

Bee keeping

 

Importance of fish farming

Types if fuse kept in farm ponds

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define fish farming

·        Explain the importance of fish farming

·        Identifying the types of fish kept in the fish pond

 

·        Defining fish farming

·        Explaining the importance of fish farming

·        Identifying the types of fish kept in pond

·        Drawing diagrams

 

·        Fish nets

·        Fish species

·        Fish ponds

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        Fish food

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 70-73

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 62-64

Teachers guide pg 51-52

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 36

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 175-176

·        Golden tips agriculture page 301

 
   

3

 

Fish Farming

 

Importance of fish farming

Types of fish kept in farm ponds

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define fish farming

·        Explain the importance of fish farming

·        Identifying the types of fish kept in fish pond

 

·        Defining fish farming

·        Explaining the importance of fish farming

·        Identifying the types of fish kept in fish pond

·        Drawing diagrams

 

·        Fish nets

·        Fish species

·        Fish pond

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        Fish pond

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 73-77

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 65-70

Teachers guide pg 52-53

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 36-37

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 177

·        Golden tips agriculture page 301-302

 
 

7

 

4

 

Fish Farming

 

Management

Fish farming

Harvesting and processing fish

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe fish management

·        Explain fish harvesting and processing fish

 

·        Describing fish management

·        Explaining fish harvesting and processing

 

·        Fish pond

·        Fish species

·        Fish nets

·        Students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 73-79

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 65-70

Teachers guide pg 52-53

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 36-37

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 177

·        Golden tips agriculture page 302-303

 
 

8

 

1

 

Livestock Rearing Practices

 

Appropriate handling of livestock during routine management

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Demonstrate a caring attitude towards livestock

 

·        Demonstrating a carrying attitude towards livestock

·        Drawing diagrams

 

·        Diagrams from the student book

·        Farm animals

·        Photographs

·        Livestock handling tools

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 79-81

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 70-75

Teachers guide pg 53-54

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 36-37

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 296

·        Golden tips agriculture page 296

 

 
   

2

 

Farm Structures

 

Farm buildings and structures

Citing parts of a building

Cite preparation

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State factors considered when citing farm structures

·        Describe parts of a building

 

·        Stating factors considered when citing farm structures

·        Describing parts of a building

 

·        Farm buildings

·        Diagrams

·        School farm

·        Student’s book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 83-88

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 77-80

Teachers guide pg 59-60

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 36-37

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 235

·        Golden tips agriculture page 250

 
   

3-4

 

Farm Structures

 

Livestock Structures

Crushes

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify materials used in constructions

·        State the maintenance of a crush

·        Explain the uses of a crush

 

·        Identifying materials used n construction of crush

·        Stating the maintenance of a crush

·        Explaining the various uses of a crush

 

·        Crush

·        Constructional materials

·        Student’s book

·        Photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg93-94

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 81-83

Teachers guide pg 59-60

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 236

·        Golden tips agriculture page 251-252

 
 

9

 

1

 

Farm structures

 

Livestock Structures- Dips

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify materials used in construction of a dip

·        State the maintenance of a dip

·        Explain the uses of a dip

 

·        Identifying materials used in constructions

·        Stating the maintenance of a dip

·        Explaining the uses of the dip

·        Drawing the structures

 

·        Dip construction materials

·        Photographs

·        Diagrams from the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 95-96

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 83-86

Teachers guide pg 60-63

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 36-37

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 236

·        Golden tips agriculture page 252

 
   

2

 

Farm structures

 

Livestock structures

·        Spray race

·        Dairy shed

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify the constructional materials used

·        State the uses of these structures

 

·        Identifying materials used in construction

·        Stating the uses of the structure

·        Drawing the structures

 

·        Diagrams from the students book

·        Photographs

·        Construction materials

·        Spray race and dairy shed

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 99-102

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 86-90

Teachers guide pg 60-63

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 88

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 236

·        Golden tips agriculture page 253-254

 
   

3-4

 

Farm structures

 

Livestock structure

Calf pens

Poultry houses

Rabbits hutches

Pig sty’s

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Name the construction materials used

·        State the uses of these structures

·        Describe the construction of the materials

 

·        Naming the construction materials

·        Stating the uses of the structures

·        Describing the construction of the structures

 

·        Calf pens

·        Poultry houses

·        Rabbit hutches

·        Pig stys

·        Construction materials

·        Photographs

·        Students book

·        Diagrams on the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 194-114,115

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 86-90

Teachers guide pg 60-63

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 88

·        Golden tips agriculture page 254-257

 
 

10

 

1

 

Farm Structures

 

Livestock structures

·        Fish pond

·        Silo

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify the construction materials used

·        Explain the uses of these structures

 

·        Identifying the construction materials

·        Explaining the uses of these structures

 

·        Photographs

·        Students book

·        Constructional materials

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 115, 123

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 100-104

Teachers guide pg 60-63

·        Golden tips agriculture page 250

 
   

2

 

Farm structures

 

Zero grazing unit

Bee hive

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify construction materials used

·        State the uses of these structures

 

·        Identifying the construction materials

·        Stating the uses of these structures

 

·        Zero grazing unit

·        Photographs

·        Students book

·        Construction materials

·        beehive

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 102-104

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 103-106

Teachers guide pg 60-63

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 88

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 235

·        Golden tips agriculture page 259-260

 
   

3-4

 

Farm Structures

 

Farm Stores

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identifying the construction materials used

·        State the uses of these structures

·        Describe the process of constructing a farm store

 

·        Identifying the construction materials

·        Stating the uses of these structures

·        Describing the process of constructing a farm store

 

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        Photographs

·        Farm store

·        Construction materials

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 121-122

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 106-110

Teachers guide pg 64

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 89

·        Golden tips agriculture page 260-261

 
 

11

 

1-2

 

Farm structures

 

Fences

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the types of fences

·        Identify the construction materials used

 

·        Stating types of fences

·        Identifying the construction materials used

·        Explaining the uses of these structures

·        Drawing the fences

 

·        Fences

·        Construction materials

·        Students book

·        Photographs

·        diagrams

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 124-132

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 110-117

Teachers guide pg 65

 

 
   

3-4

 

Farm structures

 

Green Houses

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        State the construction materials used

·        Describe the process of constructing green house

·        Explain the uses of these structures

 

·        Stating the construction materials

·        Describing the process of constructing green house

·        Explaining the uses of the structures

 

·        Green houses

·        Construction materials

·        Diagrams from the students book

·        Students book

·        photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 133-139

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 128-121

Teachers guide pg 66

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 89

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 235

·        Golden tips agriculture page 262

 
 

END TERM ONE EXAMINATIONS

 
 

 

 

 

 
 

AGRICULTURE  FORM 3 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 2

 
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
 

1

 

1

 

Agricultural Economics (III)

Land tenure and reforms

 

Land tenure types

Collective tenure systems

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define land tenure

·        State the types of land tenure

·        Describe the collective tenure systems

 

·        Defining the term land tenure

·        Stating the types of land tenure

·        Describing the collective systems

 

·        Charts

·        Students book

·        Chalk board

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 140-141

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 123-125

Teachers guide pg 74

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 98-99

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 120

·        Golden tips agriculture page 125

 
   

2

   

Individual Tenure System

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the types of individual tenure system

·        Describe individual tenure systems

·        State advantages and disadvantages of this tenure system

 

·        Stating the individual tenure systems

·        Describing individual tenure system

·        Stating advantages and disadvantages of the system

 

·        Title deeds

·        Charts

·        Students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 143-145

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 123-125

Teachers guide pg 74

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 98-99

·        Golden tips agriculture page 124

 
   

3-4

 

Land tenure and reform

 

Land Reforms

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define land reforms

·        Describe the various types of land reforms

·        Explaining the various settlement schemes in Kenya

 

·        Defining land reforms

·        Describing various types of land reforms

·        Explaining the various settlement scenes in Kenya

 

·        Title deeds

·        Students book

·        Charts

·        Chalk board

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 148-157

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 127-155

Teachers guide pg 75-76

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 99

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 120-121

·        Golden tips agriculture page 125-126

 
 

2

 

1

 

Soil and water conservation

 

Soil Erosion

 

By the end of the lesson, the earner should be able to

·        Define soil erosion

·        Explain factors that influence soil erosion

 

·        Defining soil erosion

·        Explaining factors that influence soil erosion

 

·        Excavated areas

·        School farm

·        Photographs

·        Diagrams on the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 158-160

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 137-138

Teachers guide pg 80

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 121

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 120-121

·        Golden tips agriculture page 126

 
   

2

 

Soil and Water Conservation

 

Soil Erosion

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Explain the various agents of erosion

 

·        Explaining various agents

 

·        Photographs

·        School farm

·        Excavated areas

·        Students book

 

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 15-16

Teachers guide pg 38-39

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 24

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 80

·        Golden tips agriculture page 26

 
   

3-4

 

Soil and Water Conservation

 

Soil Erosion

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the various types of soil erosion

 

·        Describing the various types of erosion

 

·        Photographs

·        Students book

·        School farm

·        Excavated areas

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 161-167

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 139-141

Teachers guide pg 80

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 24

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 80-81

·        Golden tips agriculture page 27

 
 

3

 

1

   

River bank erosion

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define river bank erosion

·        Explain the effects of river bank erosion

·        State the control measures

 

·        Defining riverbank erosion

·        Explaining the effects of river

·        Bank erosion

·        Stating control measures

 

·        Photographs

·        River bank

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        charts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 167-168

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 87

·        Golden tips agriculture page 27

 
   

2

   

Mass wasting solifluction

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define mass wasting

·        Explain factors influencing mass wasting

·        Describing effects of mass wasting

 

·        Defining mass wasting

·        Explaining factors influencing mass wasting

·        Describing effects of mass wasting

 

·        Charts

·        Photographs

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 168-173

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 87

·        Golden tips agriculture page 27

 
   

3-4

 

Soil and water conservation

 

Soil control

Measures

·        Biological and cultural control

·        Physical and structural control measures

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the biological, cultural physical and structural control

·        Measures on soil erosion

 

–        Describing the biological, cultural, physical and structural measures of controlling soil erosion

–        Drawing diagrams

 

·        Mesh wire

·        Poles

·        Quarry chips

·        School farm

·        Photographs

·        Excavated areas

·        Students book

·        Garden tools

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 173-186

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 142-149

Teachers guide pg 81

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 122-124

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 81-83

·        Golden tips agriculture page 28-30

 
 

4

 

1-2

 

Soil and Water  Conservation

 

Water Harvesting

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·        Name methods used to harvest water

·        Describe water harvesting and conservation techniques

·        Explain the micro catchment and their uses

 

·        Naming methods used to harvest water

·        Describing water harvesting and conservation

·        Explaining micro catchment

·        Stating their uses

 

·        Dams

·        Tanks

·        Reservoirs

·        Wells

·        Photographs

·        School farm

·        Garden tools

·        Gutters

·        Ponds

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 187-191

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 149-159

Teachers guide pg81-82

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 124-125

·        Access secondary Agriculture Revision page 83-85

·        Golden tips agriculture page 30-31

 

 
   

3-4

 

Weeds and weed control

 

Weeds

·        Definition

·        Identification

·        classification

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

(a)    define a weed

(b)    identify the various weeds

(c)     classify the weeds in various groups

 

·        defining weeds

·        observation

·        identifying the weeds

·        classify the weeds

 

·        weed specimen

·        school farm

·        photographs

·        students book

·        diagrams in the students books

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 192-201

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 161-164

Teachers guide pg 87-88

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 73-74

·        Golden tips agriculture page 63-64

 
 

5

 

1-2

 

Weeds and weed control

 

Weeds

Identification

classification

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        identify the various weeds

·        classify the various weeds

 

·        identifying the various weeds

·        classifying the various weeds

 

·        weed specimen

·        school farm

·        photographs

·        diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 193-200

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 161-164

Teachers guide pg 87-88

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 73-74

·        Access secondary agriculture page 89

·        Golden tips agriculture page 63-64

 
   

3-4

 

Weeds and weed control

 

Weeds competitive abilities of weeds

Harmful effects of weeds

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify the various weeds

·        Classify the various weeds

 

·        Identify the various weeds

·        Classifying the various weeds

 

·        Weed specimen

·        School farm

·        Photographs

·        Diagrams in students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 200-202

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 159-161

Teachers guide pg 87-88

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 73-74

·        Access secondary agriculture page 89-90

·        Golden tips agriculture page 64-65

 
 

6

 

1

 

Weeds and weed control

 

Weed control

·        mechanical

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe mechanical weed control

 

·        Describing mechanical weed control

 

·        weed specimen

·        school farm

·        photographs

·        diagrams in the students book

·        garden tools

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 209-210

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 169-170

Teachers guide pg 88-92

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 76

·        Golden tips agriculture page 64-65

 
   

2

 

 

 

Cultural and biological control

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe biological and cultural weed control method

 

 

·        Describing the biological and cultural weed control method

·        Note taking

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Garden tools

·        Students book

·        Photographs

·        School farm

·        Farm specimen

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 210-211

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 178

Teachers guide pg 93-95

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 76

·        Golden tips agriculture page 65

 
   

 

3-4

   

Chemical and legislative weed control methods

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Explain ways in which chemicals kill weeds

·        State the classification of herbicides

·        Explaining factors affecting selectivity and effectiveness of herbicides

·        Identifying the precautions in using chemicals

·        Stating the advantages and disadvantages of herbicides

 

·        Explaining ways in which chemicals kill weeds

·        Stating the classifications of herbicides

·        Explaining factors affecting selectivity and effectiveness of herbicides

·        Identifying the precautions in using chemicals

·        Stating the advantages and disadvantages of herbicides

 

·        Garden tools

·        Students book

·        Photographs

·        School farm

·        Weed specimen

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 203-208

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 170,172-175

Teachers guide pg 88-92

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 74

·        Golden tips agriculture page 90

·        Access secondary Agriculture page 65-66

 

 
 

7

 

1

 

Crop pest and diseases

 

Crop Pests

 

By the of the end lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define a pest

·        Explain harmful effects of crop pests

 

·        Defining a pest

·        Explaining the harmful effects of crop pests

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Students book

·        Specimens of crop pests

·        Crops attacked

·        Pesticides

·        Photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 213-214

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 177-178

Teachers guide pg 93-95

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 76

 

 
   

2

   

Crop Pests

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Classify pests based on mode of feeding

·        Classify pests based on crop part attacked

 

·        Classifying pests based on mode of feeding

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Crops attacked specimens of crop pests

·        Photographs of pests

·        Students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 214

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 177-178

Teachers guide pg 93-95

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 76

·        Golden tips agriculture page 67

·        Access secondary Agriculture page 97

 

 
   

3-4

 

 

 

Crop Pests

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Classify pest on the basis of stage of growth classification (scientific)

·        Level of damage and place where they are found of habitat

 

·        Classify pests

·        Asking and answering questions

·        Note taking

 

·        Crops attacked

·        Specimen of crop pests

·        Photographs of pests

·        Students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 214-215

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 177-178

Teachers guide pg 93-95

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 76

·        Golden tips agriculture page 67

·        Access secondary Agriculture page 97

 
 

8

 

1-2

 

Crop pests and diseases

 

Crop pests

·        Identification

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        identify common pests

·        describe the various pests and the stage, part of the crop attacked

 

·        Identifying common pests

·        Describing the various pests on the various basics

·        Asking and answering questions

·        Note making

 

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        Photographs of pests

·        Pesticides

·        Crops attacked

·        Specimens of crop pests

·        Students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 215-226

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 179-184

Teachers guide pg 93-95

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 77-79

·        Golden tips agriculture page 67-69

·        Access secondary Agriculture page 97-98

 
   

3-4

   

Crop pests

·        identification

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        identify common pests

·        describe the various pests and the stage part of the crop attacked

 

·        Identifying common pests

·        Describing the various pests

·        Asking and answering questions

·        Note making

 

·        Crops attacked

·        Specimens of crop pests

·        Photographs of pests

·        Pesticides

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 215-226

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 179-184

Teachers guide pg 93-95

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 77-79

·        Golden tips agriculture page 67-69

 
 

9

 

1

 

Crop Pests and disease control

 

Crop pests

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe harmful effects of pests

·        Identify pest control measures

 

·        Describing the effects of pests

·        Identifying pests control measure

 

·        Students book

·        Specimens of crop pests

·        Crops attacked

·        Pesticides

·        Photography

·        Pests

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 213-226

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 83-86

Teachers guide pg 60-63

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 88

·        Golden tips agriculture page 70-75

·        Access secondary Agriculture page 97-98

 
   

2

   

Crop pests control

·        cultural

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the cultural pest control measures

 

·        Describing the cultural pest

·        Control measures

·        Note taking

·        Asking and answering questions

 

 

·        Students book

·        Crops attacked

·        Pesticides

·        Photographs of pests

·        School farm

·        Specimen of crop pests

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 228-230

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 185-186

Teachers guide pg 63-70

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 79

·        Golden tips agriculture page 71-72

 

 
 

 

 

3

 

Crop pest and diseases

 

Crop pests

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the mechanical pest control

 

·        Describing mechanical pest control

·        Asking and answering questions

·        Note taking

·        Students book

·        Specimen of crop pests

·        Crops attacked

·        Photographs of pests

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 226-227

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 186-188

Teachers guide pg 95

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 80

·        Golden tips agriculture page 7

 
   

4

   

Crop pests

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the biological pest control

 

·        Describing biological pest control

·        Asking and answering questions

·        Note taking

·        Explanations

 

·        Photographs of pests

·        Crops attacked

·        Specimens of crop pests

 

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 232

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 186-188

Teachers guide pg 95

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 88

·        Golden tips agriculture page 73-74

 
 

10

 

1

   

Crop pests

 

 

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe chemical methods of pest control

 

·        Describing the chemical methods of pest control

·        Note taking

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Photographs of pests

·        Crops attacked

·        Specimens of crop pests

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 230-232

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 188-190

Teachers guide pg 95

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 88

 

 
   

2

 

Crop pests and disease

 

Crop diseases

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define a plant disease

·        Classify plant diseases

·        Explain harmful effects of crop diseases

 

·        Defining a plant diseases

·        Classifying plant diseases

·        Explaining the harmful effects of crop diseases

 

·        Students book

·        Specimens of diseases crops

·        Photographs

·        Fungicides

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 233-236

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 190-191

Teachers guide pg 96-99

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 88

 
 

 

 

3-4

 

 

Crop pest and diseases

 

Crop diseases

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify common crop diseases

 

·        Identifying common crop diseases

·        Asking questions and answering

·        Note taking

 

·        Students book

·        Specimens of diseased crops

·        Photographs

·        Fungicides

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 233-241

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 191-197

Teachers guide pg 96-99

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 82-84

 

 
 

11

 

1-2

   

Crop diseases

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        classify  plant diseases

 

·        Classifying plant

·        Diseases

·        Asking and answering questions

·        Explanations

 

·        Specimen of diseased crops

·        Photographs

·        Fungicides

·        Students book

·        Diagrams in the students books

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 233-238

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 191-197

Teachers guide pg 96-99

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 82-84

·        Golden tips agriculture page 74-77

·        Access secondary Agriculture page 97-98

 
   

3-4

   

Crop diseases

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the disease control crops

·        Carry out crop diseases control

 

·        Describing the disease control in crops

·        Carrying out crop disease control

 

 

 

·        Students book

·        Specimen of disease crops

·        Photographs

·        Fungicides

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 239-240

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 182-184

Teachers guide pg 95

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 84

·        Golden tips agriculture page 77-78

·        Access secondary Agriculture page 104-106

 
 

END TERM 2 EXAMINATION

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
   
 

AGRICULTURE  FORM 3 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 3

 
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS  
 

1

 

1

 

Crop Production (VI)

 

Production of maize

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Name hybrids, composites of maize

·        State the ecological requirement of maize

·        Describe, field establishments, management and harvesting maize & marketing

 

·        Naming hybrids composites

·        Stating the ecological requirements

·        Describing management harvesting and field establishment

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Garden tools

·        Samples of maize

·        School farms

·        Student book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 242-250

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 200-202

Teachers guide pg 101-102

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 52,54,55

·        Golden tips agriculture page 57-58

   
   

2

   

Production of millet

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Name hybrids, composites and cutting of millet

·        State the ecological requirement of millet

·        Describe field establishment, management, harvesting and marketing

 

·        Stating the ecological requirements

·        Describing field establishment management harvesting and marketing

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

·        Naming the hybrids, composites cultwas

 

·        Garden tools

·        School farm

·        Sample of millet

·        Diagrams on the students book

·        charts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 250-255

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 201-214

Teachers guide pg 101-102

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 56

·        Golden tips agriculture page 82-84

·        Access secondary Agriculture page 58

   
   

3

   

Production of sorghum

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Name composites, hybrids, cultivar of sorghum

·        State the ecological requirements of sorghum

·        Describe the field establishment, management marketing and harvesting

 

·        Naming the hybrids, composite cultivars

·        Stating the ecological requirement of sorghum

·        Describing the field establishment management, harvesting and marketing

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Charts samples of sorghum

·        Garden tools

·        Diagrams on the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 250-255

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 201-204

Teachers guide pg 101-102

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 56

·        Golden tips agriculture page 84-85

·        Access secondary Agriculture page 59-60

   
   

4

 

Production Crop

 

Production of Beans

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the varieties of beans grown

·        Describe the varieties of beans grown

·        Explaining the ecological requirements of maize

·        Describe field establishment management and harvesting marketing

 

·        Stating the varieties

·        Explaining the ecological requirements of maize

·        Describing field establishment, harvesting and marketing

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        School farm

·        Garden tools

·        Seed samples

·        Students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 250-255

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 214-215

Teachers guide pg 101-102

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 56-58

·        Golden tips agriculture page 85-87

·        Access secondary Agriculture page 59-60

   
 

2

 

1-2

 

Crop production

 

Gross Margin of Crop enterprises

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Compare and contrast the gross margin of maize/millet, sorghum and beans

 

·        Comparing and contrasting gross margins of maize, millet, sorghum and beans

 

·        Charts

·        Receipts

·        Tables

·        Chair

·        Farm records

·        Students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 243-268

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 218-219

Teachers guide pg 101-102

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 56-58

·        Golden tips agriculture page 85-87,79-90

·        Access secondary Agriculture page 57-63

   
   

3-4

 

Crop production

 

Harvesting of cotton, sugarcane, pyrethrum

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        describe the harvesting of cotton, pyrethrum and sugarcane

 

 

·        describing the harvesting of cotton, pyrethrum and sugarcane

 

·        photographs

·        diagrams in the students book

·        school farm

·        farm harvesting tools

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 263-264

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 221-224

Teachers guide pg 102-103

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 58-59

·        Golden tips agriculture page 85-87,79-90

·        Access secondary Agriculture page 57-63

   
 

3

 

1

 

Crop Production

 

Harvesting of cotton, sugarcane, pyrethrum

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the  harvesting of cotton, pyrethrum and sugar cane

 

·        Describing the harvesting of cotton, pyrethrum and sugarcane

 

·        Photographs

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        School farm

·        Farm harvesting tools

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 264-266

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 224-226

Teachers guide pg 103-105

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 59

   
   

2

 

Crop production

 

Harvesting of tea and coffee

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the harvesting of tea and coffee

 

 

·        Describing the harvesting of tea and coffee

 

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        Photographs

·        Harvesting tools

·        Charts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 226-268

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 226-228

Teachers guide pg 103-105

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 59-60

·        Golden tips agriculture page 88-89

 

   
   

3-4

 

Crops forage

 

Pastures classifications

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define pastures and forage crops

·        Classify pastures

 

·        Defining pastures and forage crops

·        Classifying pastures & forage

 

 

·        Students book

·        Specimens of pastures

·        Photographs of forage crops charts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 269-272

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 230-234

Teachers guide pg 106-107

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 59-60

·        Golden tips agriculture page 108

·        Access secondary revision page 72

   
 

4

 

1

   

Pastures establishment management

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe pasture establishment

·        Describe pasture management

 

·        Describing pasture establishment

·        Describing pasture management note taking

 

 

 

·        Specimens of pastures

·        Photographs of forage crops

·        Garden tools

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 272-276

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 234-236

Teachers guide pg 106-107

·        Golden tips agriculture page 109

·        Access secondary revision page 72

   
   

2

   

Pastures utilizations

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe various methods of pasture utilization

 

·        Describing various methods of pastures

·        Utilization

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Specimens of pastures

·        Photographs of forage crops

·        Students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 277-280

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 326-340

Teachers guide pg 107

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 59-60

·        Golden tips agriculture page 109

 

   
   

3

 

Forage Crops

 

Grazing methods

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Explain the two grazing methods

·        State the advantages and disadvantages of each

 

·        Explaining the two grazing methods

·        Stating the advantages and disadvantages of each

 

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        Photographs

·        charts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 280-283

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 59-60

·        Access secondary agriculture page 73-74

·        Golden tips agriculture page 110-111

   
   

4

   

Folder crops

Napier grass

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the ecological requirements of Napier grass

·        Describe the field establishment, management and utilization

 

·        Describing the field production of Napier grass

 

 

 

·        Samples of folder crop

·        School farm

·        Photographs

·        Charts

·        Students book

 

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 283-287

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 241-242

Teachers guide pg 107

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 88

·        Access secondary revision page 94

   
 

5

 

1

 

Forage crops

 

Sorghum

Guatemala grass

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the production of Guatemala grass under ecological requirements, establishment, management and utilization

·        Describe the production of sorghum under ecological requirements establishment, management and utilization

 

·        Describing the field production of sorghum and Guatemala grass

 

·        Students book

·        Specimens of fodder crops

·        Photographs of forage crops

·        School farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 269-272

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 242-244

Teachers guide pg 108

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 89

 

   
   

2

   

Kales

·        Edible

·        Canaa

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        describe the production of kales under ecological requirements

 

·        Explanations

·        Note taking

 

·        School farm

·        Photographs of folder

·        Specimen of fodder crops

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 291-292

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 244-245

Teachers guide pg 108

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 89-90

·        Golden tips agriculture page 108

·        Access secondary revision page 75-76

   
   

3-4

   

Fodder crops

Lucerne

Kenya white clover

 

By the of the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the production of Lucerne under ecological requirements, establishment and utilization

·        Describe the production of Kenya white clover under ecological, requirement establishment, management and utilization

 

·        Describing the production of Lucerne, Kenya white clover

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Students book

·        Specimens of

·        Fodder crops

·        Photographs of Forage crops

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 269-272

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 230-234

Teachers guide pg 106-107

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 59-60

·        Golden tips agriculture page 108

·        Access secondary revision page 72

   
 

6

 

1

 

Forage Crops

 

Fodder crops

Disodium

Marigold

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the production of disodium under ecological requirements establishment, management and utilization

·        Describe the production of marigold under ecological requirements and utilization

 

·        Describing the field production of disodium and marigold

 

·        Students book

·        Specimens of fodder crops

·        Photographs of fodder crops

·        School farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 295-297

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 247-248

Teachers guide pg 108

·        Golden tips agriculture page 112

·        Access secondary revision page 77

 

 

   
   

2

 

Forage Crops

 

Agroforestry

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe agroforestry under ecological requirement, management and utilization

 

·        Describing agro forestry tree/bushes

·        Asking and answering questions

·        Note making

 

·        Student’s book

·        Specimens of fodder crops

·        Photographs of forage crops

·        School farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 297-299

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 248-249

Teachers guide pg 108

·        Golden tips agriculture page 86,99

   
   

3-4

 

 

 

Forage Conservation

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define lay making

·        Describe silage making

·        Describe standing lay

 

·        Defining lay making

·        Describing the making of lay silage and standing lay

·        Asking and answering questions

·        Drawing diagrams

 

·        Tools used

·        School farm

·        Specimens of lay

·        Silage

·        School farm

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 250-253

Teachers guide pg 114-116

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 66-67

·        Golden tips agriculture page 112-113

   
 

7

 

1

 

Health Livestock Diseases (III)

 

Terms used in livestock diseases

Protozoan diseases

E.C.F (East Coast Fever)

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define terms used in livestock diseases

·        Describe cause symptoms and control

 

·        Defining terms

·        Describing the East Coast Fever

·        Asking and answering questions

·        Note making

 

·        School farms

·        Photographs of animals with the disease

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        Cattle dip

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 308-312

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 114-116

Teachers guide pg 106-107

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 66-67

 

 

   
   

2

   

Anaplasmosis

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the cause, symptoms and control of anaplasmosis

 

·        Describing anaplasmosis

 

·        School farm

·        Photograph of animal with the disease

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        Students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 312

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 256-257

Teachers guide pg 114-116

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 66-67

·        Golden tips agriculture page 316

·        Access secondary revision page 204

   
   

3

 

Livestock diseases

 

Protozoan diseases

Coccidiosis

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe cause, symptoms and control of coccidiosisis

 

·        Describing coccidiosisis

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Photographs of animals with the disease

·        School farm

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 312-313

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 257-258

Teachers guide pg 114-116

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 66-67

·        Golden tips agriculture page 316

·        Access secondary revision page 204

   
   

4

   

Tryponosomiasis

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe cause, symptoms and control of Trypanosomiasis

 

·        Describing trypanosomiasis

·        Note taking

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Photographs of animals with the disease

·        School farm

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 314

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 257-258

Teachers guide pg 114-116

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 66-67

·        Golden tips agriculture page 317

·        Access secondary revision page 204-205

   
 

8

 

1

   

Bacteria diseases

Fowl typhoid

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe cause, symptoms and control of fowl typhoid

 

·        Describing fowl typhoid

·        Note making

·        Answering and asking questions

 

·        Farm

·        Photographs of the affected animals

·        Diagrams in the students books

·        School farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 317-318

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 259-260

Teachers guide pg 116-117

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 67-71

 

   
   

2

   

Foot rot

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe cause, symptoms and control of foot rot

 

·        Describing foot rot

·        Disease

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        School farm

·        Students book

·        Photographs of animal affected

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 318-319

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 260-261

Teachers guide pg 116-117

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 67-71

·        Access secondary revision page 205-206

   
   

3

 

Livestock Health (III) diseases

 

Bacterial diseases

Contagious abortion

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the causes, symptoms and control of contagious abortion

 

·        Describing contagious abortion

·        Note making

 

·        Photographs of affected students book

·        Farm (Livestock)

·        School farm

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 319-320

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 261-262

Teachers guide pg 116-117

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 67-71

·        Access secondary revision page 206

   
   

4

   

scours

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the causes, symptoms and the control of scours

 

·        Describing scours

·        Note taking

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Photographs of animals with the disease

·        Students book

·        Farm (Livestock)

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 320-321

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 261-262

Teachers guide pg 116-117

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 314

·        Access secondary revision page 206-207

   
 

9

 

1

   

Bacterial Black quarter

Mastitis

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the cause, symptoms and control of mastitis

·        Describe the cause, symptoms and control of black quarter

 

·        Describing the mastitis

·        Describing the black quarter

·        Note making

·        drawings

 

·        school farm

·        diagrams in the students book

·        Photographs of affected animals

·        Students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 321-322,315-317

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 263-264

Teachers guide pg 116-117

·        Golden tips agriculture page 314

·        Access secondary revision page 207

   
   

2

   

Anthrax Pneumonia

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe cause, symptoms and control of anthrax

·        Describe cause, symptoms and control of pneumonia

 

·        Describing the Anthrax

·        Describing the pneumonia

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Photographs of animal with the disease

·        School farm

·        Livestock farm

·        Diagrams on the students books

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 312

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 256-257

Teachers guide pg 116-117

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 67-71

·        Golden tips agriculture page 314

·        Access secondary revision page 208-209

   
   

3-4

 

Livestock Diseases

 

Viral Diseases

Foot & Mouth

Rinderpest

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe cause, symptom and control of foot and mouth

·        Describe cause, symptom and control of Rinderpest

 

·        Describing foot and mouth and Rinderpest

·        Asking and answering questions

·        Note making

 

·        Photographs  of the animal with the disease

·        Students book

·        Chalk board

·        School farm

·        Livestock farm

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        Charts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 325-326

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 267-269

Teachers guide pg 116-117

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 71-74

·        Access secondary revision page 209-210

   
 

10

 

1

   

New castle

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe cause, symptoms and control a new castle

 

·        Describing new castle

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Photographs of animal with the disease

·        School farm

·        Livestock farm

·        Diagrams in the students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 326-327

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 269-270

Teachers guide pg 117-118

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 71-74

·        Golden tips agriculture page 316

·        Access secondary revision page 210

   
   

2

   

Fowl Pox

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe cause, symptoms and control of fowl pox

 

·        Describing fowl pox disease

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Livestock farm

·        School farms

·        Students book

·        Photographs of the affected animal

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 327-329

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 269-270

Teachers guide pg 117-118

·        Golden tips agriculture page 315

·        Access secondary revision page 211

   
   

3

   

Gumboro

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe cause, symptoms and control of Gumboro

 

·        Describing Gumboro

·        Asking and answering questions

·        Note making

 

·        Photograph of affected animal

·        Livestock farm

·        School farm

·        Students book

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 329

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 271-272

Teachers guide pg 117-118

·        Golden tips agriculture page 315

·        Access secondary revision page 211

   
   

4

 

Livestock Diseases

 

African Swine Fever

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe cause, symptom and control of African Swine Fever

 

·        Describing African Swine Fever

·        Note taking

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Photograph of animals with the disease

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        School farm

·        Livestock farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 330-332

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 272-273

Teachers guide pg 118-119

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 66-67

·        Golden tips agriculture page 317

·        Access secondary revision page 212

   
 

11

 

1

   

Nutritional disorders

Milk fever

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe causes, symptoms and control, treatment of milk fever

 

·        Describing milk fever

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Photographs of animals with the disease

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        School farm

·        Livestock farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 330-332

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 272-273

Teachers guide pg 118-119

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 66-67

·        Golden tips agriculture page 317

·        Access secondary revision page 212

   
   

2

   

Bloat

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the cause, symptom and the control of bloat

 

·        Describing bloat diseases

·        Drawing the process of control using surgical means

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Troca and canular

·        Photographs of the animals with the disease

·        Diagrams in the students book

·        School farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 332-333

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 3 pg 272-273

Teachers guide pg 118-119

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 66-67

·        Golden tips agriculture page 317

·        Access secondary revision page 212

   
REVISION  
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
 

AGRICULTURE  FORM 4 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 1

 
 

1

 

1

 

Livestock production (V) poultry

 

Parts of an egg

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify the various parts of an egg

·        Explain the functions of each part of an egg

 

·        Identifying the parts of an egg

·        Explaining the functions of each part of an egg

·        Note making

·        Illustrations

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Labeled diagram of internal structure of an egg

·        Boiled egg

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 1-3

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 1-2

Teachers guide pg 114-116

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 39

·        Golden tips agriculture page 303-304

   
   

2

 

Livestock production (V) poultry

 

Natural incubation

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe natural incubation

·        State the advantages and disadvantages of natural incubation

 

·        Describing natural incubation

·        Stating the advantages and disadvantages of natural incubation

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        A diagram illustrating natural incubation

·        An egg

·        Realic of nesting box

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 1-3

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 1-2

Teachers guide pg 114-116

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 39

·        Golden tips agriculture page 303-304

   
  3-4 Livestock production (V) Poultry  

Artificial incubation

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Outline the conditions necessary for artificial incubation

·        Describe the management of an incubator

·        State the advantages and disadvantages of artificial incubation

 

·        Outline the conditions necessary for artificial incubation

·        Description

·        Stating the advantages and disadvantages of artificial incubation

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Diagrams illustrating  the structure of an artificial incubator

·        Realic of an artificial incubator

·        An egg

 

 

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 7-9

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 5-6

Teachers guide pg 114-116

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 411

·        Golden tips agriculture page 305

   
 

2

 

1

 

Livestock Production (V) poultry

 

Natural Brooding

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define the term brooding

·        Describe natural brooding

 

·        Defining and describing natural brooding

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

·        illustration

 

·        text books

·        diagram of broody hen

·        Realia of a broody hen

·        samples of chicken variety

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 9

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 7

Teachers guide pg 114-116

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 41-42

·        Golden tips agriculture page 305-306

   
   

2

 

Livestock Production (V) Poultry

 

Artificial Brooding

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Explain artificial brooding

·        Identify the requirements in an artificial brooder

 

·        Explanation of artificial brooding

·        Identification of the artificial brooding requirements

·        Note making

·        Illustration

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Diagrams of a brooder

·        Realia of a brooder in a chicken

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 10-13

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 8-10

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 42

·        Golden tips agriculture page 306

   
   

3 and

4

 

Livestock Production (V) Poultry

 

Recring  systems

Free range

Fold system

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe free range on fold system

·        Outline the requirements of free range systems

·        State the disadvantages and advantages of free range and fold system

 

·        Describing free range and fold system

·        Outline the requirements of free range

·        Stating the advantages and disadvantages of free range and fold

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Poultry Farm

·        Sample of chicken feed

·        Photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 14-15

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 11-13

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 43

·        Golden tips agriculture page 306

   
 

3

 

1

 

 

Livestock Production (V) poultry

 

Rearing systems

Free range fold system

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe free range on fold system

·        Outline the requirements of free range systems

·        State the disadvantages and advantages of free range and fold system

 

·        Describing free range and fold system

·        Outline the requirements of free range

·        Stating the advantage and disadvantages of free range and fold system

·        Illustration

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Poultry farm

·        Sample of chicken feed

·        photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 16-18

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 12-13

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 43

·        Golden tips agriculture page 307

 

   
   

2

 

Livestock Production (V) Poultry

 

Rearing systems

Deep litter system

Battery cage system

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Outline the requirements in deep litter system

·        State the advantages and disadvantages of the deep litter and battery cage system

 

·        Outlining the requirements of deep litter

·        Stating the advantages and disadvantages of deep litter on battery cage system

·        Note making

·        Illustration

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Test books

·        School poultry farm

·        Sample of chicken feed

·        photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 18-21

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 12-13

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 45

 

   
   

3

 

Livestock production (V) poultry

 

Stress in chicken

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define the term stress

·        Identify the causes of stress in chicken

·        State the control measures of stress in chicken

 

·        Identifying the causes of stress in chicken

·        Stating the control measures of stress in chicken

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Poultry farm

·        photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 16-18

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 12-13

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 45

·        Golden tips K.C.S.E agriculture page 307

   
   

4

 

Livestock Production (V) poultry

 

Vices in chicken

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify the kinds of vices in chicken

·        Identify the causes of such vices in chicken

·        State the control measures of vices in chicken

 

·        Identifying the vices in chicken

·        Identifying the causes of vices in chicken

·        State the control measures of vices in chicken

 

·        Text books

·        Poultry farm

·        Photos illustrating example of such vices

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 23-24

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 20-21

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 45

·        Golden tips K.C.S.E agriculture page 307

   
 

4

 

1

 

Livestock Production V Poultry

 

Marketing of poultry products

eggs

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the marketing of eggs

 

·        Describing the marketing of eggs

·        Note making

·        Illustration

·        Asking and answering question

 

·        Text books

·        Eggs

·        Poultry farm

·        store

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 24-25

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 22-23

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 46

·        Golden tips K.C.S.E agriculture page 307

   
   

2

 

Livestock production Poultry

 

Marketing of poultry production

Chicken meat

 

By the of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the marketing of chicken meat

 

·        Describing the marketing of chicken meat

·        Note making

·        Illustration

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Poultry farm

·        photos

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 23-24

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 20-21

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 46

·        Golden tips K.C.S.E agriculture page 307

   
  3 and 4  

Livestock production VI (Cattle)

 

Raising of the young stock

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the feeding of a new born calf

·        Describe the preparation of artificial colostrums

·        State the importance of colostrums

 

·        Describing the feeding of a new calf

·        Describe the preparation of artificial colostrums

·        State the importance of colostrums

·        Illustrations

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering of questions

 

·        Text books

·        Dairy farm

·        Calf

·        Sample of artificial colostrums

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 23-24

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 20-21

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 45

·        Golden tips K.C.S.E agriculture page 307

   
5 1 Livestock Production VI (Cattle)  

Methods of calf rearing

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the natural and artificial methods of feeding a calf

·        State the advantages and disadvantages of both natural and artificial rearing

 

·        Describing the methods of rearing

·        Stating the advantages and disadvantages of the methods of rearing

·        Illustrations

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering of questions

 

·        Text books

·        Dairy farm

·        Calf

·        Sample of artificial colostrum

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 29-30

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 26-28

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 48

·        Golden tips K.C.S.E agriculture page 308

   
   

2

 

Livestock Production (Cattle

 

Weaning of calves

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        discuss late weaning and early weaning programmes

 

·        Discussing both weaning and late weaning

·        Illustrating

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Dairy farm

·        Calf

·        Sample of colostrums

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 30-32

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 30-32

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 48

·        Golden tips K.C.S.E agriculture page 308

   
   

3 and 4

 

Livestock production VI (Cattle)

 

Calf housing

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify the types of calf pens

·        Outline the requirements of calf pens

 

·        Identifying the types of calf pens

·        Outlining the requirements of calf pens

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Dairy farm

·        Calf pen

·        Diagrams and photos of calf pens

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 32-34

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 30-32

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 48

·        Golden tips K.C.S.E agriculture page 308-309

·        Top mark series Revision Agriculture pg 124

   
 

6

 

1

 

Livestock production VI (Cattle)

 

Routine management practices

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the various routine practices in managing a calf

 

·        Describing the routine management practices

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Dairy farm

·        Realize on some tools for calf managements

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 34-36

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 30-32

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 49

·        Golden tips K.C.S.E agriculture page 308-309

   
   

2

 

Livestock Production VI (Poultry)

 

Milk and milking

Factors affecting milk composition

Milk secreting and let down

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         explain the factors that affect milk composition

·         Illustrate milk secretion and milk let down

 

·        Explaining factors that affect milk composition

·        Illustrate milk secretion and milk let down

 

·        Text books

·        Milk sample

·        Diagram illustrating the udder

·        Milking equipment

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 36-40

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 32-38

·        Golden tips K.C.S.E agriculture page 309-310

·        Topmark series Revision Agriculture page 124-126

   
   

3 and 4

 

Livestock production VI (Poultry

 

Milk and milking

Clear milk production

Dry cow therapy

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe clean milk production

·        Describe the milking procedure

·        Explain dry low therapy

 

·        Describing clean milk production

·        Describing the milking procedure

·        Explaining dry low therapy

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering question

 

·        Text books

·        Milking equipment

·        Dairy farm

·        cow

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 40-46

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 32-38

·        Top mark series Agriculture Revision Pg 120

   
 

7

 

1

 

Livestock production VI (Cattle)

 

Marketing of milk and beef cattle

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Discuss the marketing of milk

·        Discuss the marketing of Beef

 

·        Discussing the marketing of milk and beef

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Students text book

·        Milk products

·        Photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 47-48

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 38-41

·        Golden tips K.C.S.E agriculture page 310

   
   

2

 

Farm power and machinery

 

Sources of power in the farm

·        Human power

·        Animal power

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe animal power

·        Describe human power

·        Stating the advantages and disadvantages of animal power

 

·        Describing human and animal power

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

·        Stating the advantages and disadvantages of animal power

 

·        Text books

·        Photo of farm workers

·        An agricultural farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 50-51

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 42-45

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 48

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 139

   
   

3 and 4

 

Farm power and machinery

 

Sources of power in the farm

·        Wing power

·        Water power

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe wind power

·        Describe water power

 

·        Describing wind and water power

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Diagrams of wind mill

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 50-51

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 42-45

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 77

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 139

·        Golden tips K.C.S.E agriculture page 308

   
 

8

 

1

 

 

Farm power and machinery

 

Sources of power in the farm

·        biogas

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        describe biogas wood and charcoal fuel

·        state the advantages of biogas charcoal and wood fuel

 

·        describing biogas wood and fuel

·        stating the advantages of biogas, charcoal and wood fuel

 

·        text books

·        wood and charcoal

·        biogas plant

·        photos

·        diagram of biogas digester

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 52-54

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 46-48

·        Golden tips K.C.S.E agriculture page 234-235

   
   

2

 

Farm power and machinery

 

Sources if power in the farm

Fossil fuels

Hydro-power

Geothermal power

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe fossils fuels

·        Describe fossil fuels

·        Describe hydro-power

·        Describe geothermal power

 

·        Describing fossils fuels and hydro-electric power

·        Illustrations

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Photos of a geothermal station

 

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 46-48

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 71

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 139

 

   
   

3 and 4

 

Farm power and machinery

 

Sources of power in the

·        Nuclear power

·        Storage battery

·        Electrical power

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe nuclear power

·        Describe storage battery

·        Describe solar power/radiation

·        Describe electrical power

 

·        Describing nuclear storage battery and solar power

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Storage battery

·        Photos of solar panels

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 54-55

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 51-52

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 401

 

   
 

9

 

1

 

Farm power and machinery

 

Tractor engine

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe a four stroke cycle engine

·        Differentiate between a petrol engine and a diesel engine

 

·        Describing a four structure engine

·        Differentiating between dsel and petrol engine

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Models of engines

·         A tractor

·        photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 56-61

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 53-56

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 140-141

·        Golden tips K.C.S.E agriculture page 308

   
   

2

 

Farm power and machine

 

Tractor engine

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe a two stroke cycle engine

 

·        Describing a two stroke engine

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Models of engines

·        A tractor

·        photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 61-63

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 57-58

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 141

 

   
   

3 and 4

 

Farm power and machinery

 

Systems of a tractor

Fuel system

Electrical system

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the fuel system

·        Describe the electrical system

·        Describe the maintenance of the fuel and electrical systems

 

·        Describing the fuel and electrical systems

·        Illustrations

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

·        Describing the maintenance of the fuel and electrical systems

 

·        Text books

·        Models of engines

·        A tractor

·        photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 63-69

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 60-62

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 141-142

 

   
 

10

 

1

 

Farm power and machinery

 

Systems of a tractor

Cooling systems

Lubricating system

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the coding and its maintenance

·        Describe the lubricating system and its maintenance

 

·        Describing the coolong and lubricating systems and their maintenance

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Models of engines

·        photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 69-72

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 63-64

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 143-144

   
   

2

 

Farm power and machinery

 

Systems of a tractor

Transmission system

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the power transmission system

 

·        Describing the power transmission system

·        Note making

·        Illustration

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Models of engine

·        photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 72-76

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 64-65

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 144

 

   
   

3 and 4

 

Farm power and machinery

 

Tractor servicing

Short term services

Long term services

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Discuss the various practices on tractor maintenance, both short term services and long term services

 

·        Discussion the tractor maintenance Practices

·        Illustrations

·        Asking and answering questions

·        Note making

 

·        Text books

·        Models of engines

·        A tractor

·        photographs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 76-77

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 65-66

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 144-145

 

   
PRE MOCK EXAMINATIONS  
 

 

 

 

 
 

AGRICULTURE  FORM 4 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 2

 
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS  
 

1

 

1

 

Farm power and Machinery

 

Farm implements

Tractor drawn implements

Disc plough

trailer

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Outline the various methods of attachment

·        Describe a trailer and its maintenance

 

·        Outline the methods of attachment

·        Describing the trailer and its maintenance

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering of questions

 

·        Text books

·        Photos illustrating the various implements

·        Agricultural farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 77-79

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 66-70

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 81

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 145

 

   
   

2

 

Farm Power and Machinery

 

Tractor drawn implements

Disc plough

Mould board plough

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify the various parts of a disc plough and mould board plough

·        State the maintenance practices of a disc plough and mould board plough

·        State the differences between a disc plough and a mould board plough

 

·        Identification of the parts of a disc and mould board plough

·        Stating the maintenance practices of disc and mould board plough

·        Stating the differences between a disc and mould board plough

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Photos illustrating a disc and mould board plough

·        An agricultural farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 79-82

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 73-77

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 81-82

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 145-148

 

   
   

3 and 4

 

Farm power and machinery

 

Tractor drawn implements

Harrows

Disc harrows

Spring time harrows

Spike tooth harrow

Sub soilers

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the various types of harrows and sub-soilers

·        State the maintenance practices of the various types of harrows and sub-soilers

 

·        Description of the various types of harrows and sub-soilers

·        Stating the maintenance of practices of the harrows and sub-soilers

·        Illustration

·        Asking and answering questions

·        Note making

 

·        Text books

·        Photos illustrating the harrows and sub-soiler

·        An agricultural farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 82-84

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 73-77

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 82

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 147-148

   
 

2

 

1

 

Farm power and machinery

 

Tractor drawn

Implements

Ridges

rotary tillers

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the ridges and rotary tillers

·        State the maintenance practices of the ridges and rotary tillers

 

·        Description of the ridgers and rotary tillers

·        Stating the maintenance practices of the ridges and rotary tiller

·        Illustrations

·        Not making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Photos illustrating the ridges and rotary tillers

·        An agricultural farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 85

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 77-79

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 82

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 148-149

   
   

2

 

Farm power and machinery

 

·        Tractor drawn Implements

·        Mowers

·        Planters and seeders

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the various types of mowers and the planters and seeders

·        State the maintenance practices of the various types of mowers and the planters and seeder

 

·        Description of the various types of mowers and planters and seeders

·        Stating the maintenance of practices of mowers and planters and seeders

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Photos

·        Illustrating the mowers and planters and seeders

·        An agricultural farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 85-88

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 79-81

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 83

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 149-151

 

   
   

3 and 4

 

Farm power and machinery

 

·        Tractor drawn implements

·        Cultivators and seeders

·        Sprayers

·        Harvesting machines

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the cultivators/seeders, sprayers and various types of harvesting machine

·        State the maintenance practices of the cultivators/seeders, sprayers and harvesting machines

 

·        Describing the cultivators/seeders, sprayers and harvesting machines

·        Stating the maintenance practices of the cultivators seeders, sprayers and harvesting machines

·        Illustrations

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Photos illustrating the

·        Cultivators/seeder

·        Sprayers

·        Harvesting machines

·        An agricultural farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 88-90

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 81-82

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 84

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 149-151

 

   
 

3

 

1

 

Farm power and machinery

 

·        Animal drawn implements

·        Ox-drawn plough

·        Ox-line harrow

·        Ox-carts

·        Ox-ridger

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the ox-drawn plough, ox-time harrow, ox-carts and ox-ridger

·        State the maintenance practices of animal drawn implements

·        Identify the parts of an ox-drawn plough

 

·        Describing the animal drawn implements

·        Stating the maintenance of the animal drawn implements

·        Identifying the parts of an ox-drawn plough

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Photos illustrating the animal drawn implements

·        An agricultural farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 91-95

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 82-85

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 84-85

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 152-154

 

   
   

2

 

Agricultural economics (III) production economics

 

·        -nation income

·        GDP

·        GNP

·        Per capital income

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Explain how household firms and central authority contributes to the national income

·        Explain the terms GDP, GNP and per capital income

 

·        Explaining how household firms and central authorities contribute to national income

·        Explaining  – GDP, GNP, Per capital income

·        Illustrations

·        Note making

·        Questioning and answering

 

·        Text books

·        Chart containing formulae

·        Newspapers

·        Statistical abstractor

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 96-98

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 87-90

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 101-102

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 161

 

 

   
   

3 and 4

 

Agricultural Economics (III) productions economics

 

Factors of production

·        Land

·        labour

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        discuss land and labour and factors of production

·        to explain how land and labour affect production

 

·        Discussing land and labour as factors of production

·        Explanation of how land and labour affect production

·        Illustrations

·        Note making

·        Questioning and answering

 

·        Text books

·        Newspapers

·        Statistical abstracts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 99-102

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 92-94

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 102

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 161-162

 

   
 

4

 

1

 

Agricultural Economics (III) production economics

 

Factors of production

·        Capital

·        The management

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Discuss capital and management as factors of production

·        Explain how capital and management affect production

 

·        Discussion of capital and management factors of production

·        Explanation of how capital and management affect production

·        Illustrations

·        Note making

·        Questioning and answering

 

·        Text books

·        News papers

·        Statistical abstracts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 102-104

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 94-96

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 103

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 162

   
   

2

 

Agricultural economics (III) production economics

 

The production function

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define production function

·        Identify the types of production function

·        Describe the types of production function

 

·        Defining production function

·        Identifying the types of production functions

·        Describing the types of production functions

·        Illustrating

·        Asking and answering of questions

 

·        Text books

·        Graphs of various production functions

·        Tables of various production functions

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 104-111

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 96-99

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 103

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 162-163

 

   
   

3 and 4

 

Agricultural Economics (II) production economics

 

Economic laws and principles

Law of diminishing rations

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the law of diminishing returns

·        Explain how it affects agricultural production

 

·        Stating the law of diminishing return

·        Explanation of how the law affects agricultural production

·        Illustration

·        Questioning and answering

 

·        Text books

·        Graphs on the three zone of a production of a function

·        Tables on production under this law

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 111-115

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 100-102

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 103

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 163

   
 

5

 

1

 

Agricultural economics (II) production economics

 

Economic law and principles

Law of substitution

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the law of substitution

·        Explain how law of substitution affects Agricultural productions

 

·        Stating the law of substitution

·        Explanation of how the law affects agricultural production

·        Illustration

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Charts

·        Statistical abstracts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 115-117

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 102-103

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 103

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 163

   
   

2

 

Agricultural economics (III) production economics

 

Economic law and principles

·        Law of equimarginal returns

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the law of equimarignal returns

·        Explain how the law of equimarginal returns affects production

 

·        Stating the law of equimarginal returns

·        Explaining how the law affects production

·        Illustration

·        Questioning and answering

 

·        Text books

·        Charts

·        Statistical abstracts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 117

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 104-105

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 104

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 164

   
   

3 and 4

 

Agricultural Economics (III) production economics

 

Principle of profit maximization

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the principle of profit maximization

·        Describe various types of costs

·        Explain the concept of revenue

 

·        Stating the principle of profit maximization

·        Describe the various types of costs

·        Explanation of the concept of revenue

·        Illustration

·        Questioning and answering

 

·        Text books

·        Tables on revenues

·        Charts on revenue

·        Statistical abstracts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 117-121

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 105

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 104

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 164-165

   
 

6

 

1

 

Agricultural economics (II) Production economics

 

Farm planning

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Explain the factors to consider in drawing a farm planning

·        Outline steps in making a farm plan

 

·        Explaining the factor to consider when drawing a farm plan

·        Outlining the steps in making a farm plan

·        Illustration

·        Questioning and answering

 

·        Text books

·        Charts

·        Statistical abstracts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 121-123

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 108-109

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 104

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 165

   
   

2

 

Agricultural Economics (III) production economics

 

Farm budgeting

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define farm budgeting

·        State the importance of farm budgeting

 

·        Definition of farm budgeting

·        Stating the importance of farm budgeting

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Questioning and answering

 

·        Text books

·        Farm records

·        Ag agricultural farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 123-127

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 110-112

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 104

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 165

   
   

3 and 4

 

Agricultural economics (III) production economics

 

Farm budgeting

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the types of budgeting in agriculture

 

·        Description of the types of budgeting

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Question and answering

 

·        Text books

·        Farm records

·        An agricultural farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 123-127

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 110-112

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 104

 

   
 

7

 

1

 

Agricultural Economics (III) Production economics

 

·        Agricultural support services available to the farmer

·        Extension and training

·        Banking

·        Credit services

·        Agricultural Research

·        marketing

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        explain the agricultural support services available to the farmers

·        extension and training

·        banking

·        credit

·        AI services

·        Agricultural research

·        marketing

 

·        Explanation of the Agricultural support services available to the farmer

·        Illustrations

·        Note making

·        Questioning and answering

 

·        Text books

·        Farm record

·        An agricultural farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 112-132

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 112-114

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 105-106

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 165-166

 

 

   
   

2

 

Agricultural Economics (III) production economics

 

Agricultural support services available to the farmers

Veterinary services

Farm input supplies

Tractor hive services

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Explain the Agricultural support services available to a farmer

·        Veterinary services

·        Farm input supplies

·        Tractor hive services

 

·        Explanation of the Agricultural support services available to a farmer

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Farm records

·        An agricultural farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 133-134

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 110-112

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 104

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 166-167

   
  3 and 4  

Agricultural economics (IV) farm accounts

 

Risks and uncertainties in farming

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Identify the types of risks on uncertainties of a farmer may face

·        Outline the ways in which a farmer may adjust to uncertainty

 

·        Identification of the types of risk and uncertainties

·        Outlining the ways in which a farmer may adjust to the uncertainties

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Questioning and answering

 

·        charts

·        Text books

·        Financial documents

·        An agricultural farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 134-136

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 116-119

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 106

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 166-167

   
 

8

 

1

 

Agricultural economics (IV) farm accounts

 

·        Importance of keeping farm accounts

·        Type of farm accounts

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        State the importance of keeping farm accounts

·        Identify the types of farm accounts

 

·        Stating the importance of keeping farm records

·        Identification of the types of farm accounts

·        Illustration

·        A sample of financial documents

·        charts

 

·        charts

·        Text books

·        Financial documents

·        An agricultural farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 139

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 121

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 108

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 168

   
   

2

 

Agricultural economics (IV) farm accounts

 

Financial statements

Invoice

Statement of accounts

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe an invoice and a statement of account

·        Distinguish between invoice and a statement of account

 

·        Distinguishing an invoice and a statement of account

·        Describing an invoice and a statement of accounts

·        Note making

·        Questioning and answering

 

 

·        Text books

·        An invoice

·        An agricultural firm

·        A chart

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 140-141

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 122-124

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 108

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 168

   
   

3 and 4

 

Agricultural economics (IV) farm accounts

 

·        Receipts

·        Delivery note

·        Purchase order

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe a receipt, delivery note and purchase order

·        Distinguish between, receipts, delivery note and a purchase order

 

·        Description of a receipt delivery note and a purchase order

·        Distinguish the three documents

·        Illustrations

·        Note making

·        Questioning and answering

 

·        Text books

·        A receipt

·        A railway note

·        A purchase order

·        An agricultural farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 141-145

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 124-125

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 108

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 168-169

   
 

9

 

1

 

Agricultural Economics (iV) Farm accounts

 

Books of accounts

·        Cash book

·        inventory

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        identify the cash book and the inventory

·        state the uses of cash book and the inventory

 

·        identification of the cash book and the inventory

·        stating the uses of the cash book and the inventory

·        note making

·        illustration

·        questioning and answering

 

·        Text books

·        A cash account

·        An inventory

·        Charts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 146-150

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 125-127

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 109

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 169

   
   

2

 

Agricultural Economics (IV) farm accounts

 

Books of Accounts

·        Journal

·        ledger

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        describe the journal and ledger

·        state the uses of a journal and ledger

 

·        description of the ledger and journal

·        stating the uses of the ledger and journal

·        illustration

·        questioning and answering

 

·        Text books

·         A ledger account page

·        A journal

·        Charts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 150-153

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 127-129

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 109

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 169

   
   

3

 

Agricultural Economics (IV) farm accounts

 

Financial statements

·        Balance sheet

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Analyses and prepare a balance sheet

 

·        Analyzing and preparing a balance sheet

·        Illustration

·        Questioning and answering

·        Note taking

·        Explanation

 

·        Text books

·        Charts

·        Format of balance sheet

·        A  balance sheet

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 154-157

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 124-125

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 109-111

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 169

   
 

10

 

1

 

Agricultural economics (IV) farm accounts

 

·        Financial statements

·        Profit and loss account

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Analyse and prepare a profit and loss account

 

·        Analyzing and preparing profit and loss account

·        Note making

·        Explanation

·        Illustration

·        Questioning and answering

 

·        Text books

·        Charts

·        A format of profit and loss account

·        A profit and loss account

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 157-159

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 132-133

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 109-111

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 169

   
   

2

 

Agricultural economics (IV) farm accounts

 

Financial statements

Cash analysis

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Analyses and prepare a cash analysis

 

·        Analyzing and preparing cash analysis

·        Explanation

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Questioning and answering

 

·        Text books

·        Charts

·        A cash analysis

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 159-162

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 133-135

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 111

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 169

   
MOCK EXAWMINATIONS  
 

 

 
 

 

AGRICULTURE  FORM 4 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 3

 
 

1

 

1

 

Agricultural Economics (V)

Agricultural marketing and organization

 

Market and marketing

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define marketing and market

·        Identify the types of markets

·        Describe the various types of markets available

 

·        Definition of market and marketing

·        Identification of the types of markets

·        Description of the various types

·        Note taking

·        Asking and answering questions

·        Illustrations

 

·        Text books

·        Charts

·        Local markets

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 137-138

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 164-166

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 109-111

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 173

   
   

2

 

Agricultural Economics (V)

Agricultural marketing and organization

 

Demand, supply and price theory

demand

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define demand

·        State the law of demand

·        Explain the factors influencing demand for a commodity

 

·        Define demand

·        Stating the law of demand

·        Explaining the factors influencing demand

·        Note taking

·        Asking and answering questions

·        illustration

 

·        Text books

·        Charts

·        A local market

·        Tables

·        Graphs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 166-169

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 139-141

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 114

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 174

   
   

3 and 4

 

Agricultural Economics (V)

Agricultural marketing and organization

 

 

Elasticity of Demand (ED)

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe elasticity of demand

·        Explain the factors influencing elasticity of demand

 

·        Description ofelasticity

·        Explanation of the factors that influencing elasticity of demand

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Questioning and answering

 

·        Text book

·        Local market

·        Tables

·        Graphs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 170-174

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 140-144

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 114

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 174

 

   
 

2

 

1

 

Agricultural Economics (V)

Agricultural marketing and organization

 

Supply

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define supply

·        State the law of supply

·        Explain the factors influencing supply of a commodity

 

·        Definition of supply

·        Explanation

·        Stating the law of supply

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Questioning and answering

 

·        Text book

·        A local market

·        Charts

·        Tables

·        Graphs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 174-177

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 144-145

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 115

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 174-175

 

   
   

2

 

Agricultural Economics (V)

Agricultural marketing and organization

 

 

Elasticity of Supply (ES)

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe elasticity of supply

 

·        Description of elasticity of supply

·        Explanation

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        A  local market

·        Tables

·        Graph charts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 177-178

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 145-149

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 115

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 17

   
   

3 and 4

 

Agricultural economics (V)

Agricultural marketing and organization

 

Price Theory

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define the term price

·        Discuss the determination of market prices

 

·        Definition of the term price

·        Discussion of the market price determination

·        Illustrations

·        Note taking

·        Questioning and answering

 

·        Text books

·        A local market

·        Tables

·        graphs

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 178-179

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 149-150

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 115

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 175

   
 

3

 

1

 

Agricultural Economics (V)

Agricultural marketing and organization

 

Price control

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe price control

·        Illustrate the price control graphically

 

·        Description of price control

·        Illustration of price control graphically

·        Note taking

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        A local market

·        Tales

·        Graphs

·        charts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 178-179

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 149-150

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 115

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 175

   
   

2

Agricultural Economics (V)

Agricultural marketing and organization

 

·        Marketing

·        Marketing functions

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define the term marketing

·        Identify the meaning of the term marketing functions

·        Discuss the various marketing functions

 

·        Discussion

·        Defining marketing

·        Explanations

·        Illustration

·        Note making

·        Questioning and answering

 

·        Text books

·        Charts

·        A local market

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 186-189

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 153-156

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 116

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 176

   
 

4

 

1

Agricultural Economics (V)

Agricultural marketing and organization

 

Agricultural organizations

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe agricultural organizations

·        List the various agricultural organizations

·        List the functions of the various organizations

 

·        Description

·        Listing the agricultural organization

·        Listing functions of the organization

·        Illustration

·        Note taking

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Charts

·        A local market

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 189-192

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 157-159

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 92-94

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 176

   
   

2

Agricultural Economics (V)

Agricultural marketing and organization

 

Co-operative societies

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Define a co-operative

·        Describe the formation of a co-operative

·        Outline the principles of co-operatives

·        Give the types of co-operative societies

·        State the functions of farmers co-operative societies

 

·        Defining a co-operative

·        Description

·        Outlining principles of a co-operative

·        Giving types of co-operatives

·        Stating the functions of a co-operative

 

·        Text books

·        Local market

·        Wall charts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 192-195

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 159-162

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 117

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 176-177

   
   

3 and 4

 

Agricultural Economics (V)

Agricultural marketing and organization

 

Association and unions

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        List the various agricultural union

·        State the roles of agricultural unions

 

·        Listing the various unions

·        Stating their roles

·        Illustrations

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Farmers

·        Magazines

·        Wall charts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 192-195

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 159-162

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 117

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 177

   
 

5

 

1

 

Agroforestry

 

·        Forms of Agro foresty

·        Importance of agroforestry

 

By the end of the lesson,, the learner should be able to

·        Define agroforestry

·        Describe the various forms of agroforestry

·        State the importance of agroforestry

 

·        Definition of agroforestry

·        Description

·        Stating the importance of agroforestry

·        Illustration

·        Note taking

·        Questioning and answering

 

·        Text books

·        Specimen of fees and shrubs

·        Charts

·        Photos

·        Agroforestry farm

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 200-203

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 166-168

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 139

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 22

 

   
   

2

 

Agroforestry

 

Tree nursery

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        List various types of tree nurseries

·        Describe the various types of tree nurseries

 

·        Listing the types of nurseries

·        Description

·        Note making

·        Illustration

·        Asking and answering questions

 

·        Text books

·        Nursery books

·        Nursery beds

·        Agroforestry farm

·        Charts

·        photos

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 203

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 168-170

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 100-101

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 23

   
   

3 and 4

 

Agroforestry

 

Nursery establishment and management

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Discuss the establishment of tree nurseries

·        Describe the management of tree nurseries

 

·        Discussion

·        Description

·        Illustration

·        Note taking

·        Asking and answering questions

·        explanation

 

·        text books

·        garden tools

·        tree seedlings

·        charts

·        watering cans

·        nursery beds

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 203

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 168-170

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 100-101

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 23

 

   
 

6

 

1

 

Agroforestry

 

Care and management of trees

Agroforestry practices

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Discuss the various care and management of trees

·        Discuss the various agroforestry practices

 

·        Discussion

·        Explanation

·        Illustration

·        Asking and answering questions

·        Note making

 

·        Text books

·        Nursery beds

·        Watering cans

·        Garden tools

·        Tree seedlings

·        charts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 208-212

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 174-175

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 143

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 25-26

   
   

2

 

Agroforestry

 

·        Sites for agroforestry trees

·        Tree harvesting methods

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Describe the sites for agroforestry trees

·        Discuss the various tree harvesting methods

 

·        Description

·        Discussion

·        Note making

·        Illustration

·        Question and answers methods

 

·        Text books

·        Nursery  beds

·        Watery cans

·        Garden tools

·        Tree seedlings

·        Charts

 

·        KLB secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 212-217

·        Longhorn secondary Agriculture form 4 pg 176-179

·        Gateway Agriculture revision paper 2 page 144

·        Top Mark Series Agriculture Revision pg 26-27

 

   
 

STUDY LEAVE/PREPARATION FOR K.C.S.E

 

 

Download physics lesson plans for all topics

Here are all the Physics secondary school lesson plans for all topics. You can also download the editable and pdf lesson plans below.

FREE PHYSICS LESSON PLANS (FORM 1-4)

FORM 4 TERM 1

SUBJECT: PHYSICS.

TOPIC 4: ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM.

TEACHER’S NAME: …………………………………………        TSC NO: …………….    

SCHOOL/ INSTITUTION   : ……………………………………………………………….

FORM: 4                                                     TERM: 1                          YEAR……………..

NUMBER OF STUDENTS…….                    SUBJECT:  PHYSICS

TOPIC: ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM.

SUB-TOPIC: THE ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM

WEEK: ……..                                                 LESSON NUMBER: ……..

DATE: ……..                                                  TIME: ……….

OBJECTIVES:By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;

-Describe a complete electromagnetic spectrum.

LESSON PRESENTATION

TIME CONTENT LEARNING ACTIVITIES RESOURCES REFERENCE
5 MINUTES INTRODUCTION

Define electromagnetic spectrum.

Discussion.

Questions and answers.

 

-Chalk board/white board.

-A piece of chalk/ marker pen.

 

-Golden tips Physics pages 174
30 MINUTES BODY DEVELOPMENT

-Discussions on the charge in wave length of electromagnetic radiations

explanations

-Discussions on the charge in wave length of electromagnetic radiations

explanations

charts showing the components of the electromagnetic spectrum -Secondary physics KLB students book 4 page 79

-Principles of physics (M.Nelkon) pages 345

-Golden tips Physics pages 174

5 MINUTES CONCLUSION

Giving assignment on the sub-topic.

 

Questions and answers.

 

-Chalk board/white board.

-A piece of chalk/ marker pen.

 

-Golden tips Physics pages 174

 

SELF-EVALUATION:­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

TEACHER’S NAME: …………………………………………        TSC NO: …………….    

SCHOOL/ INSTITUTION   : ……………………………………………………………….

FORM: 4                                                     TERM: 1                          YEAR……………..

NUMBER OF STUDENTS…….                    SUBJECT:  PHYSICS

TOPIC: ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM.

SUB-TOPIC: PROPERTIES OF ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES.

WEEK: ……..                                                 LESSON NUMBER: ……..

DATE: ……..                                                  TIME: ……….

OBJECTIVES:By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;

-State the properties of electromagnetic waves

LESSON PRESENTATION

TIME CONTENT LEARNING ACTIVITIES RESOURCES REFERENCE
5 MINUTES INTRODUCTION

Review the previous lesson.

Discussion.

Questions and answers.

 

-Chalk board/white board.

-A piece of chalk/ marker pen.

 

-Principles of physics (M.Nelkon) pages 345

 

30 MINUTES BODY DEVELOPMENT

Explaining the properties of each component of the electromagnetic spectrum

Explaining the properties of each component of the electromagnetic spectrum Charts showing the properties of electromagnetic waves -Secondary physics KLB students book 4 page 80-81

-Principles of physics (M.Nelkon) pages 345

-Golden tips Physics pages 175

5 MINUTES CONCLUSION

Giving assignment on the sub-topic.

 

Questions and answers.

 

-Chalk board/white board.

-A piece of chalk/ marker pen.

 

-Principles of physics (M.Nelkon) pages 345

 

 

SELF-EVALUATION:­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

TEACHER’S NAME: …………………………………………        TSC NO: …………….    

SCHOOL/ INSTITUTION   : ……………………………………………………………….

FORM: 4                                                     TERM: 1                          YEAR……………..

NUMBER OF STUDENTS…….                    SUBJECT:  PHYSICS

TOPIC: ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM.

SUB-TOPIC: DETECTION OF ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM.

WEEK: ……..                                                 LESSON NUMBER: ……..

DATE: ……..                                                  TIME: ……….

OBJECTIVES:By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;

-Describe the methods of detecting electromagnetic radiations

LESSON PRESENTATION

TIME CONTENT LEARNING ACTIVITIES RESOURCES REFERENCE
5 MINUTES INTRODUCTION

Review the previous lesson.

Discussion.

Questions and answers.

 

-Chalk board/white board.

-A piece of chalk/ marker pen.

 

-Golden tips Physics pages

175-176

30 MINUTES BODY DEVELOPMENT

Demonstrating and explaining how to detect electromagnetic radiations

Demonstrating and explaining how to detect electromagnetic radiations Radiation detectors

Charts showing detectors of electromagnetic radiation

-Secondary physics KLB students book 4 page 81

-Golden tips Physics pages

175-176

5 MINUTES CONCLUSION

Giving assignment on the sub-topic.

 

Questions and answers.

 

-Chalk board/white board.

-A piece of chalk/ marker pen.

 

-Golden tips Physics pages

175-176

 

SELF-EVALUATION:­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

TEACHER’S NAME: …………………………………………        TSC NO: …………….    

SCHOOL/ INSTITUTION   : ……………………………………………………………….

FORM: 4                                                     TERM: 1                          YEAR……………..

NUMBER OF STUDENTS…….                    SUBJECT:  PHYSICS

TOPIC: ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM.

SUB-TOPIC: APPLICATIONS OF ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION.

WEEK: ……..                                                 LESSON NUMBER: ……..

DATE: ……..                                                  TIME: ……….

OBJECTIVES:By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;

-Describe the applications of electromagnetic radiations including greenhouse effect

LESSON PRESENTATION

TIME CONTENT LEARNING ACTIVITIES RESOURCES REFERENCE
5 MINUTES INTRODUCTION

Outline some of the applications of electromagnetic radiations.

Discussion.

Questions and answers.

 

-Chalk board/white board.

-A piece of chalk/ marker pen.

 

-Golden tips Physics pages 175-176
30 MINUTES BODY DEVELOPMENT

Discussions of application of electromagnetic radiations

Discussions of application of electromagnetic radiations Pictures and chart on application of electromagnetic radiations -Secondary physics KLB students book 4 page 82

-Principles of physics (M.Nelkon) pages 336

-Golden tips Physics pages 175-176

5 MINUTES CONCLUSION

Answering questions from the learners.

 

Questions and answers.

 

-Chalk board/white board.

-A piece of chalk/ marker pen.

 

-Golden tips Physics pages 175-176

 

SELF-EVALUATION:­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

TEACHER’S NAME: …………………………………………        TSC NO: …………….    

SCHOOL/ INSTITUTION   : ……………………………………………………………….

FORM: 4                                                     TERM: 1                          YEAR……………..

NUMBER OF STUDENTS…….                    SUBJECT:  PHYSICS

TOPIC: ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM.

SUB-TOPIC: PROBLEMS ON C=FX.

WEEK: ……..                                                 LESSON NUMBER: ……..

DATE: ……..                                                  TIME: ……….

OBJECTIVES:By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;

-Solve numerical problems involving C=fx

LESSON PRESENTATION

TIME CONTENT LEARNING ACTIVITIES RESOURCES REFERENCE
5 MINUTES INTRODUCTION

Ask probing questions.

Discussion.

Questions and answers.

 

-Chalk board/white board.

-A piece of chalk/ marker pen.

 

-Secondary physics KLB students book 4 page 80
30 MINUTES BODY DEVELOPMENT

-Problem solving

-Discussions

-Explanations

-Questions and answers

 

-Problem solving

-Discussions

-Explanations

-Questions and answers

 

-Questions and answers exercises -Comprehensive secondary physics students book 4 pages 45

teachers book 34pages 20-21

-Secondary physics KLB students book 4 page 80

5 MINUTES CONCLUSION

Giving assignment on the whole topic.

 

Questions and answers.

 

-Chalk board/white board.

-A piece of chalk/ marker pen.

 

-Secondary physics KLB students book 4 page 80

 

SELF-EVALUATION:­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

See more lesson plans below.

DOWNLOAD FREE HIGH SCHOOL MATERIALS


FREE UPDATED NOTES

FORM ONE NOTES

FORM TWO NOTES

FORM THREE NOTES

FORM FOUR NOTES

FREE LATEST EXAMS WITH MARKING SCHEMES

FORM ONE EXAMS

FORM TWO EXAMS

FORM THREE EXAMS

FORM FOUR EXAMS

FORM 1-4 FREE EXAMS

SCHEMES OF WORK

KCSE REVISION MATERIALS

Secondary schools free lesson plans per subject.

English Free Lesson Plans Download

French Free Lesson Plans Download

German Free Lesson Plans Download

Arabic Free Lesson Plans Download

Music Free Lesson Plans Download

Kiswahili Free Lesson Plans Download

Mathematics Free Lesson Plans Download

Biology Free Lesson Plans Download

Physics Free Lesson Plans Download

Chemistry Free Lesson Plans Download

General Science Free Lesson Plans Download

History and Government Free Lesson Plans Download

Geography Free Lesson Plans Download 

Home Science Free Lesson Plans Download

Arty and Design Free Lesson Plans Download

Agriculture Free Lesson Plans Download

Woodwork Free Lesson Plans Download

Metalwork Free Lesson Plans Download

Building Construction Free Lesson Plans Download

Power Mechanics Free Lesson Plans Download

Electricity Free Lesson Plans Download

Drawing and Design Free Lesson Plans Download

Aviation Technology Free Lesson Plans Download

Computer studies Free Lesson Plans Download

Business Studies Free Lesson Plans Download

Kenya Sign Language (KSL) Free Lesson Plans Download

Islamic Religious Education (IRE) Free Lesson Plans Download

Christian Religious Education (CRE) Free Lesson Plans Download

AGRICULTURE Form 1 Notes, Revision Questions And Answers Free PDF

FORM ONE AGRICULTURE NOTES

INTRODUCTION TO AGRICULTURE

The word Agriculture is derived from two Latin words Ager which means field andcultura that means cultivation. Therefore agriculture can be defined as field cultivation.

Livestock are all the domesticated animals.

Definition of agriculture:

Agriculture is defined as the art and science of crop and livestock production.

As an art

Involves use of learned skills and performing them manually (by hand).E.g.

  • Tilling of land.
  • Construction of farm structures.
  • Measuring distances.
  • Machine operations.
  • Harvesting of crops.
  • Feeding and handling animals.
  • Marketing of Agricultural produce.

As a science

It involves experimentation and application of scientific knowledge e.g. in areas such as:

  1. Soil science (pedology) —study of soil.
  2. Crop pathology—Study of crop diseases.
  3. Entomology— Study of insects and their control.
  4. Agricultural Engineering— soil and water conservation and farm power.
  5. Genetics—Plant and animal breeding.

Production  — Are activities that increase the quality and quantity of something.

Crop production activities include: land preparation, planting, fertilizer and manure application, weeding, pest control, disease control and harvesting.

Livestock production activities include:

  • Selection and breeding.
  • Rearing the young stock.
  • Parasite and disease control.
  • Obtaining products from animals.

Branches of agriculture

  1. Crop production: e.g. Field crop farming, pomology, Floriculture, olericulture.etc.
  2. Livestock production: e.g. Apiculture, Poultry keeping, aquaculture.etc.
  3. Soil science.
  4. Agricultural Economics.
  5. Agricultural Engineering.

Crop farming or Arable farming:  Is the cultivation of crops on cultivated land. E.g. In pure stands (monocropping) or mixed stands (intercropping).

Include:

  1. Field crops: Are crops grown on large areas of land. Are either Annual crops like cereals and pulses or perennial crops e.g. coffee, tea, sisal, cane etc.
  2. Horticultural crops: Are perishable crops and are exported to earn foreign exchange. Include:
  3. Floriculture: Growing of flowers e.g. tuber rose, roses, and carnations.
  4. Olericulture: Growing of vegetables e.g. French beans, cabbages, tomatoes.etc..
  5. Pomology: Growing of fruits e.g. avocado, mangoes and citrus.

      Livestock farming:  Include:

  1. Pastoralism (mammalian livestock farming). Is the rearing of farm animals on pastures. E.g. cattle, goats, pigs, sheep, camels and rabbits.
  2. Fish farming (Aquaculture); Is the rearing of fish in fish ponds. Fish is a cheap source of proteins.
  • Bee keeping: ( Apiculture); Is the rearing of bees in bee hives. Bees provide ; Honey and Wax, income, Medicine, pollination of flowers.etc.
  1. Poultry keeping; Is the rearing of birds for meat and eggs, manure, income. Etc. Include classes of birds such as chicken ( most common), Ducks, geese, Ostrich, pigeon and Turkeys etc.

Agricultural Economics: Deals with utilization of scarce resources i.e. of land, labour, capital and management. It aims at maximizing output while minimizing costs.

Agricultural Engineering; Deals with use and maintenance of farm tools and equipment, farm machinery and farm structures.

 

FARMING SYSTEMS

A farming system is an organization of the farm and all the enterprises in relation to each other.

It can be extensive or intensive.

Extensive system

Characteristics

  1. Large tracts of land.
  2. Low capital investment per unit area.
  3. Low labour per unit area.
  4. Low yields per unit area.

Intensive system

Characteristics

  1. Small tracts of land.
  2. High capital per unit area.
  3. High labour investment per unit area.
  4. High yields per unit area.

Extensive or intensive farming can be carried out on small or large scale of land.

The scale of production depends on:

  • Level of technology.
  • Land availability.
  • Capital availability.
  • Skilled labour available.
  1. Large Scale Farming

Characteristics

  • Large tracts of land.
  • Heavy capital investment.
  • Skilled labour and qualified man power.
  • High level of management.
  • It’s for commercial purpose.
  • Low operation costs per unit of production since it makes use of economies of scale.
  • Depends on efficient transport.
  • Requires good market system.
  • Most of the work is mechanized.
  • Provides more employment.

It includes plantation farming and Ranching.

  1. Plantation farming.

Characteristics

  • Large tracts of land.
  • Production of only one crop.e.g. Tea plantations in Kiambu and Kericho, Coffee in Kiambu, Sugarcane in Muhoroni, Sisal in Mombasa, Pineapple in Thika.
  1. Ranching :Is the keeping of livestock ( beef animals) in marginal range areas.

It is an improved pastoral-nomadism because:

  • Animals are enclosed in an area.
  • Diseases are controlled.
  • Pastures are improved.
  • Supplementary feeds and water are provided.
  • Pests and parasites are controlled.
  • There is provision of extension staff.

N.B The livestock carrying capacity is low because of limited pasture.

Ranching is becoming more and more common in Kenya because of:

  • High meat demand.
  • High population pressure on high potential areas.
  • Arable farming is becoming smaller.
  1. Small Scale Farming

Characteristics

  • Small piece of land.
  • Use of improved technology.
  • Production of crops and livestock is spread throughout the year.
  • Goods are produced for subsistence or commercial purpose I,e sale of surplus goods..
  • Does not require heavy capital investment.

Advantages

  • Little capital is required.
  • Source of livelihood to small scale farmers.

Methods of Farming

  1. Mixed Farming
  • This is the growing of crops and rearing of animals on the same farm.

Advantages

  • It is a method of diversification whereby should one enterprise fail, the farmer can benefit from the other.
  • There is mutual benefit between the crops and livestock where crops provide feed for livestock and animals provide them with farm yard manure.
  • There is maximum utilization of resources.

Disadvantages

  • Labour intensive.
  • High initial capital required.
  • Farmer’s attention is divided.
  1. Nomadic Pastoralism

Pastoralism: This is the practice of rearing livestock on natural pastures.

Nomadism:   This is the practice of moving from one place to another.

  • Pastoral –nomadism is therefore the moving of animals from one place to another in search of pasture and water.
  • This is common in the arid and semi-arid areas.
  • Shifting Cultivation
  • Farming on a piece of land continuously until it is exhausted after which the farmer moves to a new more fertile land.
  • It is applicable where;
    • Land is abundant
    • Population is sparse
    • Number of livestock per unit area is low.
    • Land is communally owned.

Advantages of shifting cultivation

  1. It has low capital requirement
  2. There is no pests and diseases build-up
  • Soil structure is maintained
  1. No land disputes as land ownership is not individualized.

Disadvantages of shifting cultivation

  1. Total yields per unit are is low
  2. Farmers have no incentive to develop land and conserve water and soil
  • A lot of time is wasted when the farmer is shifting and building structures.
  1. Not applicable in areas of high population density or where there is high population increase.
  2. iv) Agroforestry

Agroforestry – Involves growing of trees and crops and keeping of animals on the same piece of land at the same time.

Suitable tree species for agroforestry

  • Leucaenaleucocephala
  • Gravillearobusta
  • Calliandracatothrysus
  • Mangiferaindica
  • Sesbaniasesban
  • Lantana camara
  • Cajanuscajan

Advantages of Agroforestry 

  1. Saves labour since some operations can be done at once for both plants and trees
  2. Gives higher combined yield
  • Provide wide variety of agricultural produce
  1. Reduces the risks of total failure
  2. Crops benefit from nitrogen fixing trees.
  3. Trees help in holding the soil firmly
  • Some trees act as livestock fodder.
  • Provides a wider variety of agricultural produce.

Disadvantages of Agroforestry

  1. Mechanization is difficult.
  2. Use of pesticides and fertilizer may be difficult.
  • Productivity may suffer because the skills for managing the different trees

 

FACTORS INFLUENCING AGRICULTURE

  1. HUMAN FACTORS.

They are factors in human beings or the way human beings do things.

The following is a list of human factors that influence agricultural production.

  1. Levels of education and technology
  • This is translated as the ability of a producer who is a farmer to apply appropriate methods and techniques in production using available resources for example, Farmer weighing livestock food to ensure efficiency
  • Good education level makes a farmer able to understand and translate technical language in farming.
  1. Health of the farmers
  • A healthy nation is a productive nation
  • The following are some of the diseases that contribute to lowering agricultural productivity
    • Malaria,
    • Tuberculosis,
    • Typhoid,
    • Pneumonia and HIV/AIDS

Effects of HIV/AIDS on farming

  • Loss of skilled labour
  • Time spent caring for the infected
  • Money spent on treatment
  1. State of economic development
  • The capital earned from economic activities such as farming is used to raise economic growth in the country.
  1. Transport and communication network
  • Good and efficient infrastructure is important for the smooth flow of farm produce from the farm to the consumer.
  • The improvement of technology in communication has improved farmers access to important information from the research stations and other fellow farmers
  1. Government policy on agricultural input and produce taxation
  • The government of Kenya, through different ministries formulates guidelines to be followed by producers of different products. After the guidelines and proposals are legislated they become policies
  1. Availability of storage facilities
  2. Cultural and religious beliefs.
  3. Local and International market forces

Human Factors which improve production

  • Good health of the farmer
  • Availability of money
  • High taxation on imported agricultural produce
  • Availability of ready market for agricultural produce
  • Availability of storage facilities
  • Liberalized market

Human Factors which lower production

  • Restrictive cultural and religious beliefs
  • Poor road network
  1. BIOTIC FACTORS.
  • These are living organisms that affect agricultural production.
  • Biotic factors influencing agriculture can be divided into the following classes.
    • Crop pests: stalk borer damaging maize in the field
    • Decomposers: Cause rotting of organic matter there by releasing nutrients for crop growth.

They help in improving soil structure through incorporating organic matter into the soil.

  • Nitrogen fixing Bacteria: Nitrogen fixing bacteria are found in root nodules of leguminous plants. Improve crop production through increasing soil nitrogen content which crops require for proper growth.
  • Livestock parasites: suck blood and transmit diseases to animals
  • Pollinators: Bee pollinating maize flower. Pollination in crop production increases yields and viability of seeds.
  • Predators: Eagles can eat chicken, rabbits among other livestock. Eagle can also eat insects and pests for example rats, moles and birds which destroy crops.
  • Pathogens: Causes diseases in livestock and crops thereby lowering quality of produce. Increase cost of production when control measures are implemented. Introduce toxic substances into agricultural products thereby lowering the quality of the produce. Can cause death to crops and animals.

 

Effects of Biotic Factors on Agricultural Production

  1. Pests
  • Feed on crops thereby lowering quantity of agricultural produce.
  • Feed on grains thereby affecting viability of the seeds
  • Act as disease vectors
  • Lower palatability of crop produce
  • Increase cost of production when control methods are applied
  • Create entry points for disease causing organisms
  1. Parasites
  • Irritate livestock
  • Causes anemia in livestock
  • Some block alimentary canal
  • Lower rate of production in livestock
  • Increase cost of production when controlled
  • Some lower quality of hides and skins
  • Some absorb food meant for the livestock thereby lowering the level of production.
  • Some for example ticks transmit disease causing organisms.
  1. CLIMATIC FACTORS.

Climatic factors include:

  • Rainfall
  • Poor rainfall distribution results to wilting of crops
  • Excess rainfall can cause soil erosion
  • Excess rainfall can result to crop failure due to flooding.

The four aspects of rainfall which affect agricultural production include:-

  1. Rainfall Amount

Rainfall amount refers to quantity of rainfall received in a given area for a period of one year. Rainfall amount is measured using a rain gauge in millimeters per annum. The amount of rainfall determines the crops grown in an area.

  1. Rainfall distribution

This refers to the spread of rainfall over the year. Rainfall distribution is very poor in Kenya and therefore irrigation is necessary to supplement the short supply.

  1. Rainfall reliability

This refers to the certainty with which a given amount of rain is expected in a given place in the year.

  1. Rainfall Intensity

This refers to the strength with which rain falls; it is therefore measured in terms of amount per hour.

Rainfall of low intensity is preferred as it improves water infiltration into the soil and causes less soil erosion.

  • Temperature
  • Temperature is the coldness or hotness of a place.
  • Temperature is measured in degrees Celsius using a thermometer.
  • Temperature is influenced by altitude and topography.
  • Temperature decreases with increase in altitude, such that for every 300 meters rise in altitude above sea level temperature decreases by1.7-2.2 degrees Celsius.
  • Each crop has a temperature range within which it can grow referred to as the cardinal range of temperature.
  • For crops to grow well and produce high yields, they require a narrow temperature range within the cardinal range referred to as optimum range of temperature

Effects of temperature on agriculture

Low temperature

  • Slow growth rate.
  • High incidences of disease such as CDB in coffee.
  • Improvement of quality in crops such as tea and pyrethrum.

High temperature

  • High evaporation rate hence wilting in crops.
  • Hasten the rate of maturity due to increased growth rate.
  • Improvement of quality in crops such as pineapples and oranges.
  • Increase incidences of diseases such as leaf rust in coffee.
  • Increased incidences of pest infestation such as aphids in vegetables.

 

Effects of altitude on agriculture

  • Kenya is divided into three ecological zones which include;
  • Low altitude zone o – 1500 meters above sea level
  • Medium altitude zone 1500 – 2500 meters above sea level
  • High altitude zone above 2500 meters above sea level

Crops perform differently when grown in each of these ecological zones and therefore each crop has its most suitable zone for maximum performance as illustrated below.

  • Wind

Wind refers to air in motion.

  • Below is a list of effects of strong wind on agricultural production.
  1. Blowing and bringing rain bearing clouds
  2. Destruction of farm structures
  3. Strong wind may course lodging in weak plants.
  4. Wind erosion on bare land
  5. Increases rate of moisture evaporation
  6. Increase spread of pests and diseases
  7. Agent of dispersal.
  8. Pollination in crops.
  • Light
    • Light is the source of energy which plants require for photosynthesis.
    • During photosynthesis, plants manufacture food using water and carbon dioxide in the presence of sunlight and chlorophyll.

Aspects of light that influence agriculture

i).     Light intensity.

  • This is the strength with which light hits the surface of the earth.
  1. ii) Light duration
  • This is the period of time the plants are exposed to light recorded using a Campbell sunshine recorder

Photoperiodism

  • This is the response of plants toward light duration.

Long day plants

  • These are plants which require more than 12 hours of lighting to flower and produce fruits or seeds e.g. some wheat varieties

Short day plants

  • These are plants which require less than 12 hours of lighting to flower and produce e.g Maize

Day neutral plants

  • These are plants which produce flowers regardless of the duration of lighting they have been exposed to e.g Tobacco.

iii) Light wavelength:

  • This refers to the type or quality of light.  A wavelength is the distance between two corresponding points of a light wave.
  • Chlorophyll absorbs certain wavelengths of light which are not present in artificial light unless it is ultra violet or infra red.

NB/ Green houses can be used to control the temperature, relative humidity and light duration and intensity.

  • Relative Humidity.
  • This is the amount of water vapour held by air at a given temperature.
  • At high humidity the rate of evaporation is low and vice versa.
  1. EDAPHIC/SOIL FACTORS
  • Soil is a mixture of weathered rock and decayed organic matter.
  • It supports plant growth by providing anchorage nutrients and water.
  • Topsoil covers most of the earth and it contains minerals, organic matter, air, water and living organisms.

Soil Formation

  • Soil is formed through the process of weathering.
  • Weathering is the breakdown and alteration of the parent rock near the earth’s surface.
  • Parent rock is first broken into smaller fragments and eventually into individual constituent minerals.
  • The individual minerals combine to form the soil.
  • Weathering is a continuous process and it takes hundreds of years to form a centimeter of the soil.
  • Weathering involves breakdown (disintegration) and building up (synthesis).
  • Weathering process is influenced by the following factors.
  1. Parent material.
  2. Living organisms.

Agents of The Weathering Process.

  1. Physical agents.
  • In this case no chemical changes are involved.
  • These include wind, water, moving ice and temperature.
  • Strong winds carry materials which hit against each other and break into smaller fragments.
  • Raindrops hit the ground with some force causing soil erosion.
  • Moving ice causes rocks to disintegrate.
  • High temperatures in the arid areas cause the rocks to at different rates. During the night, temperatures drop making the rock to contract. The rock surface contracts faster than the inside. This unequal contraction causes the rocks to disintegrate.
  • In places with very low temperature, water gets into the cracks, freezes and becomes ice. As water turns into ice, it increases in volume pushing the rock apart hence disintegration.
  1. Biological agents.
  • This involves living organisms.
  • Large animals like elephants and cattle exert pressure on rocks as they move causing them to break.
  • Mans activities such as mining, quarrying, road construction and earth moving breaks rocks into smaller fragments.
  • Bacteria and fungi help in the breakdown of plant and animal tissues (decomposition). These materials are incorporated into the soil.
  • Termites and moles bring to the surface large quantities of fine materials. This promotes weathering by aerating lower layers of the rocks.
  • Roots of plants force their way through rocks making them to disintegrate. They also produce acids during respiration which dissolves rock minerals. Decayed roots may mix with water forming organic acids which dissolves rock minerals.
  • Chemical agents.
  • This is the decay or decomposition of the rocks. It involves the following processes.
  • As the rain falls through the atmosphere, it dissolves some Co2 forming weak carbonic acid.
  • Over time this acid reacts with the rock minerals particularly calcium carbonate causing decomposition.

Rain water         +      carbon (iv) oxide                                              Carbonic acid.
Carbonic acid    +      Limestone                                               Calcium bicarbonate

  • The calcium bicarbonate formed in this reaction is soluble in water causing water to eventually dissolve the entire rock.
  • Oxygen reacts with many elements found in rocks causing them to disintegrate.

Factors Influencing Soil Formation

  1. Parent rock material
  • This influences the physical and chemical properties of the soil such as
  1. The texture of the soil e.g. granite gives coarse grained soil.
  2. Mineral composition of the soil e.g. rocks containing calcite, feldspar and ferro-magnesium minerals produce deep heavy soils rich in nutrients.
  3. The rate of soil formation e.g. limestone is easily weathered in warm humid regions and the carbonates are easily soluble.
  • Since the parent material influences the physical and chemical properties of the soil, it therefore controls the type of vegetation in an area.
  1. Climate
  • High temperature speed up the rate of chemical reactions.
  • Wind acts as a transport agent and carries the weathered materials from one place to another. Where a lot of weathered materials are deposited, the soils are deep and rich in nutrients.
  • Rainfall provides water which is an important reagent during the weathering process. A lot of rain may cause rocks to break hastening the weathering process.
  • Topography(Relief)
  • This is the shape of the land in relation to the underlying rock of the earth’s surface.
  • It may quicken or slow the weathering process.
  • The slope affects the depth of the soil and kind of vegetation growing in an area.
  • Soils found in flat land and low lying areas tend to be more fertile than those found on higher slopes. Such areas have deeper soils.
  • On a steep slope, erosion is high and such areas have shallow soils.
  1. Living organisms(Biotic factors)
  • The presence of the various agents of biological weathering speeds up the process of soil formation.
  1. Time.
  • The process of soil formation is very slow and takes a lot of time.
  • Deep mature soils are found where soil forming processes have taken place over a long period.
  • If the parent material is resistant to weathering agents, more time is required for the soil to mature.
  • Areas with severe soil erosion have a poorly differentiated soil profile.

 

SOIL PROFILE

  • This is the vertical arrangement of the soil horizons (layers).
  • The horizons show soil layers at different stages of development.
  • Soil forming processes are continuous and the soil develops in depth resulting in the formation of the distinct sequence of soil layers.
  • The layers differ from each other in terms of colour, organic matter content, chemical composition, porosity, depth and the arrangement of soil particles.

The horizons are;

  1. Superficial layer.
  • It’s a thin layer consisting of dead decaying and decayed organic matter covering the soil.
  1. Top soil (Horizon A).
  • It lies beneath the superficial layer.
  • It contains a lot of humus hence it’s darker than the other layers.
  • It’s well aerated and contains active living organisms.
  • It’s well drained and rich in plant nutrients.
  • Most of the roots are found here.
  1. Sub soil (Horizon B).
  • Found beneath the top soil.
  • More compacted and less aerated than top soil.
  • May contain an impermeable layer called the hard pan which may prevent drainage and root penetration.
  • Minerals leached from top soil accumulate here hence this layer is referred to as the layer of accumulation.
  • It has clay deposits.
  1. Substratum/weathered rock (Horizon C).
  • Made up of partly weathered rocks.
  • Has no humus.
  • Hard and impermeable to water.
  • Roots of big trees may reach this layer and draw water from it during the dry season.
  1. Parent rock/Bed rock (Horizon D).
  • It’s found beneath the weathered rock. Soil is formed from this rock. It may contain ponds of water.

NB/ . Between any two bordering soil layers, there is a transitional zone whereby one layer gradually merges into the next one in the series.

The soil profile influences agriculture in the following ways.

  1. Topsoil contains most of the soil nutrients, well aerated and has soil microorganisms.
  2. A well developed profile holds more moisture for plant use than a shallow one.
  3. Loosely packed subsoil allows easy root penetration, drainage and aeration.
  4. Nature and composition of the bedrock determines the mineral components of the whole soil.

SOIL CONSTITUENTS

  1. Mineral matter.
  • The mineral composition of the parent rock determines the mineral constituents of the soil.
  • The mineral matter makes the framework of the soil.
  • It holds the roots firmly in the soil giving anchorage to plants.
  • Between the particles are spaces which are filled with water and air.

Diagram

  1. Organic matter.
  • When the dead materials rot, they are decomposed by bacteria and fungi to form the soil organic matter.
  • Humus is dead organic matter which is in the state of continuous chemical decomposition, transformation and construction.
  • Humus in the soil improves the soil structure.
  • Humus contains plant nutrients such as sulphates, nitrates, phosphates, calcium, magnesium, potassium etc.
  • Air.
  • The soil contains all the gases such as nitrogen, oxygen, Co2 and the rare gases.
  • Availability of air in the soil is influenced by the type of the soil and amount of water in the soil.
  • Oxygen is needed by plants during respiration. It is also required by microorganisms in the soil during decomposition and nitrogen fixation.
  • Excess Co2 in the soil is poisonous to plants and microorganisms.
  • For best crop performance, a balance of soil water and soil air has to be maintained.
  1. Water.
  • Soil contains water. Soil water exists in three forms;
  1. Superfluous water.
  • This is water occupying large air spaces (macro pores).
  • This water is loosely held by the soil and therefore easily lost.
  • The water is readily available to plants but not useful because excess water in the soil brings about poor aeration.
  • A lot of water in the soil causes leaching of nutrients.
  1. Capillary water.
  • This is water occupying small pores (microspores).
  • It is held with grater force by soil particles.
  • It is available to plants and acts as a solvent for plant nutrients.
  • It is also referred to as available water.
  • It leaves most of the macro pores empty allowing aeration of the soil.
  1. Hygroscopic water.
  • This is water that forms a thin film around the soil particles.
  • It is firmly held by soil particles making it not available to plants.
  • Clay particles have a lot of hygroscopic water but sandy soils contain very little hygroscopic water because sandy particles have weaker forces.

Importance of water to plants

  • A solvent for plant nutrients.
  • Raw materials for photosynthesis.
  • During transpiration plants lose a lot of water hence a cooling effect on them.
  • Water makes plant cells turgid hence support.
  1. Living organisms (biotic factors)
  • They are important in the soil in the process of decomposition.
  • They are divided into ;
  1. Soil microorganisms
  • They include bacteria, fungi and protozoa. They help in decomposition process.
  • Some bacteria e.g. Rhizobium spp helps in nitrogen fixation in legumes.
  • Some microorganisms are harmful because they cause diseases.
  1. Soil macro organisms
  • They are larger organisms found in the soil such as moles, earthworms, termites, ants and plant roots.
  • They burrow in the soil aerating the soil and making it loose..

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF THE SOIL

  1. Soil structure
  • This refers to the physical appearance of soil according to how the individual soil particles are arranged, packed or aggregated.
  • The soil structure type is determined by the general shape of the aggregates.
  • Soil structure class is determined by the size of the aggregates.
  • The soil structure grade is determined by the stability or cohesiveness of the aggregates.

 

Types of soil structures

  1. Single grained structure.
  • There is no aggregation at all.
  • Particles are not cemented together. The particles are non-porous and spherical.
  • Mostly found in the top soil of sandy soils, arid climates and alkaline soils.
  1. Crumby soil structure.
  • The aggregates are small, soft and porous irregular in shape.
  • Aggregates are not closely fitted together.
  • Granular soil structure.
  • The aggregates have irregular shape called granules.
  • Soil is very porous when wet.
  • Structure is found in the topsoil of cultivated soils and in the subsoil of soils under grass or bush.
  1. Prismatic soil structure.
  • Aggregate are arranged vertically.
  • The vertical axis of each aggregate is longer than the horizontal axis.
  • When the tops are rounded, they are said to be columnar and when they have flat ends they are prismatic.
  1. Platy soil structure.
  • The aggregates are arranged on top of one another in thin horizontal plates.
  • The structure has poor permeability, drainage and root penetration.
  • Structure is mostly found in top horizon of soils in the forest and in clay soils.
  1. Blocky soil structure.
  • Aggregates are arranged in rectangular blocks.
  • Aggregates easily fit together along vertical edges.

Importance of Soil Structure on Crop Production

         Soil structure influences:

  1. Soil aeration.
  2. Soil drainage and water holding capacity.
  3. Plants root penetrability and anchorage.
  4. Microbial activities in the soil.
  5. Circulation of gases in the soil.

The following farming practices improve the soil structure

  1. Application of inorganic manure into the soil.
  2. Tilling the land at the right moisture content.
  3. Crop rotation.
  4. Minimum tillage.
  5. Cover cropping.

Soil texture

  • It refers to the relative proportion of the various sizes of the mineral particles of soil.
  • Also defined as the coarseness or fineness of the soil when felt between the fingers.
  • Different soil particles have different sizes as shown below.
Particle Size (Diameter) in mm

 

Stones (Gravel) Above 2.00 mm
Coarse sand Between 0.20 – 2.00 mm
Fine sand Between 0.02 – 0.20 mm
Silt Between 0.002 – 0.02mm
Clay Below 0.002 mm

Determination of Soil Texture

This can be done through;

  1. Mechanical analysis.
  2. Chemical analysis.

Mechanical analysis

Apparatus

Garden soil, sieves of different measured mesh diameter, containers and weighing balance.

Procedure

  1. Put a known amount of soil sample into a container.
  2. Crush the soil lumps without breaking the particles.
  3. Pass the soil through the sieve with the largest mesh diameter (2.00 mm) and shake vigorously.
  4. Weigh the soil that remains on the sieve and record.
  5. Repeat the process using other sieves with mesh diameters of 0.2mm, 0.02mm and 0.002mm always using the soil that passes through the previous sieve.

Observation

  • Soil particles left on first sieve of mesh diameter 2.00mm are called gravel.
  • From the second sieve of 0.20mm; coarse sand particles.
  • From the third sieve (0.02 mm); fine sand particles.
  • From the fourth sieve (0.002 mm); silt particles.
  • All the particles that pass through the fourth sieve are clay particles.

Importance of soil texture on crop production

  1. Influences soil fertility.
  2. Affects the organic matter content.
  3. Influences the drainage of the soil.
  4. Influences soil aeration.
  5. Influences water holding capacity
  6. Influences the capillarity or movement of water in the soil.

NB/ Based on texture, soil can be classified as;

  1. Sandy soil. (50-80% sand, 20-50% silt and clay and 0.1-3% organic matter).
  • Are made up of largely sand particles (coarse textured).
  • Have large air spaces hence poor in water retention.
  • Easy to till (light soils)
  • Low fertility due to leaching of minerals.
  • Easily eroded.
  • Free draining.
  • These soils can be improved by addition of organic matter and fertilizers.
  1. Silty loam (20-30% sand, 70-80% silt and clay and 0.1-4% organic matter).
  • Fine textured
  • Well drained
  • Good water holding capacity.
  • Moderately fertile and aerated.
  • Area acidic to moderate pH.
  1. Clayey loam soils. (20-50% sand, 20-60% silt and clay and 0.1 – 6% organic matter).
  • Poorly drained and aerated
  • Fine textured
  • High capillarity and water holding capacity.
  • Slightly acidic to slightly alkaline.
  • Rich in plant nutrients.
  • Difficult to work on when dry or wet.
  • Are suitable for flood irrigation of crops like rice.
  1. Clayey soils. ( > 40% clay content)
  • Made up of largely clay particles.
  • Have small pore spaces hence good in moisture retention.
  • Difficult to till (heavy soils)
  • Poorly drained.
  • Expand when wet, crack when dry.
  • High capillarity.
  • Rich in plant nutrients.
  • Are suitable for flood irrigation.
  • They can be improved by drainage.
  1. Loamy soils. (30-50% sand, 50-70% silt and clay and 0.1 – 4% organic matter).
  • Moderately textured and drained.
  • Slightly acidic.
  • Do not erode easily.
  • Easy to work on.
  • Have a good water holding capacity.
  • They are the most suitable for crop production since they contain good amounts of plant nutrients and organic matter.
  • They can be improved further by planting cover crops to maintain fertility and by adding manures and fertilizers.

Soil Colour

  • This depends on the mineral composition of the rock and the organic matter content.
  • Soils containing a lot of iron are brownish, yellowish or reddish in colour.
  • Soils with a lot of silica are white.
  • Soils with a lot of humus are dark or grey.
  • Soil colour influences the soil temperature.
  • Dark soils absorb and retain more heat than light coloured soils.
  • Relatively high temperatures in the soil enhance microbial activity.

Soil pH

  • This refers to the acidity or alkalinity of the soil solution.
  • It is determined by the concentration of hydrogen ions (H+) or the hydroxyl ions (H) in the soils solution.
  • pH is measured using the pH scale which ranges from 1-14.
  • A pH of less than 7 means that the soil solution is acidic.
  • A pH of more than 7 means that the soil is alkaline.
  • pH of 7 is neutral.
  • As the hydroxyl ions in the soil increase, the soil becomes more alkaline and vice versa.

Influence of Soil pH on Crop Growth

  1. Determines the type of crop to grown in a particular area.
  2. Affects the type of fertilizer to be used.
  • Affects the availability of some nutrients e.g. at low pH phosphorous and molybdenum are less available while high pH makes manganese, potassium, iron, boron and zinc less available.
  1. Very acidic or very alkaline conditions affect activities of soil microorganisms.

Modifying Soil pH

The following are applied to the soil in order to lower its pH (Increase soil acidity)

  • Application of sulphur.
  • Application of acidic fertilizers such as sulphate of ammonia.

In raising its pH (increase alkalinity) the following is done.

  • Application of lime which is a basic compound which raises the soil pH after some time.
  • Application of basic fertilizers.

 

 

Agricultural Economics

  • Agricultural economics is defined as an applied science that aims at maximizing output while minimizing costs, by combining the limited resources of land, capital, labour and management to produce goods and services for use by the society over a period of time.

Basic Economic Concepts

  • The factors of production such as land, capital, labour and management are scarce or limited.
  • The farmer therefore must decide on how to allocate the few/scarce resources to the many competing production needs.
  1. Preference and Choice
  • Since the available resources are limited and production needs are many, a farmer has to make a choice of how to allocate these resources.
  • A farmer therefore has to choose one or several enterprises from very many.
  • The choice made is determined by factors such as needs of the society, farmer’s preference and ecological conditions.
  1. Opportunity Cost
  • Since a choice has to be made from very many competing enterprises, some revenue has to be foregone. For example, a piece of land may be suitable for the production of maize and wheat.
  • If a farmer chooses o grow maize, the returns that the farmer would have obtained from wheat is foregone.
  • The foregone returns are called the opportunity cost. Opportunity cost is the revenue foregone from the best alternative.

Farm Records

  • These are documents kept in the farm showing farm activities over a period of time.
  • They should be neat, concise and complete showing actual amounts, weights, measurements or dates.

 

Uses of farm records to a farmer

  1. Help to determine the value of the farm/ determine assets and liabilities.
  2. Provide history of the farm.
  • Assist in planning and budgeting in various fields.
  1. Helps to detect losses or theft in the farm.
  2. Assists when sharing losses or profits (dividends) for communal owned farms/ partnership.
  3. Help to settle disputes in the farm among heirs.
  • Help to support insurance claim e.g. against fire and theft.
  • Provide labour information like terminal benefits, NSSF due, Sacco dues for all employees.
  1. Help to compare the performance of different enterprises within a farm or other farms.
  2. Help in the assessment of income tax to avoid over or under taxation.
  3. Records help to show whether the farm business is making profit or losses. This information helps in obtaining credit.

Types of Farm Records

  1. Production Records
  • They show the total yield and the yield per unit of each enterprise such as the total number of litres of milk from the whole herd and from each cow.
Name /No.

of cow

Days in the month   TOTALS
1 2 3 etc  
  AM P.M A.M PM AM PM    
1                
2                
3                
4                
etc                
Totals                

 

  1. Inventory records
  • They show all the assets on the farm e.g. livestock, machinery, buildings, crops etc.
  • They are divided into two;
  • Consumable goods such as animal feeds, fertilizers, fuel, pesticides etc.
  • Permanent goodssuch as machinery, farm tools and equipment, buildings etc.

Consumable Goods Inventory

 

Receipts Issues
Date Commodity/Item Quantity Date Issued to Quantity Balance in Stock
             
             
             
             

Permanent goods Inventory

 

Date Commodity/Item Quantity Written off Balance in Stock Comment
           
           
           
           
  1. Field Operations Records
  • They show all the activities being carried in the field such as date of ploughing, planting, fertilizer used etc.
  • They help to work out the cost of production for each field at the end of the season.
  1. Breeding Records
  • They are kept to show the breeding activities and programmes for various animals on the farm.
  • There are different breeding records depending on the animals being reared.
  1. Feeding Records
  • They show the type and amounts of feeds used to feed the animals.

 

Daily feeding record for the month of…………………………………………………………

Enterprise ………………………………………………………………………………………

Type of feed…………………………………………………………………………………….

Date No. of Animals Amount Received

(kg)

Amount Used

(Kg)

Balance in Stock

(Kg)

Remarks
           

 

  1. Health Records
  • They show the health conditions of the animals. They show when actions such as vaccinations and deworming are to be done.
  • They help in the selection of the breeding stock. They also help in calculating the cost of treatment.
Date Disease symptom Animal(s) affected Drugs used Cost of treatment Remarks
           
           
           
  1. Marketing Records
  • They show the commodity, quantity, amount sold, date, rate per unit of the commodity, total value and where sold.

Commodity……………………………………………………………

Date Amount sold Price per unit

(kshs)

Total Value

(ksh)

Where sold Remarks
           
           
  1. Labour Records
  • They show the type of labour, date of employment, rate of payment, skilled and unskilled labour.
  • They are divided into two;
  • Muster Roll – this checks the number of days worked for and therefore determine how much to be paid to a worker.
  • This record shows the name of the worker, payroll number, days worked for, rate of payment, the amount of salary and signature.

Muster Roll

Name of

Person

Pay Roll

No.

Days Days

Worked

Rate of

Pay (kshs)

Total

Pay (Kshs)

Signature of

Workers.

    1 2 3 4 5
Mr. X 08             25 @100/- 2,500/-
Mr. Y 09             25 @100/- 2,500/-
                     
                     

-LabourUtilisation Analysis. They show how labour is utilized on the farm and helps to determine labour allocation; labour requirement for the purpose of budgeting when labour is in peak demand or when to lay off unproductive labour.

 

 

No of hours

Worked

Livestock

Production

Crop

Production

Machinery

Maintenance

Date of

Working

Remarks

 

           
           
           
           
Total cost          

 

CROP PRODUCTION 1

LAND PREPARATION

Land preparation involves all the activities that make land suitable for planting such as

  • –ploughing/digging
  • -harrowing
  • -ridging
  • -rolling etc

A piece of land that has been prepared for planting is called seedbed. In a seedbed the planting materials germinate and grow to maturity and are harvested from same place.

IMPORTANCE OF LAND PREPARATION

  • -To kill the weeds.
  • -Encourage water infiltration into the soil.
  • -To aerate the soil.
  • -Incorporate manure and other organic matter into the soil.
  • -To destroy stages of crop pests such as eggs, larvae, pupa or adults burying them, exposing them to the suns heat or predators and starving them.
  • -To encourage root penetration into the soil.
  • -To make subsequent operations possible e.g. planting, fertilizer application, rolling and ridging.

OPERATIONS IN LAND PREPARATIONS

They include;

  1. Land clearing.
  2. Primary cultivation.
  3. Secondary cultivation.
  4. Tertiary operations.
  5. LAND CLEARING

This is the removal of vegetation cover from the surface before tillage. This is done to prepare land for cultivation and as method of land reclamation. Land clearing is necessary under the following conditions.

  1. When opening up a virgin land.
  2. Where a stalk growing crop was previously planted such as maize.
  3. Where land was left fallow for long time.
  4. Where the interval between primary and secondary cultivation is long such that the land has reverted to the original virgin state.

Methods of Land Clearing

  • Tree felling. Axes, pangas and power saws are used to cut down trees. Bulldozers and root rakers are used in felling trees on a large scale. Removal of stumps and trash later follows.
  • The vegetation cover is set ablaze. The method should be discouraged as it destroys the soil organic matter, soil micro organisms and plant nutrients.
  • This is done to cut small bushes and grasses using slashers, pangas or tractor drawn mowers.
  • Use of chemicals. Chemicals used to kill weeds are called herbicides.
  1. Primary Cultivation

This follows land clearing,

  • Small scale farmers use jembes or fork jembes during hand digging.
  • In Large scale framing ploughing is done using mouldboard or disc plough.
  • Other farmers use ox ploughs.
  • Primary cultivation should be done before the onset of the rains. This ensures that all other subsequent operations are done in good time.

Importance of Primary Cultivation

  1. To remove weeds.
  2. To bury organic matter for easy decomposition.
  3. To facilitate water infiltration and aeration.
  4. To destroy soil borne pests by exposing them to predators and the sun.
  5. To make planting easy.

Methods of Primary Cultivation

  1. Hand digging. This is done by use of jembes, mattocks and fork jembes to cut and turn the soil slices.
  2. Mechanical cultivation. This is the use of tractor drawn implements such as mouldboard and disc ploughs. Subsoilers, cultivators and chisel ploughs are used to break the hard pan. Subsoiling is the process of cultivating the soil with the purpose of breaking up the hard pan. Hard pans may be formed due to continuous use of heavy machinery on the land.

Importance of subsoiling

  • Breaking up the hard pan hence improving drainage.
  • Improving soil aeration.
  • Bringing to the surface leached minerals.
  • Improve root penetration.
  1. Use of an oxplough. This is the use of ploughs drawn by oxen, donkeys or camels. The method is faster and more efficient than hand cultivation. It’s common in areas where land is fairly flat.

The following aspects should be considered when carrying out primary cultivation.

  1. Time of Cultivation

Land should be prepared before the onset of the rains so as to;

  • Give enough time for the weeds to dry up and decompose into organic matter.
  • To allow CO2 and other gases to diffuse out of the soil while being replaced by oxygen.
  • Give enough time for subsequent operations to be done hence giving way to early planting.
  1. Depth of Cultivation

This is determined by;

  • Type of crop to be planted. Shallow rooted crops do not deep cultivation. Deep rooted crops require deep cultivation.
  • Type of the soil. Heavy soils are hard when dry making jembes and fork-jembes to dig shallowly.
  • The implements available. Tractor drawn implements give deeper depth than hand operated tools.
  • Choice of the Correct Implements

This is determined by:

  1. Condition of the land. If the land has a lot of stones and stumps, a disc plough is preferred because it rolls over the obstacles without braking.
  2. Type of the tilth required.Very fine tilth requires different types of implements.
  3. Depth of cultivation. When deep cultivation is required heavy implements are used. Light implements are used when shallow cultivation is needed.
  4. Topography of the land. Tractor drawn implements cannot be used where the slope is very steep.
  5. Implements available. A farmer can only use what is locally available.
  6. Shape of the land. Some land shapes may not allow tractor drawn implements to be used efficiently e.g. where there are acute corners.
  7. Size of the land.
  8. Secondary Cultivation
  • This follows primary tillage.
  • This involves the refinement of the seedbed before planting.
  • It is also referred to as harrowing.
  • Small scale farmers can use pangas, jembes, fork-jembes, and garden rakes to break the soil clods and pulverize the soil.
  • Large scale farmers use factors drawn harrows such as disc harrows, spike toothed harrows, spring tine harrows.

IMPORTANCE OF SECONDARY CULTIVATION

  1. To remove any weeds that might have germinated immediately after primary cultivation.
  2. To break the soil clods into small pieces for easy planting.
  • To level the field so as to obtain the uniform depth of planting.
  1. Incorporate organic matter into the soil in order to encourage decomposition before planting.

Factors determining the number of times secondary cultivation is done.

  1. Size of the planting materials. Small seeds require a fine tilth than large seeds.
  2. Slope of the land. If the land is hilly, less number of secondary cultivations are preferred to discourage soil erosion.
  • Moisture content of the soil. in dry soils less operations are preferred so as to conserve the soil moisture.
  1. Condition of the land after primary cultivation. If after primary cultivation, a lot of trash is left, more harrowing operations should be carried out so as to incorporate the trash into the soil.
  2. Tertiary Operations
  • They are carried out to meet the needs of certain crops.
  • They are conducted after land clearing, primary and secondary cultivations. They include;
  1. Ridging
  • This is the process of digging soil in a continuous line and heaping it on one side to form a ridge (bund) and a furrow.
  • These ridges are used in planting crops such as Irish potatoes, cassava, groundnuts etc.
  • Ridges facilitate tuber expansion and easy harvesting of the root crops.
  • Furrows are made when planting sugarcane.
  • They help to conserve soil and water.
  1. Rolling
  • This is done to compact the soil which is loose or of fine tilth.
  • This is done to prevent small seeds from being blown away by the wind and to prevent soil erosion.
  • This also increase seed soil contact.
  • Heavy rollers are used in large scale.
  • Leveling
  • This is making the soil surface flat and uniform to promote easy germination of small seeded crops.
  • Rolling ensures uniform germination of seeds.

MINIMUM TILLAGE

This is the use of a combination of farming practices that disturb soil the least. These farming practices include;

  1. Application of herbicides in controlling weeds.
  2. Timing cultivation/timely weeding of the previous crop.
  • Mulch prevents weeds from growing.
  1. Restricting cultivation to the area where seeds are to be planted. Weeds in the rest of the field are controlled by slashing.
  2. Establishing a cover crop on the field.
  3. Uprooting or slashing weeds in perennial crops.

Reasons for carrying out minimum tillage

  1. Reduce the cost of cultivation. By reducing the number of operations.
  2. To control soil erosion.
  • To maintain soil structure.
  1. To conserve soil moisture. Continuous cultivation exposes the soil to sun’s heat hence evaporation of soil moisture.
  2. To prevent root and underground structures disturbance.
  3. To prevent exposure of humus to adverse conditions such as sun’s heat that cause volatilization of nitrogen

Soil Fertility I: (Organic Manures)

Soil Fertility: This is the ability of the soil to provide the crops with the required nutrients in proper proportions for high production.

Characteristics of Fertile Soils

  • Good Depth: Deep soil gives plants greater volume to obtain nutrients and also provide anchorage.
  • Good water holding capacity: This ensures that water is retained well for plant use.
  • Proper drainage: Well drained soils are well aerated facilitating healthy root development.
  • Correct soil pH.Different crops have different nutrient requirements.
  • Adequate nutrient supply. It should supply the crops with the nutrients they require in adequate amounts.
  • Free from excessive infestation of soil borne pests and diseases.

How Soil Loses Fertility

  1. Leaching. Soluble minerals are carried to lower horizons beyond the reach of plant roots.
  2. Mono cropping. Growing one type of crop continuously for a long time leads to the exhaustion of certain minerals that the plant uses.
  • Change of soil pH. Changes in the soil pH affect the activity of the soil microorganisms and the availability of certain soil nutrients.Use of some fertilizers can change the soil pH.
  1. Continuous cropping. Crops take up a lot of nutrients during their growth which are never returned to the soil. This makes the soil deficient of these plant nutrients.
  2. Burning of vegetation cover. This destroys the organic matter hence destruction of the soil structure.
  3. Soil erosion. When the fertile top soil is carried away, the soil loses its fertility.
  • Accumulation of salts. This is as result of irregular rainfall and insufficient removal of salts from the soil especially in the arid and semi arid areas. Accumulation of salts is called salinisation

Maintenance of Soil Fertility

  1. Control of soil erosion to enhance soil infiltration onto the soil and reduce surface run off.
  2. Weed control to prevent competition for nutrients. Water space and light with crops.  It also reduces pests and diseases.
  • Carrying out crop rotation, this helps to control accumulation of crop pests and diseases on the farm. It also helps to ensure maximum utilization of nutrients.
  1. Use of inorganic fertilizers helps to add nutrients to the soil e.g. CAN, DAP, Urea etc..
  2. Use of organic manure helps to supply organic matter to the soil.
  3. Minimum tillage which helps to maintain soil structure and prevent soil erosion.
  • Intercropping (Mixed cropping) of leguminous and non- leguminous crops fix nutrients and improve fertility.
  • Proper drainage by breaking hard pans or creation of water channels this ensures proper aeration.
  1. Control of pH to almost neutral to ensure proper functioning of micro-organisms which help in decomposition of organic matter.

Organic Manures

They are obtained from plant and an animal remains after decomposition.

Role/ Importance of Organic Matter                                                           Improves soil structure – aeration, drainage absorption and retention.

  1. Improve water holding capacity of the soil.
  2. Increases soil fertilityg. carbon nitrogen etc.
  • It provides food and shelter to soil microorganisms.
  1. Help to keep PH of soil stable (Buffers soil pH).
  2. Reduces toxicity of plant poisons that have build up in the soil as a result of continuous use of pesticides and fungicides etc.
  3. Humus gives soil dark appearance making the soil to absorb heat. This moderates soil temperature.

Problems Associated with the use of Organic Manures

  1. Bulkiness – they have low nutritive value per unit volume hence required in large volumes.
  2. Laborious in application and transportation – this is due to their bulkiness.
  3. They spread diseases, pests and weeds – e. if they are made from materials that are contaminated.
  4. Losses of Nutrients – if they are poorly stored, soluble nutrients are easily leached and some become volatilized when exposed to the hot sun.
  5. If used when not fully decomposed the plant does not benefit from them.

Types of Organic Manures

They are of three types:

  • Green Manure.
  • Farm Yard Manure (FYM)
  • Compost Manure.

Green Manure

  • It is made of green plants which are left to grow until flowering and then are incorporated into the soil through ploughing. The crops used include; cowpeas, groundnuts, Lucerne, beans, sunflower etc.

 

Characteristics of Plants used as Green Manure

  • Should be leafy or highly vegetative.
  • Should have high nitrogen content hence leguminous ones are preferred.
  • Should have a fast growth.
  • Must be capable of rotting quickly.
  • Should be hardy i.e. Capable of growing in poor conditions.

Reasons Why Green Manure is not Commonly Used

  • Most crops used for green manure are food crops
  • Takes time for the manure to decompose delaying planting
  • Most of the nutrients are used up by micro-organisms in the process of decomposing the green manure
  • Green manure might use most of the soil moisture and leave very little for the next crop

Farm Yard Manure (FYM)

  • This is mixture of animal waste (urine and dung) and crop remains used as animal beddings.
  • The quality of Farm Yard Manure is determined by the following factors.
  • Type of the animal used –
  • Dung from fattening animals has a high level of nutrients than that from a dairy cow.
  • Non ruminants such as hens and pigs give very rich dung in terms of nutrients.
  • Type of food eaten – nutritious feedstuffs give manure with more nutrients.
  • Type of litter used – wood shavings and sawdust are slow to decompose and contain very little nutrients as compared to leguminous ones which give manure rich in nutrients.
  • Method of storage – for manure to retain its nutritive status, it must be stored in place with a leak proof roof and a concrete floor.
  • Age of the farm yard manure –well rotten manure is rich in nutrients and is easy to apply.

Preparation of the farm Yard Manure

  • Provide materials such as grass or wood shavings in the animal house to serve as bedding.
  • Animals deposit their droppings and urine on the bedding and mix them by trampling.
  • After some time Collect the used animal bedding/litter and other rotten plant residues;
  • Store collected materials under roof/shed to prevent leaching and oxidization of nutrients;
  • Turnover the materials regularly;
  • Sprinkle water if dry;
  • Leave the material to rot completely before use

Compost Manure

  • This is a type of manure made from decomposed materials such as kitchen refuse, plant and animal remains.
  • The following factors are considered when selecting the site for making compost manure.
  • Well drained place – this avoids waterlogging which may cause leaching of nutrients.
  • Direction the prevailing wind – this aims at preventing bad smells from being blown to the homestead.
  • Size of the Farm –thesite should be centrally placed on the farm.
  • Accessibility – this makes transportation of the manure possible.

Preparation of Compost Manure

  • There are two methods of preparing compost manure;
    • Indore Method (pit Method)
    • Four Heap System (Stack Method).

Indore Method (pit Method)

  • A pit 1.2m long by 1.2m wide and 1.2m deep is made.
  • Te materials to be composted are placed in layers in the following order;
  • Fibrous materials such as maize stalks form the foundation.
  • They are followed by a layer of grass, leaves or any kitchen refuse material.
  • A layer of well rotten manure is then applied to provide nutrients for the microorganisms.
  • A thin layer of wood ash is applied to improve the level of phosphorous and potassium in the manure.
  • A layer of top soil is then added to introduce microorganisms that are required to decompose the organic materials..
  • The above sequence of layers is repeated until the pit is full.
  • A layer of soil is added to cover the pit.
  • During the dry season, the materials should be kept moist by adding water.

 

 
Grass, Leaves, Refuse etc.
Ash
Manure
Top Soil

 

  • Five pits are dug in series and materials filled as follows:
  • Pits I, II, III and IV are filled with the materials as described above.
  • After 3-4 weeks, the materials in pit IV are transferred to pit V, materials in pit III to IV, in pit II to pit III and in pit I to pit II.
  • Process is repeated until the materials are well rotten then taken to the filed as compost manure.

 

 

 

 

 

Pit I

 

 

 

Pit II

 

 

Pit III

 

 

Pit IV

 

 

Pit V

Four Heap System (Stack Method)

  • In this method four heaps are used.
  • The materials used are similar to those used in the pit method.

Construction

  • Vegetation is cleared from the ground.
  • Posts 2m high are fixed at a spacing of 1.2 by 1.2m forming the corners of the heap.
  • Wood planks are fixed on the sides to form the walls and materials are arranged as in the Indore method.
  • Materials are placed in the heaps labeled X and after 3-4 weeks they are transferred to pit Y.
  • After another 3-4 weeks, the compost materials are transferred to pit Z where they stay for some 3-4 weeks before they become ready to be taken to the field.
  • The manure should be turned occasionally to facilitate air circulation.
  • A stick is driven into the stack an angle to check the temperature.
  • If the temperature inside is high, it is corrected by adding water.

Diagrams

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

WATER SUPPLY, IRRIGATION AND DRAINAGE

WATER SUPPLY

The Hydrological Cycle

  • Water from the surface evaporates up the atmosphere, cools and condenses to form clouds.
  • Saturated clouds fall down to the earth as precipitation in form of rain.
  • This water returns back to the atmospheres through the process of evapo-transpiration.
  • The circulation of water from the earth’s surface to the atmosphere and back again is called the

Hydrological Cycle

Sources of Water

  • They include; surface water sources, underground water sources and rain.
  1. Surface water sources

They include;

  • Rivers, streams and dams.
  • Lakes
  1. Underground water sources

They include:

Assignment.

Make short notes on the various sources of surface and underground water.

  1. Rain water.

This is collected from rooftops and stored in tanks. Ponds cal also be dug to collect the runoff. Rain water is very pure compared to the other sources.

Water Collection and Storage

  • A dam is a barrier constructed to store water. Dams can be made of earth or concrete.
  • Grass should be planted on the embankment to prevent soil erosion.
  • Weirs are used to raise the water level in a river to facilitate pumping.
  • Water tanks.

These are made of concrete, stone, metal sheets, plastic or rubber. They should be covered to prevent water contamination.

 

 

 

 

 

Pumps and Pumping of Water

  • Pumping is the lifting of water from one point to another by use of mechanical force.

Types of water pumps

  1. Centrifugal/rotardynamic pumps.
  2. Piston/reciprocating pumps.
  • Semi-rotary pumps.

Conveyance of Water

  • This is the process of moving water from one point (source or storage point) to where it will be used or stored. This can be done through;
  1. Piping
  • In this case water moves through pipes.

Types and choices of pipes

  • Metal pipes

These are expensive but durable. They also can withstand high pressure.

  • Plastic pipes

They are cheap and easy to install. However they can burst under high water pressure, can break when exposed to the sun and can be gnawed by rodents such as moles.

  • Hose pipes

They are either made of rubber or plastic. Rubber ones are more expensive and more durable than the plastic ones.

  1. Use of containers

Containers such as jerry cans, drums and pots are used to draw water and are carried by various means such as bicycles and animals.

 

  • Use of canals

Water is conveyed from a high point to a lower point along a slope especially for irrigation purposes.

General Uses of Water on the Farm

  1. Domestic use – cooking, drinking, washing
  2. Cooling animals
  • Rearing fish
  1. Watering/ irrigation plants
  2. Cleaning calf pens, milking sheds
  3. Watering livestock / drinking
  • Diluting / dissolving chemical used to control pests, parasites and weeds
  • Mixing concrete in construction
  1. Cooling and running machine engines
  2. Processing farm produce eg coffee hides, carrots
  3. Recreation eg swimming pools

 

WATER TREATMENT

Importance of Water Treatment

  1. Kill disease causing microorganisms.
  2. Remove chemical impurities such as excess fluoride.
  • Remove bad smells and bad tastes.
  1. Remove sediments of solid particles such as soil and sand.

Process of Water Treatment

Stage I:     Filtration of water intake.

– Water from Source River is made to pass through a series of sieves.

– Large particles of impurities are trapped by the sieves.

– Water then enters into the large pipe to be directed to the mixing chamber.

Stage II:   Softening of the water

  • Water circulates in the mixing chamber and doses of soda ash to soften the water.

Stage III:  Coagulation and sedimentation

  • Water is passed through coagulation tank where fresh air enters to remove bad smell/ chloride of lime used.
  • Water stays for 36 hours thus solid particles settle and bilharzias causing organisms killed.
  • Alum is added to coagulate solid particles which settle at the bottom.

Stage IV:  Filtration

  • Water is passed through filtration tank with layers of sand and gravel to filter it.
  • Water leaving the filtration tank is clean.

Stage V:   Chlorination

  • Water is passed through chlorination tank where chlorine is added.
  • Micro-organisms in the water are killed by chlorine.

Stage VI:  Storage – The treated water is stored in large overhead tanks before distribution and use.

 

Diagram

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Water Treatment by Boiling

  • Boiling kills germs in water such as those causing bilharzias, cholera and typhoid.

 

IRRIGATION

  • This is the artificial application of water to the soil to supply crops with sufficient moisture for growth.
  • It is usually practiced;
  1. In dry areas.
  2. During dry periods.
  • In the growing of paddy rice.

General importance’s of Irrigation.

  1. Enable crop production during dry season
  2. Reclaim arid and semi arid land for farming
  3. Supplement rainfall in crop production
  4. Help provides enough water to crops that require a lot of water like rice
  5. Creates favourable temperature for proper plant growth
  6. Enable supply of fertilizer in irrigation water
  7. Make possible to grow crops in special structures like green house

Types of Irrigation

Factors considered when choosing type of irrigation system

  1. Capital availability– this determines the type of irrigation systems to be used. Drip and overhead irrigation systems require high capital for installation and maintenance
  2. Topography– Surface irrigation requires flat areas
  3. Water availability– Surface irrigation requires a lot of water. Drip and overhead irrigation requires less water
  4. The type of soil- Surface irrigation is best suited for clay soils because they retain water for a long time.
  5. The type of crop / value of the crop / benefit analysis. Crop to be irrigated should be of high value to justify the irrigation cost
  6. The availability of clean water – drip and overhead irrigation requires clean water to prevent blockage of the systems
  7. Surface Irrigation
  • Water is brought to the crop fields from the source by use of canals or furrows. The following method are used here; Flood Irrigation, Furrow Irrigation and Basin Irrigation.
  • The following factors are considered when choosing the method to use in surface irrigation.
  1. Topography– Surface irrigation requires flat areas
  2. Water availability– Surface irrigation requires a lot of water.
  3. The type of soil- Surface irrigation is best suited for clay soils because they retain water for a long time.

Flood Irrigation

  • The entire field is flooded with water.
  • The method is cheap to establish and maintain but there is uneven distribution of water to crops and a lot of water is wasted.

Furrow Irrigation

  • Irrigation water flows from canals into furrows..
  • Furrows should be maintained by repairing when eroded or worn out, removing the weeds and silt.

Advantages

  • Cheap to establish and maintain.
  • Requires little skill to maintain.
  • Reduces fungal diseases such as blight since there is no wetness on the leaves.

Disadvantages

  • Soil erosion may occur.
  • A lot of water is lost through evaporation and seepage.

Basin Irrigation

  • An area enclosed by walls called embankments/levees is flooded. The method is common in the rice growing areas. Such as MweaTebere, Ahero, Bunyala etc.
  1. Sub-Surface Irrigation and Drip/Trickle Irrigation
  • This involves laying perforated pipes underground to allow water to pass out through tiny holes and wet the soil around the zones of the crop.

Advantages

  • Minimizes labour requirement especially in changing of water pipes.
  • Minimizes possible theft of water pipes.
  • Economizes on the use of water.
  • Can be practiced on both sloppy and flat land.
  • There is no soil erosion.
  • No growth of weed between the rows.
  • Water under low pressure can be used as long as it can flow along the pipes.
  • Controls fungal diseases such as blight because water does not accumulate on the leaves.
  • There is no need of constructing dykes, leveling or making

Disadvantages

  • Expensive to install.
  • Pipes can be broken during weeding or land preparation.
  • Nozzles can get blocked making irrigation inefficient hence the method requires clean water.
  1. Overhead/Sprinkler Irrigation
  • In this case water is applied to the plants in form of spray using sprinklers or watering cans.
  • The sprinklers and pipes used must be maintained as follows.
  • Lubricating the rotating parts to reduce friction.
  • Repairing any broken parts.
  • Cleaning to unblock the nozzles.

Advantages of sprinkler irrigation

  1. There is even distribution of water over the area required
  2. Less water is required / less water wastage
  3. Can be practiced on sloppy land
  4. It is possible to apply foliar fertilizers with irrigation water / fertigation
  5. Irrigation pipes / sprinklers can easily be moved from one area to another
  6. Irrigation water cleans off dust from plant leaves for better functioning
  7. Helps to control aphids.

Disadvantages

  1. Expensive to install.
  2. Encourages fungal diseases such as blight and coffee berry disease due to wetting of the leaves.
  • Can cause soil erosion if not well controlled especially on sloppy ground.
  1. May require the establishment of a wind break.
  2. Maintenance is expensive as it requires a lot of skill

Factors considered in choosing irrigation water pipes

  1. Durability- Shown by the quality of the materials the pipes are made of
  2. Length of the pipes- This is determined by the size of the farm and the source of water / water supply point.
  3. Diameter of the pipe- Determines the volume of water to be conveyed in the pipes
  4. Water pressure- High water pressure requires strong pipes to prevent bursting
  5. Resistance to heat from the sun- Pipes crack and become brittles if exposed to the sun
  6. Resistance to pest damage- Plastic pipes are easily damaged / gnawed by rodents
  7. Cost of the pipes- Aluminium pipes may be expensive when used for irrigation

Drainage

  • This is the removal of excess water from waterlogged land. It is done to reclaim marshy areas for agricultural production.

Importance of Drainage

  1. To increase soil aeration. When excess water is removed from the soil, plant roots get enough air for growth.
  2. Increase soil volume. Drainage increases the amount of soil around the root zone making it possible for plants to obtain nutrients.
  • Raise soil temperature. Drainage improves the arte at which the soil becomes warm for maximum plant growth.
  1. Increase microbial activities. Proper aeration as a result of drainage increases the number of microorganisms in the soil.
  2. Reduce soil erosion. Well drained soils have high water holding capacity which helps to reduce surface run-off increasing the infiltration rate.
  3. Remove toxic substances. When there is water-logging, salts accumulate to toxic levels in the soil. Drainage removes such salts from the soil.

 Methods of drainage                                         

  1. Use of open ditches/channels/furrows.
    • Ditches are dug for water to flow by gravity lowering the water table.
  2. Use of underground pipes
    • Perforated pipes are laid underground and water seeps into them, then flows to a water way. The pipes are made of plastic, metal (steel) or clay.
  3. French drains
    • Ditches are dug and filed with stones and gravel and then covered with soil.
    • Water from the surrounding area seeps into tem the flows to a water way.
Soil
Stones

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Cambered beds
    • Raised beds are constructed in combination with ditches in the poorly drained soil such as the black cotton soil.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Mechanically pumping
    • In the low lying areas where the other methods of drainage cannot be practiced, water is mechanically pumped out of the soil.
  2. Planting of Trees
    • Trees such as eucalyptus can be planted in water logged areas as they lose a lot of water through transpiration.

Water Pollution

This is the introduction of harmful substances into the water.

Agricultural Practices that Pollute Water

  1. Use of inorganic fertilizers

Fertilizers used get leached through the soil and are carried to water bodies.

  1. Use of pesticides

Excess pesticides seep into the soil and find their way to the water bodies causing pollution.

  1. Poor cultivation practices. These practices include:
    • Over cultivation. This causes soil erosion hence siltation in water bodies.
    • This also causes soil erosion hence pollution in water bodies.
    • Cultivation along the riverbanks. Also causes soil erosion hence siltation in water bodies.

Methods of Preventing water Pollution

  1. Soil conservation measures to minimize soil erosion.
  2. Fencing of water sources to minimize pollution by animals.
  3. Enforcing integrated ways of controlling pest and weeds that do not use chemicals such organic farming.
  4. Planting vegetation along the river banks to avoid siltation.
  5. Using adequate storm control methods in the areas experiencing heavy rains.

FARM TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT REVISION QUESTIONS

1       The diagrams below are of farm tools and equipment. Study them and answer the questions that follow

  1. i) Identify the tools 1 mk
  2. ii) Give one functional difference between the tools above. 1 mk
  3. The diagram below show farm equipment. Use them to answer the questions that follow.
  4. a) Identify the equipments M and L.                            (1mk)
  5. b) State the functional difference between M and L.            (2mks)
  6. c) State TWO common maintenance practices carried out on both M and L. (2mks)
  7. The diagram below shows a farm equipment study it and answers the questions that follow.

 

[a]     Identify the equipment.                                                [1mk]

[b]    Name the parts labeled.                                                [2mks]

W;  X ; Y;  Z

[c]    What is the function of the part labelled Z.                  [1mk]

  1. Study the diagrams below and answer the questions that follow.

(a)    Identify the tools.       A-B-C-D                                                                         (2mks)

(b)   State the correct use of each of the tools above.                                              (2mks)

(c)  Give two maintenance practices carried out on tool D for efficient use.                               (1mk)

5       (a)   Name four types of tools used in smoothing wood.                                           (2mks)

(b)    Give three reasons why farm tools and equipment should be well maintained.  (11/2mk)

  1. Below is a diagram of farm equipment. Use it to answer the questions that follow.
  2. a) Identify the equipment.                                                    ( ½mk)

(b) State two reasons for your choice in (a) above                                                  (1mk)

  1. b) State the use of the equipment          (1mk)
  2. c) Name the parts labelled G,E and F. (1 ½ mks)
  3. d) Identify two draw backs in using this equipment compared to others that may be used for the same purpose. (2mks)
  4. Identify the farm tool and equipment illustrated in the diagram labeled k and L and give one use of each equipment.

Equipment                         identity                      Use

(a) K                  ……………………………….         …………………………………………………………….

L                 ……………………………….         ……………………………………………………………..

(b) Give the care and maintenance of L                                 (1mk

  1. Observe the tools X and Y illustrated below and answer the questions that follow:-
  2. a) Identify the tools. X ; Y                                                    (2 mks)
  3. b) State one use of each of the following tools. X;Y (2 mks)
  4. c) State three maintenance practices carried out on tool X. (3 mks)
  5. The diagram below illustrate a workshop tool
  6. Identify the tool………………………………………………………………………(1mk)
  7. Name the parts labeled S, T and U (3mks)
  8. State the use of the tool (1mk)
  9. Study the diagrams of livestock production tools below and answer questions that follow.
  10. a) Identify the tools E, F, G and H.                              (4mks)
  11. b) State two maintenance practice of the equipment E.         (2mks)
  12. Below are diagrams of workshop tools.
(iii)
(i)
(ii)
(iv)

 

 

State the functions of tools.                                                            (4mks)

(i)………………………………………………………………………

(ii)……………………………………………………………………………

(iii)……………………………………………………………………………

(iv)……………………………………………………………………………

  1. b) What is the name given to the metallic brush which is used to clean out wood chippings from tool (i) above.
  • Study the diagrams of garden tools shown below and answer the question that follo

(i) State two field conditions under which tool A would be more suitable for use in crop

Production                                                                     (2mks)

(ii)       Give the function of the tool labelledC.                                    (1mk)

(iii) State two maintenance practices of the tool labelledB.                                    (2mks)

  1. Study the diagrams below labeled P,Q,R and S representing some workshop tools and then answer the questions that follow.
 
 
  1. a) identify the tools          2mks

Tool                                   Name

P               ………………………………………….

Q              …………………………………………

R               …………………………………………

S               …………………………………………

  1. b) Give one use of tools P and R in the construction of a wooden feed trough.1mk

P ………………………………………

R ……………………………………….

  1. c) How would the tool labelled Q be used in the construction of a calf pen? ½ mk
  2. d) Give two maintenance practices carried out on tool S. 1mk
  3. Study the diagram below of farm tools and equipment and answer questions that follow.

 

(i)     Identify tool M and N                                                            (1mk)

M……………………………………………………..

N………………………………………………………

(ii)    State one functional difference between M and N                 (1mk)

(iii)   State two maintenance practices of tool M.                  (1mk)

FARM TOOLS ANSWERS

1  A)

Tenon / back saw

Cross – cut saw/ rip saw/ hand saw                                       (1 mk)

  1. b) Tenon saw- For cutting tenon joints / fine sawing reject cutting joints alone

Cross cut- saw cutting across the grains of wood                          (2 mks)

2 a)   M – milking bucket / pail (reject milk bucket / pail)

L- Milk churn / can (reject milking churn)                   2 x ½ = 1mks

  1. b) M – used for holding milk during milking 2 x 1 = 2mks

L – Used for holding milk during transportation

  1. c) i) Washing thoroughly with hot water 2 x 1= 2mks
  2. ii) Sterilizing using recommended detergent

4 .(a) A-garden trowel

B-elastrator

C- Plumb bob/ plumb line

D- Jack plane                                                                                                (½ x 4)

(b)

Tool use
A -for lifting seedlings from the nursery during transplanting.
B -for applying/ fixing the rubber ring during castration docking or dehorning
C -checks the vertical straightness of a stone wall during castration.
D -for smoothening rough wood surfaces.

(c)

  • Sharpening the blades regularly
  • Replacing broken handles and knob
  • Tightening loose parts ( screws)
  • Adjusting appropriately the lever cap. ( ½ x 2)
  1. a) –       Stir-up pump. √½
  2. b) –       Spraying livestock  √1
  3. c) –       E-Trigger  √½

–       F-Nozzle √½

–       G-(Brass) lance. √½                                                      1 ½mk

  1. d) –       Need two people to operate. √1

–       Not easy to carry about during operation. √1                                  1 x 2=2mk

Equipment Identify Use
K ………………….. – Hypodermic

syringe / syringe

And needle

– Inject

Animals to introduce

Drug or vaccine

L – Adjustable spanner – Holding different sizes of nuts and bolts

( Accept tightening / loosening )

 

 

  1. (i) Auger bit (1 x 1 = 1mk)

(ii) S – shank

T-Twist threads

U-Spur                 (3 x 1 = 3mks)

(iii)Making holes (boring holes on the wood                        ( 1mk)

12  (i) Conditions under which tool labeled A is used

  • Hard ground/ soils
  • A stony field
  • Field with rhizomes/stolons/ roots
  • A field with sticky soils(2×1 =2mks)

(ii) Functions of the tool labeled C

  • Cutting pruning undesirable branches/ stems of trees/fruits/coffee/
  • Cutting pruning excessive vegetative parts(1×1 =1mk)

(iii) Maintenance practices of tool labeled B

  • Clean /remove soil/trash after use
  • Straighten the prongs if bend
  • Replace the handle if broken
  • Fix the handle firmly on the rake(2×1 =2mks)

13.a)

Tool Name
P Try square
Q Spirit level
R Tenon saw/back saw
S Cold chisel

½ x 4=2 MKS

  1. Use of tools P and R in the construction of a wooden feed trough

P-Measuring angles/ layout of angles/ measuring lengths

R- Cutting timber to make joints/ used for joinery work

-Fine cutting/ sawing

½ x1=1/2mk

  1. Use of Q in the construction of a calf pen

To determine if the floor level/ the walls are vertical.

½ x1= ½  mk

  1. Maintenance practices on tool S

-Sharpening the cutting edge

-Removing the mushroom head

½ x2=2mks

  • i) M- hack saw

N- hand saw

  1. ii) Functional differences between M and N

– hack saw (M) is used for cutting metal rods and plates while (N) hand saw is used for cutting wood/timber                                                                                 (1×1=1mk)

iii) maintenance practices

  • tighten loose screws and nuts (ref.bolt)
  • replace worn out blade
  • regular cleaning
  • hang properly to avoid possible damage
  • maintain correct tension of the blade

 

OTHER REVISION QUESTIONS

  1. a). What is Agriculture?

b).  State the roles played by agriculture in national development

d).  i)  Briefly outline the problems that have hindered agricultural development

in Kenya.

  1. ii) Suggest ways in which these problems can be alleviated
  2. a) i) What are the characteristics of shifting cultivation?
  3. ii) State the problems associated with shifting cultivation.
  4. What is pastoralism?
  5. State the factors to consider in choosing a type of farm
  6. What is arable farming?
  7. i) State the advantages of mixed farming
  8. ii) State the limitations of mixed farming
  9. i) Give the types of farming practised by small scale farmers
  10. Name the types of large scale farming
  • Why does the Kenya government put a lot of emphasis on ranching?
  1. State the common features of ranching as a farming system:
  2. i) State the advantages of plantation farming
  3. State the disadvantages of plantations.
  • State the major characteristics of plantation farming.
  1. a) List the ecological factors affecting agriculture.
  2. Mention the aspects of rainfall which are important in crop production
  3. i) What is optimal temperature?
  4. ii) State the effects of high temperature on crop production.
  5. State the negative effects of wind to crops.
  6. a). i. Define the term soil

ii).  Name the ways in which soil is important to growing plants.

b).  i)  State the factors which influence the soil forming process

ii).  What biological agents influence the speed of the soil forming process?

  1. i) Define the term soil Profile
  2. ii) How does soil profile influence plant growth?
  3. i) List the constituents of a fertile soil.
  4. ii) What role do micro-organisms play in soil?
  5. i) What is soil structure?
  6. ii) State the farming practices that improve soil structure.

iii) Why is a good soil structure desireable for growing crops.

  1. i) What is soil texture?
  2. State the properties of soil that are influenced by its texture.
  • Give the types of soil based on texture.
  1. a) State the advantages of using farm tools.
  2. List the factors that determine a farmer’s choice of tools and equipment.
  3. i) Why should tools and equipment to maintained well?
  4. ii) How should tools and equipment be maintained?
  5. List the safety precautions necessary for tools and equipment
  6. Name the categories of farm tools and equipment.
  7. a) State the importance of land preparation.
  8. b) i) What is primary cultivation?
  9. ii) Which factors influence choice of tools for primary cultivation.
  10. i) What is secondary cultivation?
  11. ii) Give reasons for secondary cultivation?
  12. i) Define minimum tillage

iii)  State reasons for practising minimum tillage.

  1. Name the factors that determine the number of tillage operations during seedbed preparation.
  2. a) List the sources of water on the farm.
  3. How is water conveyed from one point to another?
  4. i) Name the types of water pipes.

iii)  What features are considered when buying plastic pipes?

  1. Name the types of water pumps to be used on the farm.
  2. i) Why should water be treated before use?
  3. ii) State the methods of treating water on the farm.

iii)  How is water used on the farm?

  1. a) i) What is irrigation?
  2. ii) List the factors to consider in deciding to irrigate crops.
  3. b) List the major types of irrigation
  4. a) i)  What are the uses of farm records
  5. List types of records kept on mixed farms.
  6. List types of records kept by crop farmers.
  • , goat, pigs, bees, fish, donkey, camel

10  b) i) Explain the role of livestock in human life

  1. ii) List factors that affect livestock industry in Kenya.
  2. c) i) List dairy breeds of cattle
  3. ii) State their characteristics.
  4. i) Name beef cattle breeds.
  5. ii) What are the characteristics of beef cattle.
  6. Name the important rabbit breeds in Kenya.
  7. Name the major breeds of sheep in Kenya and indicate the purpose they are kept for
  8. Name important goat breeds and their uses
  9. Name important pig breeds kept in Kenya.
  10. i) Give the meanings of exotic and to indigenous breeds.
  11. State the characteristics of exotic cattle that make them better suited to marginal areas than exotic cattle breeds.
  • What are the advantages of keeping a Jersey cow instead of Friesian for production of milk?
  1. i) State the general characteristics of exotic cattle breeds.
  2. ii) Give the characteristics of indigenous cattle
  3. Below is a diagram of a nursery for raising the seedlings.

(a)    State two advantages of having the part labeled J                                    (2mks)*Nrk*

(b)       State any 3 management practices that should be carried out on the nursery from the time seedlings emerge to the stage of transplanting                                                        3mks)*Nrk

  1. a) i)  What is soil fertility?
  2. State the characteristics of a fertile soil.
  • How can a fertile soil loss its fertility

iv).  State the ways of maintaining or improving soil fertility

  1. i) What are plant nutrients?
  2. ii) Name the major plant nutrients (macro-nutrients)
  3. State the roles and deficiency of the following nutrients in plants.
  4. i) Nitrogen uses

·      Excessive supply

  1. Phosphorous used.

·      Deficiency

  • Potassium uses.

Deficiency.

  1. i) What is soil sampling?
  2. List the methods of soil sampling.
  • State the reasons for soil testing:
  1. Explain the procedure of soil sampling:
  2. State precautions necessary during soils sampling
  3. Name the methods of detecting nutrient deficiency in crops:
  4. State the importance of soil PH to a crop:

13  a)  i)  Differentiate between manure and fertilizer:

  1. List the common organic manures

b). i)  What is organic matter?

  1. State the importance of organic matter
  • How can organic matter be added to soil?
  1. c) i) Describe how to make farm Yard manure:
  2. ii) State the factors determining quality of farm yard manure

iii)  Give the advantages of using Farm Yard Manure over fertilizer:

  1. Give the disadvantages of using farm yard manure
  2. d) i) State the factors to consider when citing a compost pit.
  3. Describe how to make compost manure
  4. i) How is green manuring done on the farm?
  5. List the characteristics of green manure crops:
  • What are the advantages of green manuring?

14a)  Classify fertilizers by nutrient content.

  1. b) i) Name the common nitrogenous fertilizers.
  2. State properties of nitrogenous fertilizers/ (characteristics)
  • When are they applied and why at that time?
  1. c) i) Name the common phosphatic fertilizers:
  2. When are they applied and why at the time?
  3. i) Name the common potassic fertilizers
  4. Characteristics:
  5. i) What is fertilizer application?
  6. List the methods of fertilizer application:
  • What is top dressing?
  1. i) Calculate the amount of K2O (potassium chloride) contained in 400 kg of a compound fertilizer 25:10:5 – 5kg of K2O is contained in 100kg of 25:10:5
  2. A farmer is to apply a compound fertilizer 20:30:10 on a vegetable plot measuring 5 metres long by 4 metres wide, at the rate of 200kg per hectare.
  3. Calculate the amount of the fertilizer the farmer would require for the plot. (show your working)
  4. What do the figures 20, 30 and 10 in the fertilizer stand for
  • How much of a fertilizer labeled (20:20:10) should be applied to a plot which requires 30 kg P2O5?
  1. a) i) State the importance of the nitrogen cycle
  2. Describe the nitrogen cycle:
  • What happens to nitrogen in the soil?
  1. b) i) State the importance of carbon cycle
  2. Describe the carbon cycle
  • How is carbon lost?
  1. How can carbon be restored to the atmosphere?
  2. a) i) Define crop propagation.
  3. What are the methods of crop propagation?
  4. b) i) List the different methods of vegetative propagation:
  5. State advantages of vegetative propagation.
  • State its disadvantages.
  1. i) What are the advantages of seed propagation
  2. State the disadvantages of seed propagation
  3. i) Give the advantages of early planting
  4. State the factors to consider when selecting seeds or other planting materials for planting
  • What are the reasons for seed selection?
  1. What practices are carried out for seeds to ensure that they germinate?
  2. i) List the methods of planting
  3. State the advantages of row planting.
  • State the factors which influence planting depth.
  1. What factors determine crop spacing?
  2. State the advantages of correct spacing
  3. Why is correct plant population necessary?
  4. Name the treatments necessary on planting materials before planting?

17a)  What is a nursery?

  1. State the reasons for using a nursery.
  2. State the nurseries management practices.
  3. Explain the following nursery practices.
  4. i) Pricking out.
  5. Hardening off.

Free Updated Secondary School Schemes of Work

Past KCPE Revision Papers Free Downloads

Past KCPE Revision Papers Free Downloads

Class 8 KCPE past papers, revision exams and made familiar handbooks free

Are you need in need of free KCPE past papers, revision exams and made familiar handbooks? Look no further. You can now get free…

Class 8 KCPE past papers, predictions, termly exams and marking schemes

Are you looking for class 8 KCPE past papers, predictions, termly exams and marking schemes? Get these and many more KCPE revision materials by…

KCPE Past Papers and Predictions Free Downloads

KCPE Past Papers and Predictions Free Downloads CA&SSTRE KPSEA 2023 PREDICTIONS .pdf PSC——-INTERNSHIP VACANCIES_EARLY LEARNING AND BASIC EDUCATION (1).pdf SCI KCPE ANALYSIS…

KCPE past KNEC papers and marking schemes – Topical revision resource for all subjects

REVISING KCPE KNEC PAST PAPERS TOPICALLY ANALYSED PRACTICE QUESTIONS FOR ALL SUBJECTS CONTENTS   SUBJECT TOPICS PAGE MATHEMATICS 1.Numbers 6 –8 2.Operation on numbers 8 – 12 3.Measurement (length ,area ,volume) 12 –16 4.Weight/Mass 16 – 18 5.Money…

Class 8 KCPE past papers, predictions, topicals, revisions free downloads

Are you searching for free Class 8 KCPE past papers, predictions, topicals, revisions, Jesma series and many other materials? Yes. You have found the…

KCPE PAST PAPERS ALL ANSWERS

KCPE *MATHS* *MARKING* SCHEME 2021 1C 2C 3B 4C 5B 6D 7C 8D 9A 10A 11A 12D 13B 14D 15C 16B 17B 18C 19C 20A 21C 22A 23D 24B 25A 26D 27D 28A 29D 30D 31A 32C 33D 34B 35B 36A 37A 38D 39C 40D 41C 42B 43B 44A 45B 46B 47D 48A 49C 50C : ENGLISH KCPE 2020 1.B 2.C 3.A 4.D 5.B 6.C 7.A 8.D 9.B 10.C 11.A 12.D 13.B 14.C 15.A 16.B 17.D 18.C 19.A 20.B 21.D 22.C 23.B 24.D 25.A 26.B 27.A 28.C 29.A 30.B 31.C 32.A 33.C 34.B 35.C 36.D 37.B 38.C 39.C 40.D 41.B 42.A 43.C 44.D 45.B 46.A 47.C 48.D 49.B 50.D SOCIAL STUDIES. *K.C.P.E 2020 ANSWERS* 1.A 2.D 3.C 4.C 5.A 6.B 7.D 8.D 9.A 10.D 11.A 12.D 13.B 14.D 15.B 16.D 17.C 18.B 19.C 20.B 21.C 22.B 23.B 24.D 25.D 26.B 27.A 28.C 29.B 30.A 31.B 32.B 33.A 34.D 35.D 36.A 37.D 38.C 39.B 40.B 41.C 42.C 43.D 44.B 45.C 46.B 47.C 48.A 49.B 50.C 51.B 52.D 53.B 54.D 55.B 56.D 57.C 58.C 59.A 60.A *KCPE 2020 SCIENCE MARKING SCHEME* 1. D 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. B 6. D 7. B 8. A 9….

Revising KCPE- All KNEC Past Papers and Marking Schemes Free

REVISING KCPE KNEC PAST PAPERS TOPICALLY ANALYSED PRACTICE QUESTIONS FOR ALL SUBJECTS CONTENTS SUBJECT TOPICS PAGE MATHEMATICS 1.Numbers 6 –8 2.Operation on numbers 8 – 12 3.Measurement (length ,area ,volume) 12 –16 4.Weight/Mass 16 – 18 5.Money…

KCPE all KNEC Past Papers plus Marking Schemes

KCPE all KNEC Past Papers plus Marking Schemes KCPE 2016 FULL SET-1.pdf KCPE ANSWERS 2000-2018.pdf KCPE 2018 FULL SET-1.pdf KCPE 2017 FULL SET.pdf KCPE 2015 FULL…

KCPE Setting Criteria, Knec Reports & Expected Questions For CRE

KCPE CRE 2020-2021 KNEC REPORT SYLLABUS COVERAGE AND THE SKILLS TESTED The areas covered in the syllabus together with the skills tested in the examination are…

KCPE Results – How To Check KNEC KCPE Results Via SMS and Online

Education Cabinet Secretary George Magoha has said that KCPE Results 2022 will be out any time from now. Sources at Kenya National Examination Council (Knec)…

KCPE Setting Criteria, KNEC Reports

Get the latest KCPE Setting Criteria and KNEC Reports here; KCPE CRE KNEC REPORT SYLLABUS COVERAGE AND THE SKILLS TESTED The areas covered in the syllabus together…

kcse, kpsea and kcpe registration-dates for candidates-registration dates, deadline and requirements

The Kenya National Examinations Council (Knec) has opened the 2023 Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (KCSE), KCPE, KPSEA  candidates’ registration portal. Knec has released…

CLASS 8 KCPE REVISION PAPERS; FREE QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS DOWNLOADS

Class eight (8) pupils can now download unlimited Kenya Certificate of Primary Education (KCPE) revision papers here. The papers come with their marking schemes….

How to download the KCPE results for the whole school and via KNEC…

You can now receive your Kenya Certificate of Primary Education (KCPE) results from the Kenya National Examination Council (KNEC). You can receive your…

KNEC Bookshop- Available Reports, Past Papers & Revision Books Price list

THE KENYA NATIONAL EXAMINATIONS COUNCIL PUBLICATIONS SOLD IN THE BOOKSHOP WITH THEIR PRICE LIST THE KENYA NATIONAL EXAMINATIONS COUNCIL PUBLICATIONS  SOLD  IN  THE  BOOKSHOP  WITH  THEIR  PRICE …

Free Agriculture notes, revision questions, KCSE past Papers, Exams, Marking Schemes, Topical revision materials,…

Agriculture is an a Technical & Applied subject as classified by the Kenya National Examinations Council, Knec. At the Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education…

KCSE English revision papers, past papers, predictions, Mocks and Answers

KCSE ENGLISH PAPER 1 PREDICTION QUESTIONS & ANSWERS Teachers’ Resources Media Team @Educationnewshub.co.ke –  1 This English Revision questions and marking schemes pamphlet is a compilation of 2021 KCSE…

KCPE Prediction Exams, Questions, Revisions and Answers

2023 KCPE Prediction Exams, Questions, Revisions and Answers BRILIANT KCPE MATHS STD 8.pdf BRILLIANT ENGLISH KCPE MARKING SCHEME.pdf BRILLIANT KCPE SCIENCE STD 8.pdf BRILLIANT KCPE…

Knec Book Shop – Get all KCSE, KCPE Revision Papers and Reports

The Knec Book Shop The Kenya National Examinations Council (KNEC) Bookshop was established in 1992 to offer feedback examinations reports, questions and marking schemes. In performing…

Grade 8 Notes, Schemes of Work & Exams {Ultimate Downloads}

FREE GRADE 8 CBC RESOURCES

1: Grade 8 CBC Exams, Free For Term 1 to 3
2: Grade 8 Rationalized Work of Records Covered
3: Grade 8 Latest Rationalized Notes
4: Grade 8 Latest Exam Papers with Answers {Best Collection}
5: Grade 8 Rationalized Schemes of Work
6: Grade 8 Rationalized Term 2 Schemes of Work
7: Grade 8 Free CBC Exams
8: Grade 8 Free Lesson Plans For All Subjects
9: Grade 8 schemes of work Free download pdf {Term 1, 2 & 3 Free)
10: Grade 8 CBC Exams, Free For Term 1 to 3

Grade 8 Free Notes

Grade 8 Free Schemes of Work

Grade 8 CBC free Schemes of works

Grade 8 CBC Schemes of Work – Free Download

Grade 8 Free Exams

Latest Grade 8 Exams Free Downloads

Free Revised and Final CBC Grade 8 Curriculum Designs

Grade 9 Free Notes

Free Grade 8 CBC Notes and Schemes of Work